Dokumen - Tips Mazak Mazatrol Matrix Control Classroom Maintenance Manual C740mt0201e

MAZATROL
MATRIX
CLASS ROOM
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Mazak
igital M§JTUf@PMtOg Solutions
IN
ONE
MATRIX Sale points
'0? i
lifiM ...
. t4 f*
/: ..4
; : display
|e
mctions.
'
M jySgQyyj~T- vC 1
1
-
I 1
,
&2AWOX
s==
i
- J1
u g0 'ÿ3Spic5Sgv';; .; S313 i
A
M 1
l 4;
J -'-
I.-'-'1' ‘
M
.
{ •
;/• lÿ
*
|g|| •
a
•ÿ-ÿ•ÿ:= •ÿ••ÿÿ » . ‘-vV> V- -.1
mi
:~ lwj *. It Iflj1 G3i f 1 :'•'<
a f v;1:1:1;1:1:1:1;1.
-l~f *
*
TTI
I < f * I * I * J*fll‘ 3 I-I-~I 11§2 ,’
j
£» <?«ÿ 1& mMm
- 1 1*. IT
>ÿÿ'1
1
jTBil I j
I m
M
[’-T’TT
W
1
2
C type MATRIX
:.S INTE-M-INTE-eHU
_ _
machine INTE-DI • INTE-e
Variaxis II -INTE-eVll
15 TFT 1 2 . 1 TFT
display
(XGA) (SVGA)
PC
CPU _ Pentium in
1,26GHz
Geode
300MHz
NC 6 4 bit RISC 6 4 bit RISC
V.'-v.
CP U Dual CP U Single CP U >1
PL C No . of steps: 128k No. of steps :64k

capability process time: 16.6ns process time: 160ns
Servo MDS-DH series MDS-CH series
AM P cycle time :11 M S cycle time: 55 MS
servo 3000/ 4000 r.p.m

2000/3000 r.p.m
motor (depend on motor)
encoder
16,000,000 pp r 1,000,000 pp r
capability
PC Windows 2000
Windows XP
OS type (Windows 9 5 )
Ergonomically Designed Control Pane
1. Large display
(1 5inch)
n '1
Hi 1$
i I
: I
LvJ
\i
2. QWERTY key 1 e. i
:
6. Key layout by
,* < :r • ,
h
function
:
3, Acrylic key top j - .1 i 1 -VI I - •

i
for easy click II 7. Same design for all

machines
4. Rotary override
switches
- dm A
K
* 8. Tactile feel switches
-‘L ... Y;
CM
i T i1
- allow an operator §
f
M
5. Operation I 3 to detect by feel
switches in
operator side
—
- ~ r il
3
4
Th e equipment of a USB interface as standard has facilitated data upload/download and connection to peripheral equipments
that support IJSB.
In addition, large volumes of data can be transferred at high speed between networks with the 100BASE-TX compliant
LA N and that realizes seamless communications between an office and a machine in a factory.
Interface Connected to Standard

SB 'Front / 3ch USB 1.1
thernet iBack / lch 1 1 00BASE-TX/1 OBASE-T
|
jPC Card Standard 95/97 compliant (CardBus)
iPC card iBack / 2 slots Card Standard compliant (PCMCIA_V2. 1, JEIDA_4.2 compliant)
j 2 slots Type I/U ma x 2, Type IE: 1
r
jPC Card Standard ATA compliant memory card only

C card Front / 1 slot
: 1 slot Type I/E (Type IE cannot be used.)
ÿ#15/#
[ MATRIX
1
r us e x 1
RSS
\ IC Card x1 k
r«3 ;
n
*ÿ
1 i U.I-2S6
r i
*33
o
7
-;‘T:
5« j T > lij
II
ttrr 100BASE-T 1/F ..r
wmr§ ;B; PC Card x 2
mMml |
»&&
9MR:
(Back Side) ifir
m f«IÿS
i mm i
1 m m m
** Mm K 4m l
•: i m m '#
: -
i;
POO m lfÿ jg|
S, m |»J
.** »*; »; :. I iÿM|||f#i|
§ .
is??
.:/ÿ
»
i
Rear side o f part surrounded

US B x 2
with the yellow frame

PC Card
*11111
safe-
T
i
:
‘;
ai
i
JR M9ll R|p?4
& Yi ML
«
I J* L g§ I
1
’ Hfl
i
-;ÿ3
Si iHH R
r Hr
IS® 1 H
iT : r
_
mpr* *
I [pgwÿ,h
im p
mm
r
ii MT
i X
m 1 f*
F IT
01 a
s'
|
-
.. *, ,
7
- -•
C;« ..
«
m-V'.1
ill. T:
U 1
5 UN
6
Decrease printed circuit boards of NO unit

Reliability up because interfeces between each boards
..
WP
s M640MP r o 1 3 boards MATRIX 5 boards
mm yp«; sfJ
m
sSIg
% B
MP
. :
1
, a
mi
1J
&
;;
a'; i- * I
I
i
111
. Decrease start-up time in cold climates because of equipment hard disk which
is used as car navigation
V-
£
item M640 MATRTIX
$
Operation temperature 5-55 °C 0-55 °C
| 0° C NC start-up time About 22 min utes About 2 minutes
In addition to the existing work simulation for checking programs, th e machine simulation has been added to check the
processing programs including a machine interference using fine 3D models of such as the machine, a workpiece and a tool.
1) Tins function will prevent a machine interference or collision before actual processing.
2) Both of Mazatrol and EIA/ISO programs can perform a simulation.

* The EIA/ISO program cannot perform a work simulation of the 5-axis (4-axis) simultaneous machining.
:t:
Th e EIA/ISO program cannot perform a work simulation of the mold machining using the micro segment program
3) This function simulates the machine real with 3D models of the machine and equipped tools. (The machine will be
delivered with the 3D models set.)
4) A simulation can be run in the background.
or k simulation Machine simulation

I SB
1W *K». PM 1
f }
i :-W- * .«• .
x'- 1 j l mu. i
; -fi¬ fwifcfc
y m
'
*.«*:*»r * . « s *
a.l -I*#*.. MW
•
I
I -iK.Jt
ii
l 1.*,
34.1.
i ;
I ;
tr
4 .
i 7 S'
flip J
MVtXXXK JM1
Wmm **i##,*lli* if; *
i i
C*M -ÿ.
* If
II
i it'
**>. j :
II
;;
iktlSPI
1 1
»is* m
—.......
i i n__ *
*
II &3<w*«a»ga<iicsBS»i
NHM MW MMP WWBB I
W& i
AO ?> **/»)«
't I'
; •« S««V.AT . WBJJEfcJAJ,- mmm «f«« tilm#wi WMTSias; aw# • feiffAfSii*
K#9 i mm arrcir MKSW wA«ir § • Bras*;:; ; iwwrt1 i Base **»« \
7
8
The intelligent safety shield function prevents an interference or a collision due to an operational error during the manual
operation.
1) During the manual operation, the ganged operation of the actural machine and the 3D model simulation ca n check the
processing status an d stop the machine before an interference or a collision ocurs.
2) Checking with 3D models will prevent an interference on a part where an operator cannot see directly.
3) The integration of the actual machine and 3D models simulates the machine movement exactly.
4) The machine can be set up quickly because there is no need to worry about an interference or a collision.
Actual Machine 3D Models

mm
m
m i
I
1 f
m
'
X,
*-ÿ
mm * I
** M
i
m
5
I;,:-'. ;
i 'i
h tl fil \
IU ,..il M
m
m 1 IS
•
m i .
- H fen
• i I
i 'A1,
- 4
; i
’ LX :1
>
1 I« :
i & f flllllg
i-,
I
I-i Iflll S ts
li.;
.
111
p _ + r1 ? <r 4- Tr
r* i
cjMJ li
[Intelligent Thermal Slueld]
Outline
The traditional thermal displacement compensation function has performed the compensation considering that the thermal
deformation of the machine was proportional to the temperature. Using this method, the thermal displacement could be
compensated with the high accuracy in the steady state. However, just after the spindle speed was changed, it could no t
be compensated properly because the constants did not match between the times when the thermal displacement and the
measured temperature changed.
The thermal displacement compensation software (MazakTdc) estimates and compensates the thermal deformation of the
machine based on the spindle speed and the temperature. And it monitors the spindle speed and compensates the thermal
displacement according to speed; therefore, it can compensate it properly even in the transient state.
9
1
0
The MAZAK voice adviser is the audio messages by MATRIX itself with the speaker embedded in CN C of MATRIX,
notifying the safety confirmation, the contents of the operation during the set up of the machine and others. It is greatly
effective in preventing a mistake due to the lack of attention during every working process.
1)14 languages (As for some old Eastern European countries, please use English or a neighboring country's language.)
& Th e MAZAK voice adviser has 52 messages such as greetings and notifications at the machine set-up, when starting the
automatic operation, during the automatic operation or during the maintenance work.
M
Good morning. Today is <dayofweek> <rnonth> <day>
. Tins is manual operation at 10 times th feedrate.
' The B-axis is selected. Pay attention for any turret interference.
| Tool length measurement for a tool has not been completed.
| Machine has stopped because optional stop is effective.
| Add spindle lubricant. and other messages.
:
I
: Internal speaker
<****?• vg*T-
S m
m
© mmm
MI
1 11 il i
r? *
s
.. -j
'MM
i
.
iii
V.
i H HI
: m
i~~ I
f -i-nri *.
— 'w'”'
mm mm
. I
f B i i i p i mm
——
»
&»&&*»***
&
fifed*mmmmmmmmmmmm mmm i
I mmm
~m mmmmmmmmmmm mmmm 8
\m mmmmmmmmmmmmmm mmm m
a MR
Th e Mazatrol program ha s made it possible to control the upper turret with the 1st spindle and the lower turret with the 2nd
spindle simultaneously.
1st and 2nd process simultaneous cutting

1 1
rlFs y[i
Hi*]
31
ill 31
31
# 1 7
SfijHS
fjl 31
31
1B5B31
31
31 j] t][r]
Processing which used two programs (HEAD -1,HEAD -2) like Multiplex cannot be performed in INTE MATRIX senes.
... „ ,
Simultaneous cutting at unrelated work pieces
Work No.1 I Work No.10
1
1
mm
1
2
1, Alarm history
1) A history of 10,000 alarms ca n be saved. (48 alarms in case ofM640)
2) Tire data is saved in the text format. Therefore, it is useful for gathering the alarm information.
[ C :\MC_sdgWarm\Alarm.bet]
3) It is possible to register 48 alarms that are not saved in the history file, such as Alarm No.128 OUTSIDE
INTERLOCK AXIS, which occurs frequently.
4) The alarm number has been increased 4 digits due t o th e addition of ne w functions.
*• * fXAftm ms i i »* zttt
3*8 *• * i'X*i w« » I »# It S 24 f ct tt lStw
'
»K* itw J*N *##* Bttf 1A..W a «m.tf ISB
1*W It** . re*- *.#»t Vr U *»' .¥
3*8 4M« MM fc * f Mrs- IfSJStvM MMJ i* la s* s mm
2SS *5 tOM. IKrf (M| I* sa s* t
S* *:» *• , Am ,
»** *ÿ» »«X« K«Wi«MMKin< 1*01 ISM
US* S'MMW'IK* ISMS.
i». * so ?;* m&Ktxt
JO:
a OKMKMWf 9 m **
I j H t o N M r : »**» I# * S3 ** ssÿsssS
ass
V* V M «
If * &<« *«. .
TO W
t-SIM
,-.
318
8OTW
i»»* mm mt* in
a** HAS KM *ÿ**>:
;
>
t ** i
if
if
if
1
*
S3
*.'ÿ 3
-
»
**
t*
it
%tx*m
vm*w
m'MWM'
»».
<88 ttfjunftMfc »»*»<*
VK *
'*.ÿ**
3* i?
S» t*
SUSIMS. wsmtt;* CJM*ur
****** o. ss* s* *» IOTWI
*«* S U I & U , tH&ttl,* ttmwr *ÿ ai *» ka erwtase
* »• » *.*
SO t W M B • » * * » » » * . «.#*ÿ** »» »«
*»
2*« me
MH S U « * i «1#*0* KW-* . iJM*
a*s *f<x MM t»A«a* saw. » >*. s* ,n wW'Sentb.
3*« if r«ra«.b»i.f * t» » •>
:
m
SS di'lr' * + II «« ?*'
I
**' ww»-
sat**;-#:* mmOs : tllte II I
-I, . Running Management Display
1) The running management data for 12 months can be displayed.

2) The u se s ta tu s of spindles and the alarm information ca n be checked each day.
Use status of spindles (speed and load) Alarm information

e
ÿ>«*. n iw *wwtw» £3 *»T W 9kn.£rtm m H Bsm? »*»#?««*ÿ || tssum' Li *>T **
wt sn **
«8 :
* rmi
n tx <S '
3H» «>< t>S» feJfS «S;*»

**
xt jsiitxa BeiSa&ai mm 3 Sr tS M* .* fi£ i’W *
&«**«* s s'M? ammwm f*** 'ÿuta ws.nt»»
m \ VMMK *e mt *K***«SM: .{«;*» T».» »* ><0 -
• ÿ
B9-: M
*» •: «
- H«#
'
«*.:#* *?
Mtf-J X Sfrft <ÿ<) ».»» ÿ : AW* {.-V

*«i in; is **•%* jtWKJUss*
»ÿ*>*ÿ
»*»
K' :i Sti • *«• ME *'I- «* • H fcS I* «• » 36:

**
*/ S
H ?<t ¥3
MEM I
•* mm. »:
:'l
£vrt*>» > AM. • U
* #ÿ£•«. w«a- t «• **«; i kwaiK « «***• *»*<*• x w r n m ? «»«
S UM*» S > y KW 4 1 <•*» <<:*»• s >*«*.» % u<m
* «*«*> 1
i V;«x5scsssssxd ssssKSÿsxJssissxsx; ;si iSSSKSSSSXK
JL JXXSXSSS KSSXKSSXSX:
1
3
1
4
3. DIAGNOSIS MONITOR Display
The data of TO MONITOR DISP are always displayed in both SHORT and LONG. Also, one block of
data for MEMORY MONITOR DISP an d two blocks of data for I/O MONITOR DISP have been
increased.
4. FLC SIGNAL Display
The addresses of a device corresponding to each TITLE ar e displayed.
5. HARDWARE MONITOR Display
The contents of the display will be altered due to the hardware change.
6. VERSION Display
The ladder version for the virtual machining is displayed.
UNIT
ITEM VERSION
MAIN-21 1001W000-A*W0
MAIN-B 1001W001-A*W0
LG-ENG 1001W011-AXW0
LADDER-F 10 0 1W5 6 8 - AO 016
LADDER- B 10 0 1W568-A0 0 IB :
LGP
7. SERVO MONITOR & SPINDLE MONITOR Displays
Tire servo data is displayed on the SPINDLE MONITOR display, as the spindle has become servo type.
8. Start of Application Software from Mazatrol Menu
Application softwares ca n be started from the Mazatrol menu by editing a te xt file for a menu, (e.g.:
C :\MC__sdg\CustomMenu\CustomMenu.txt)
9, Standard Installation of Print Screen Software on NC
A file can be saved in either of the TNG and “BMP formats.
IS Print Screen 3
:
& SAVE
Active Print Screen & SAVE
10 , Operation Log & Operation Player Softwares (M740Eye.exe & M740Player.exe)
1
5
In case that a low reproducible trouble occurs during a complicated operation, it ca n be replicated by repeating
the operation using the operation log and operation player softwares, winch have been installed on NC as a
standard specification.
16
17
18
Control Overview
Control unit
CU7-MA513-22 MI-P12-M2 board
N011 card
HN102 card
\
HN123 card
HN163 card
HN482 card
HN531card .«*ÿ
[% ,
MI-P12-M2 : Board PC unit
HN011 : Relay card
N
HN102 :PLC engine card
HN123 : Sub-CPU card
IK HN163 : NC base card
HN482 : Memory card
(FLROM/SRAIVI)
9
1 HN531 -.Axis extension I/F
and CardBus slot
2
0
Back Side of Matrix

(jBWi • • • ; ÿV T ** ': C
Mi ail
P «x-# M
Wwmm . M m
s’
i i -
i
i
UK : IS85
M$M
.t?
0 I
2 Backlights ill
m
i
jwWMNggg* . IU.MIIHW
m
wm
ÿ
SB
pl*l*
.-mm
m
'MM
:-' &
Efc
V
it
US -I
r'-;:
r %..
y,
:
—L..._ÿiÿaaiiiSjÿH| ÿmm# S m
.• • ir -V -‘.’l
V
(EffiiSiK
:-i
m
—
‘
'i '4*
-M 1RS?
mn
~w-
3#
wimmm w
I ms (S
;;'.
»ÿ
rÿS
“.gÿ— e-
T; *:r.OTiiMMHI
kjtCi'i:.-:
K? \
Right Side of Back
mf
: • • ' :5
Rotary 2 settings m
Battery Plug
=
1 Pic Stop
- S
;
C = Initialize <;ii
. 4J1S1
id
i 2 Usb 1.1 Plugs
:
lw
m:wsl
*
TJ
la L:
§ Two Leds Display
V
r Right side is like Fusion
—
•- Bm E
i, Left will be always 1 .
r
m
I
3
m w
iv.
- Rotary Switch 1
1
;
ri =
Always 0.
I
1
in
A
i
i« S %
§
Rotary Switch 2
?« i i
r Like M640.
Pf -• k
y
si.
H V3
I PI 100 Megabyte
2
1 s Ethernet
Hi
|P
2
2
Hidden Compact Flash -Drive D-Used to backup

the hard-drive
important
files
Top of Unit
• • . WBSBSSBSBSSBSSSmmÿ V
'
Vt
pampi I - Top of Matrix

2 Backlights, to p and bottom
r-,
% m i
;
2 large fans
fe . ;.*? •
ff
;ÿ
XiierlR-ÿ'
2 Slot Pcmcia-32 bit
vr .
si?'
n ,n »
‘ '
IKS:
Mw »,V:;
Jr-
-’
is i
J
V -V.'-
J m. SaH v
1111
ImAl
......
RYJ :
F
..... . .
;
is
y.u
I «ÿ ,fc(V1),.lt,il.I.i
iw .-'
sm
KHKEM
y
V f ~ f* f f r 1 “ruSSS ™
5wr- - ÿ • • • ; ÿ v>
HSPii
SI r .
I
Mfil
• '•
vr'
? gPÿÿiiS'pBpI 1
II I III I i M
iv'v;
tail
i
IBBHHH JH -dm V :-. •
• >a
:
m
•-••ÿ:
m
5 * «V:j +m
$
•
:& • * u * - 1
. vr * v» >ÿ'
w
Bottom of unit
... - - IssSslli
if
.
j -;:C; |:
(.. :
raw
-
'i •
;
,
;:- •
T
/
~ 11
S tmmw M 'S
:/ : . j
f fj
J
wjjtj V
, .:; w fi:;V; •
fasm
f-P
-,- ..-i'* ' . ' . • ' ÿ r - * - — ' ' * ' ' *• ‘ - v ' ’'vj
.-W..irm.P»
W7 iTf
iiaii ?; ,1:
9
r-r'
S
f »Mbw j;
H
irjk
a hv:
T
ft k$
1 iSMMKT Sira®
u umnTXi.i. i
Wits IS faPl
%i • i
vJL' .T.‘- 'C _. '•
ill
,
S:
\
B§«PP S»W§s lflpf JSfiSSIS
m f? t
ri l i »
w*» $ÿ' M* 4 l
'
II
11
>4 :- v:- 11
Sis
2
3
Bottom Backlight Opt 2, To Opt 1 , To
MDS-DH Drives MDS-DH Drives, 1st Set of 8.
2
4
MIP12M2
• PC Card.
• 1 .2 giga-hertz
• 256mb memory
• XP Embedded
HN260
USB Connector Card
Considered connection point for the 2 back USB 1.1 devices.
Plugs into the Pc Board MIP12M2
A
1-C73-M128 or M1-P12-M256: Main PC PCB HN260 card
'G 'j i i&.wiiiiiiiii«Mm iriii:i Ti 1 1': 1#

91
fSoUol
[2*00-1 f]
2 - .5 H 8 .
- V
m hi 1
%
1
.* 'i f3*pri 3
% LP
i
G
jit i
-_. v&sjgmm S:
m
s, i®
'
in
I
:¥»i
K
I i
1m [Ml i
M iff
-
p«;u / *» 0
......
Gijg.
2
5
=mnsi
PC RAM DIMM: 256 MB

* VsyM •
—n
2
6
HN01 1 : PC to NC extender bus

Also called Relay card as relays signals between the PC to NC .
«cÿaa|Fi. f SIS
.iJSlS mmr
*118111 8S1mIII
m1
*
I ftisiSfi Sif §ssl§1
J8P9 ifPIliy
KS
-
f>i :
-I r
IB H
MdP *
83 8
m HR *
.. ®
HN163 or HN154: NC main PC B
. .' v->
' Jfeg1':
• A'
M S
SSESI 6'
tjv
i ?
I
n o *;
i;l
li
2 Q MS
ns ifl
Sill;
ES
o
Z
«
Jj
;
a 'ÿr *ÿ [ '
a SS
At V
* SS I II m
< o
a
55S ES C
as®.
m
£<£HBS( 9 1 }'
8#
H
£?<
wmfm
,; m <~1
.-lfiS®
aWfe, :.:P*-
l
''KKK
i.
i
«< gS
«CS*30
mavnH
a®,
st-tx1 • • 0
I
iff s
S
2
7
2
8
HN163-HN203-HN123
n m
i m
m
& m
R
m to wii'1]
m
ns
A [•.
H-
V
)
Si Mi .i
,, HS IE
e
iU
|U
«
ii
'i'-
Kl 1 fi: Hi
a* HR MB
ssHa 5
'f:
I 38 Li£
K .
BK E
B
*m 3
m
m
II
i M
n• i
:
m m 1
m m
m \l wm
77Pr
T
a
V
?ÿ ®
M
r®s &
$
m
rU
ii
fmm
2Q H
s 23«
eÿj MS SB I
8£
Ml
EKMP
1 B
mm
MB
m
mN U ii
hm
nyÿav
nmmSSinmWm: - 'ÿr
Sli# Mi
'
MsflJSl ;
i i
—
-ÿ
m
HN 1 02 Bf'SW s __ *
mm TIT
UTM
'AT EMEI
• |i
* ?
r
mm
mm
K i
JB
tear*
,
S2
Pic ca r • es isss
&T
Jill ||M»
fWffiW
a n: i Vv<
E
pÿftissfcas® 'v.
IS £
Sale
:
a i
i
• An 3
»r
ss»-
'tllilily : J jk§
:- ;l
s
m HN123
ir'-'j
I
9
LAL-nrsr
ffS IfE '.II • >'; >:

E5 w» i‘i ' :-; .ÿ
Ij ife
Vÿr)“’'(Sy-
S; i
'aes in Ss
Sub-CPU
HW ~i tm ,
HN102 m
ivVI
L-
g
Pic Engine Card. Where the plc(s) Si®
resides.
;
wA Jÿflr I
Tglifs i
• Stores the pic lad de r and 11-
Jfr&k:-,IiOl $
register information > Sri
K&%i£'Tm
• Also, Latching parameter -
x
F,
iiMaSs
j ,4$? «iSSEs
n*
I 9B
• l<
registers.
Capacitor backed up for 30
’ I
Pfgl
jH
ftpe IB If88 In
;*S-.
• i mmmm
minutes ii®
c? BBSPPKM Pl-
fc
tm . .. .. ;•
apgte.i p • -ii
H»S§
;« ,‘j
p; ByJ 1
TrlE );
•i
32tjT
mwm
jU*
'W:
fcEWK? ai
>A
hV
/irrai'
jfc
*1
1>-» »nT7vÿr I
2
9
X
5l
32
m wsswa
-i ti [-1
iin
'
f
-| • <
. jLiCli
'3 >.,
fcMM»
n
-
•>
a *
**11 as
a
I [c:Vjj
§ il g
s ©
R
.«£j
M
ym
'1
.
m
li
il im i &
V.
m
M
pifftiWl
fl «
m
m.
1
i
1
L-
;
k- iflfci ajAi£.-zei±£2± a
r
Bf
r-
31
mn
rÿ
i
'JUr
3 r V
IS %
m ;
1
-'J*
\*p
:• < m
<• .~i
£9
_ LI
-*-ÿ- ’jO *
-‘Wr «
* u>
TOttj, 'i
'S I
\aM
S3 i5- f’
...-£» fc St
3 -usÿgsyr si gnaw vaftsakasteriÿÿ IfijBS
“*•
1 *r
1
• *T ** •.** *>XI MvnrtffHtaÿni
r-rec ;
IB <*#•*
. “ -~/5 S®
• . ÿi ss *'
- W®*
-
'-
m -.
>t_ >>: ~J.'T~
V?v .. ÿ
»=-,'- -•
c/o
O
o
i-H
a
O bS)
£ o3
a
T3 G
G
O
3 ao ,-G
o
G
?-i £
O
GH 4h G
o 3 G
3 CD 5-h
CO
N G >
30
HN482
• Main Memory Card
• This is where the Sram data is stored,
• Machine parameters, Tool data, etc.
• Contains Main A, control s.n, and the Option
information
• Capacitor backup for 30 minutes
3
1
3
2
HN482: NC main memory PCB, SRAM and FLROM
k
j
R3-N0.40 I
73
i
m
m
iiljBi
UBf; 3
ftfftfPnMn ifiteaiiffl
as®--
I‘
This contains Main- A, Control Serial Number,

Options, and SRAM data(parameters,tool data, etc.
Changing this requires control s.n. and options.
Like Hrl 13
HN531 : PCMCIA slots (2) an d 2nd servo interface (OPT2)
CardBus l/F
2 Slots CardBus, 32 bit.
-r
f
» *“w iS 'i j £§ aSfey ' - ‘
S i
ml 3 [T1
&JJL2
a i: s c
tempi
55 i
3
pfyl 5US
N OK
ess
M1 i3
I
I it
JlV:
H i
V ( (j
P
ss £0 j
3
Tf:
.a IT
*sm *5
«1
d + lL
~t—
«i
IT: .n
gpcÿ'l®
SEIa M il SH
?ÿ
.Wi-'
3
3 0pt2
3
4
HN251
• Similar to HR25 1 on the M640

• Includes the Compact Flash card input as well as USB
connection.
• USB connection is 1 .1 version, not 2.0.
• G291 cable connects to Pc Card for USB
• G160 cable connects to HN163 for compact flash.
HN251 : Front slot PC card and USB interfaces
/V K
'‘ÿr- • :> >'•
'ÿÿwm,
rv&m>- V-,
if 'ÿ.
r«*£
l
ms
w-iiM % i
m
p ii
'• l
m1 r1
i
rnirnÿm a
3 i
'
I
irar
TV
4
a-'*-’
i
r**\
3
5
3
6
HN271/NH272: LCD interface PCB
Sw
v
;/ -y
*35’
'
LW ./’>/'*
V--
\ J
a m
.
.• '. \ •
HH
S%-
?P4; mmR s
.r- P:i
„ ,
;'SS iS
.....
.
pm
,
» **
._
S3®
sdllillh
,- j
. §*
1
?lisl -;s''
8 »J
' ;ji' 254
f/'rA
J
v 'ÿ:.
.?r
’ «
.'
‘
_ ,1 it *jmmL
\
; .* -.
; mm
:
2 ( y-f'l
mmmm,
T«SSE
5'W' ’’ 58 S>
\: -NS B I |gjgggj| H
7:S;ÿ;.,a
r i
it i •*,
Si rA ' '
mm
IS
i T Kiss—if MSSBSSm
s
LA
bfe3$>3 ?#paH
&8fc m
Vi/.. L«li5
fc>
\:ig
7
T'i :-
ISi H
s
iVrijuvuiiK-u'iulÿiit
an
:iu
1® i •: L'i £
Ijpagps
Si a HHSM0
'
APFi
L‘*flG_SJ
mm xm mm m R
BRMtal0|l M , .'*>
MB
m. e-i;
-
-
7' -
£
*2*2 n iv-y-n;
7
la
SBS
HN353
• Similar to HR353 card

• Except the servos now go directly to the NC by fiber¬
optic cable.
• Supports 14 M r-J2
• Supports th Remote I/O. Communicates to HR371
remote I/O cards.
3
7
ÿ6
WMm : .V
Wi
IIIIB
ÿ-ÿ•
j ravt..
1
' ”ÿ
IPB pÿSg
3U*: wSfJa i
rr.
&
e Js J - # ..
K
HMÿiSS
3p M i
1 -M
p* iTf*
g
to: wis
fOCESt *1 i
its 8-1 -. A&H

#V*Tf i
I jj
ij,.;
•: '- i 3
ct,
6»l
V *9 .«»
*
> -s 4
>'V/1
i
f: -ÿf
T3 q -J3 ft 5. U j£ w .x- i
i«
isÿ Uotl
I'M
*-H
yp- •
ii ,
M
JUi =-SB. t
i
JIM p
liVjF M;
.
-
c3 MI
-
•
L-i
=*
«* “-• “
Mi [
gSBffj
*ri -J
U ®5fs,
tit i
•
«®a--
•
X / =HÿW | • <-• • ;# p
H$sS33i
Oi
’
.*• •-
•• ; &
c< j
P;
I
111 m
—
.ÿ.1
• 7 ,® .rv c Iglll ip o
S gH r ri
I
-a B ÿg
,’j
ft
-i-.v . IK1 ST It f £5*1-
m
•R iEy
f 1 WMJ 3
ssa m 11/iP; S<
H : i
&
z HE
HI
il i
I1 ssi iv
*A
Sa a IISEJM I it:
rail
II
;E tmn
&2&:| ;. 't
m
K
M
» IP”W [rj
m. -M-
s W mm ®u
S§I
EJ
n
X
as:
1
essh
-
iS
if. 5* ÿ ILK
Si
Vrffi
33
) :r:|
s
'
i
•
@n
ffl. ? I?
[- ’
«K I n-
St-;:-5
'lb '
'-A-
Jt* 3 SCÿ:
0
1 3S£i[W»ÿ i
£ 'v
i
M ..Sliill .
Ill; fel
38
NC covers: Top and middle
.....
.. .. ...
... i
J
r.&tm:
§§
mmmm
§&&aQL .//
%
:
;
&
H'”- V
:*«iSb ÿiii
Ml ,v ÿ
'ÿ
ill
SSm
' i>
?
.;,l
t ?k-
M
I
?..vV
TTTjTTTJ T;J
Mj v.'V;
1
I
i« i M y-j;
'iv/'FTiy
la $ M? .r
;
-«
§pifp l 3
•
Blit
BmgMm
1
J I
;*mrn
ÿiai mmmÿrn
SB
MS ’ ..
.
fcy > ' • • ÿ - ÿ .

IIMI
FCA750PY-N01 [.v •'• 'ÿÿu--’.’.-:-
pS mm, K -7n v.
tiamsL
5i 3
i:
.ÿÿj
MP0e0O70360D0 l
3
9
i? - - •
• /.-
4
0
CXA0385: backlight power supply for 15” LCD
Jr'
i in n
•
if \-y mm
i i .:
?V,
/
A ,« »
SfflS'
y t':
IS®
m <
x
«s
'Q
NC cooling fan: Notice the third wire fo r overheat detection

1
*“**ÿÿ“*: V
ii L
l-ÿv?
14 ml
< i'
mm
'ÿV .
fMk
MMF -06D240S
24VPC- 0 0 3 A
TO D 4 2 0 1 G 1 RP3
.
Mt'LCG irCHN0P(k'C‘0-,LTD.
Bill
llss
lA
\ ••
(* MADE I/< CHINA
JB
(HlOa?
1
|Rf|j
Vi m
i
k
p'r- ;
i* xtfvA.r&f 'i * 'SJ
4 <v ,v ji§Sii
1
4
2
PD27 Power Supply
• Similar to PD25 Power Supply for Fusion and Mpro.

• Outputs 24v after power off to maintain voltage to
hard drive for controlled shutdown.
r
0
:: K *.
ii
:
-
Machine Keyboard
• Has 2 fuses
• If fail, recommend to replace complete assembly.
i aH ;4
' <| n
mpi f'sl
SAMPLE.
Us :r
rr
tan
»»{
g H . i/.VFwifc
E
P#A? -1
m
iy,- «
V
:.; S'' ’
' '.•
SHii
v
......
l
'
.4 •>
P“ A-
.'ÿ
CJ -h>
M i H. jj
'
«9
j
3«»E si
C-'i
SPf-
M?
1 i i
* <;S5fc
tft IVM 5= MSS*
S’ , O T V StASlS;
fep Hf
-k— '5,‘,
fl||p vasar gv2 .

3
1: i »
.......
r. . A. V ?S i
sp-raacKa
ip; 1 <1
D
..*•
;i
F«S
.
• T»fjg
;K 1 ':': g
5’
•7 :
*
..
«
fi
If
iv ;
m
i
,r
I.W
tfii»9cr
T.V-'-
is .if*,:
•I 1 V
SBaiilP -
mi
.
s;
jipi s: yia L NpjjK
:A
:ÿ
t • : i SIS
UJw> JLi
85 ?'
:•
WM &»3 '
ir-A
-
i
u 11; - & m
B I *
1 .-; &
ii
m
j i
a
[g
Ml IsS
Uk- NiH[i t:yiJOT9T I
m
i
Wmtm
: EE
4
<• -..
;Vcyj''
R,.Jÿ y tT*V~ F . » < • . «.• v c

F ;L _
b t „S
• •
J
:
,LI
i
a
i
3- ,
m
3 -ÿvr “ t-W
: Ml.;.:: r* . *4 _
'
K ii
4
4
Hard Drive
• Embedded W in do ws X P software
• 20 Gigabyte hard drive
• No need for heater as guarantee to operate at 0 degree weather. Similar to
hard drive used in car GPS systems.
gpfc
fi w l l
,
55
*
i
mmMm l?gl ;. ; I , I
fTmf
• lsr.» i
iri
.a
e-2J* «S
::
I
«
' 'a-
«
y
i
V-
H ;
m BlKwriSSjÿ;
I
V .waa. g
*.%*>»»ÿ i
IX .i r
;
ir
;<Si MBWII P
8
MB
Ss* sul Bw l* £
I. jBpR|pilir f
k3 I'l
I
i. i
m p mu
_
} • ft
ll ’
'
n
'] 8 FT.
_
An embedded system is a special-purpose system in
which the computer is completely encapsulated by the
device it controls. Unlike a general-purpose computer,
such as a personal computer, an embedded system
performs one or a few pre- defined tasks, usually with verÿ
specific requirements. Since system is dedicated to
specific tasks, design engineers can optimize it,
reducing the size and cost of the product. Embedded
systems are often mass-produced, so the cost savings
may be multiplied by millions of items.
Handheld computers or PDAs are generally considered
devices because of nature of their
hardware design, even though they are more expandable
in software terms. This line of definition continues to blur
as devices expand,
Physically, embedded systems range from portable
devices such as MP3 players, to large stationary
like traffic lights or factory controllers.
45
46
3
..A
Connector layout drawing

NC back
FAN 1 AN2 CardBus ON / OFF C ON NE CT IO N D ESC R PT IO N
S3 z
L Fan 1 & 2 Fan connections
in
BAT CardBus PCMCIA I/F x 2
TO NT O f£TT3T
w
t
UJUV UUUp-
SW connection
USB
¥
7 3 USB2
BAT
USB1 & 2
3.3V battery
USB I/F x 2
I CRT External CRT I/F (not used)
CD Internal LCD I/F
LAN Ethernet I/F

uasassrs
CF25 External +24V (not used)
CRT
DD Hard drive I/F
(MvrVT)
FDD Floppy drive I/F

LCD
EMG Emergency stop
Z3
LAN F24 Remote ON/OFF to PD27
CF01 Power off detection
C IN +24V from DCOIJT on KB

ZTT
:NV NV inverter I/F
FRONT OU T Front slot l/F

1 o
cog cF*> <y so cm
i/i . : \ E na
ro
1C 1
CiN CFO I CF24 EMG FDD HDD OF25

4
7
4
8
NC bottom
GI 2 CF10 OPT2 CF50 CF55 0PT1

/
R 7
T O
E
71 r
E
T
EE
04
*5* |M*J
J ZJ. im i-1 TO
alii T
7/f— | = ri j
X
fei kf
t {Jq p |o|l Pbr v g

• I Mill
Mil
C ON NE CT IO N D ES CR IP TIO N
CGI 2 Keyboard l/F Bus connection
F 10 Base I/O main I/F
PTI & 2 Optical servo I/F
F50 2' 1 servo I/O I/F
F55 Additional I/O, servo I/F

Keyboard unit
<PD27 t<D\m)
OUSE R2 2 R21 CR31 J2 ON/OFF CGI 2 INV DCIN DCOUT CFOI
\ x X
I CONNECTION DESCRIPTION
jn m i \ 7
0
R21 & 22
R3 1
Additional I/O I/F
Additional I/O I/F
© E 12 Soft menu key I/F

<j o
m
E H N/OFF ON/OFF SW connection
o
CG12 KB I/F
r
-7Y2 NV +12V for backlight I/F
i
m 0 DCIN +24 V PD27

M3 DCOUT +24 V to DCIN on Main PCB
*
FOI Power off detection
CR32
9
©
m 0
I03
SIONC & PC
Terminator connection
RS232C I/F x 4 (2 CH ea)
t: s PCON/OFF Internal s/w ON/OFF
g° u littfr
a a
»
0 MPG HPG I/F
0 DC +24V from I/O PS
IMT
0:::v- N 13 & 4 Sub op I/O J3“IN, J4+OIJT

© J
mm m 1
i
NCKEY
MPKEY
KB I/F
NC KB I/F for MPX machine

TL
77 7 7 7
X
X
only
/
PKEY NCKEY / J4 3 DC MPG SIOPC PCON/OFF SIONC SPEAKER R[03
4
9
5
0
Rotary Switch & Segment LED

T-- T\fT
'~:Z 4-
.ÿnpi rrja
ii {
T=lir:
:
l ZJ
i is
u :
f
I 4 irnTit; I
Ii l ij a
::
I
;JI II?
. -r::::
:
i: I*3 '• M hi M
'
viw..
(- )
• LED2 LED1
•i
i
i
„ ;p SW1
J6
0
.-• SSZZCiSSiS SSXiWSSX . '. SW 2

i;
: |
i
rtssssstss-
B :
i?:
: I
, i
3 |
j
•. FT;.
ÿ
-ii
V;
* 7
r
’•Vi
Hi .-.V.
.
— j.-;
Rotary Switch 1
osition oot CPU Note
Flush ROM Boot Operation begins

simultaneously with
CF/ATA-Flush Boot
power supply ON .
Network Boot
reserved for network) For development of OS
2 port Boot It starts while reset, an d
reserved for 2 port)
operation of the reset For maintenance tool
release begins.
6 spare
7 spare
Don’t use
Don’t use
Don’t use
Don’t us
(reserved for Flush ROM) peration begins For maintenance tool
simultaneously with
(reserved for Flush ROM)
power supply ON.
5
(reserved for Flush ROM)
1
on’t use Reserved for equipment

5
2
Rotary Switch 2
osition RO M 2PORT Operation Note

erial Bus c . , • , ,
0 ormal Set value in product p
Console onsole I
1 PLc STOP Operate

V iA
'
•„
'•
Start up script “/from/0/1dsys”

Start up script “/cf/ldsys/”
Start up script Nullification
5 Norma For handy terminal
6
7
8 Bus Serial
Console Console
9
A Serial Bus
Console Console
B
07
SRAM clear P. M os
Normal
E2PR0M FROM
Not start 2nd CP U
,}
7 segment status
M640 only 1 status LED

MX ha s 2 status LED
LED 2 is CPU number: 0 = CPU #1,1= CPU #2 .
LED 1 is CPU status: Starts at 8.-> 0 ->count up-> 9 for CPU #1 then O.X count up->9. for CPU #2. So during normal
operation you should either see 09. for 1 CP U or 19 . for 2 CPU.
or 1 CPU system: For 2 CPU system:
. -> 0 9. 1 8. 1 9.
tart nd Start En d
ystem start up counting M640 | MX Good Bad
ED 2 NONE 0 or 1 CP U system 9. 1 -v
ED 1 0-9 8.-9. 1 CP U system 9. 0 -V
Anything
except 9.
5
3
54
55
56
TENTATIVE
CHAPTER 2 CONFIGURATION
2.1 System Configuration
This system are usually confabulated of following components:
(1) Control unit : This unit ha s the computation processing function for numerical control.
(2) Display unit : Characters and figures are displayed on this unit.
(3) Keyboard unit : This unit has the setting function.
( 4) I /O interface unit : Input and output of machine signals are done through this unit.
(5) Servo/Spindle drive unit : This is a servo/spindle amplifier composed of a conductor for obtaining DC
from AC and an inverter for obtaining AC from DC .
6) Servo/Spindle motor : This drive motor moves the machine.
(7 ) Other peripheral device : Peripheral device such as external memory and programming support.
Installed by machine loot manufacturer
r C Card/K I i
US B Devises
G — f Ethernet
I m
Printer
[CardBus]
NC control unrl
FlopDy Disk Drive
[FDD IF] J PC Keyboard
fuse]
Display Unit
cy
PS'? Mouse
M j, [Optical communication]
|_Prep/amina Tool _j RS232C]
1 Servo Amp-’Spindlo drive urol
ezno Bocal
Ma n nil Pulse Generator [delicate IF] s sas s m

unit
O LJUL-LJ oo o O
oooo
3 0
. 0101
rio IF]
Servo motor / Spindle motor

Machine operation panel
t
70s
Servo drive unit
* E iu
1'jt-noiatS'
E1E
I/O mtciface box usoinr, by Card-

ZJ?
10 interface I
sized 3/0
7S
Servo motor
C 1* 0 interface boxes arc
by machine tool moruifacturc :
<Note>
The noise resistance of most of PCperipheral devices are lower than the CNC system.
If such a lo w noise resistance devices are used in the CN C system, the noise resistance of the entire NC
system decreases, an d noise trouble is caused occasionally. Please follows notes in Chaper 7 when you
use PC peripheral devises.
57
TENTATIVE
4.4.8 Connection of Power Supply

The PD27 power supply is used to protect the hard disk.
By outputting +24V tor 300msec after the 200VAC is turned off, turning off of the power during writing to the
hard disk can be prevented.
(1) Power Supply System Drawing
R S 1
- AN CNC Unit
lC0
fCU? -MAS 13
--
ONAD-F
PC Board CRT
MOO
Ocuil breaker
CMC Board Cf? 5
FDD
NU
nn
ON Off
f«an
oul
XTXBUS D
CflO D
EMG rso D
F55 p
PT? P
I CardBus PT D
cm Cf?* j .?ch
PO?7
IB DC IN US8
d CGI?
: AT;
NJOFF
-Q CFO USB?
CIN
DCOUT f 110
Crrcuil
breaker CG12
Let DCOUT Keyboard Uni
FCU7-YZ08?
rno T-ÿiDClN tnm i7
L-C3CF01 iNV
[DC KPG
SK3NC
VIM SIOPC
|J3
RI03
(2) Unit specification

tem Specification
Input 200VAC - 480VAC (-15%. +10%)
Output 24VDC 8A
Size __ 1 70mmx 65 mm x 230mm
Back up time 300ms
(Note) Th e power cannot be turned ON immediately after the PD25 power has been turned OFF.
Wait approx, two seconds before turnning the power ON .
(3) Connector layout and pin assignment
.....
ACIN : 200VAC input
1 ACIN N <Cable side connector type>
O Connetor : 2-1 781 28-3
2 ACIN H
CIN
FG ~ Contact : 1 -1 752 1 8-5
1 Recommended maker : AMP

ON/OFF SW : Swich ON ( t upword)
Swich OFF
24VDC output
( i downword)— 24VDC output OFF
—
ON/OFF : Connect to the escutcheon ONOFF switch
N ore sw / / 1 NC
< Cable side connector type>
0 2 P-OFF Connetor : 1-1 78288-5
ON.-OFF 3 0V
Contact 1-175218-5
4 0V
powf-n Recommended maker : AMP
m
OCOUT
POWER : Green lamp lights during-*-24V output
DCOUT :
_n n_ A(X) B.(V) j < Cable side connector type>

ACFAiL +24V j Connetor : 3-1 78128-6
2 OV OV Contact : 1 -1 7521 8 5
3 FG FG Recommended m a k e r : AMP
58
TENTATIVE
CHAPTER 7 NOTIFICATION OF USING PC PERIPHERAL DEVICE

This chapter describes the notification of using PC peripheral devices.
7.1 Noise measures of USB and Ethernet

USB and Ethernet have been equipped normally.
Please refer to Connection of the USB equipment Connection of Ethernet for connection
execution example.
jr-B.
Because use under the noise environment is not assumed as for a personal computer on the market such as
Mouse and Keyboard, operation is not guaranteed under the machine operation environment.
Please the cable with the shield
for the noise inclination.
Additionally, the noise measures by the ferrite core like the figure below are recommended.
thernet cable Panel
USB cable U S B c ab le
i
NC unit
ifcT IU ÿ
I
i
i
|
—
[ÿ ] Mouse
3p Keyboard
i m Printer
Jj i
il
S3Q /
am iih)
r Ethernet cable
Wraps cable around the

ferrite core.
i
7.2 Recommended Devices List

Introduce the recommended devices that are me t the Mitsubishi quality standard and the connectable
devices that are confirmed operation (although not me t the Mitsubishi quality standard).
7.2.1 Front Access IC Cards

Supplier Type Specification Class Remarks
CANDISK SDP3B-48-1 01 48MB Recommended SDP3B- *-ono ***: Memory
SDP3B-96-1 01 6M B Recommended size (MB) nnn: Manufacturer’s
control number 101 is
SDP3B-128-101 128MB Recommended
standard
10- DATA PCFCA-16M 16MR Recommended PCFCA-”‘M Memory size
PCFCA-32M 2M B Recommended (MB)
PCFCA-48M 8M B Recommended
PCFCA-96M 6M B Recommended
PCFCA-1 28M 28MB Recommended
PCFCA-192M Recommended
PCFCA-256M 56MB Recommended
59
TENTATIVE
7.2.2 CardBus PC Cards

evice Supplier Type Name Specification Bu s Type Class
FLASH SANDISK SDP3B series PCMCIA Recommended
Card
IO-DATA PCFCA series PCMCIA Recommended
LA N 3Com Etherlll 10 BASE-T Ether PCMCIA Connectable
Card orega Etherll PCC-T 10 BASE-T Ether PCMCIA Connectable
Fether PCC-TXF 10/100 BASE-T Ether PCMCIA Connectable
Fether CB-TXL 10/100 BASE-T Ether ardBus Connectable
BUFFALO LPC2-T 0 Ether PCMCIA Connectable
LPC4-TX 10/100 BASE-T Ether PCMCIA Connectable
Notices in us e of CardBus type PC card

(1) Install a driver software under the condition that only the target CardBus type PC card is inserted. Some
trouble may occurs if a driver software is installed under the condition that other PC card is inserted
together.
(2) For using a CardBus type PC card, turn on the power under the condition that the target PC card is
inserted. When the PC card is inserted under the condition that the power is turned on , the PC card is
not sometimes recognized by the combination with other PC cards.
60
TENTATIVE
CHAPTER 8 DAILY MAINTENANCE AN D PERIODIC INSPECTION AND

MAINTENANCE
8.1 Maintenance Tools
8.1.1 Measuring Instruments
The following measuring instruments are used to confirm that the voltage is being supplied correctly to the
NC unit, to confirm that the wiring to the NC unit is correct, and to carry ou t simple troubleshooting._
Tool Condition Application
Tester To check that the wiring to the NC unit is correct before
turning the power ON .
C voltmeter Measure the AC Power To measures the AC power voltage being supplied to
voltage. the external 24VDC power supply unit.
The tolerable error is +2 %
or less.
DC voltmeter Max. scale 30 V The To measures the DC power voltage.
tolerable error is ±2% or External power supply 24V (control section, machine
less. input/output interface)
Battery voltage
DC output
hase rotation To check the connection order of the AC 3-phase input
meter power supply. _
Synchroscope General measurement and simple troubleshooting.
(Note t)Currently, a high precision digital multi-meter is commonly used as a tester. This digital multi-meter
ca n be used as an AC voltmeter and an DC voltmeter.
(Note 2)A logic analyser (200MHz or more) is required for complicated troubleshooting.
8.1.2 Tools
• Screwdriver (Large, Medium, Small)
Radio pliers
8.2 Maintenance Items

Maintenance is categorized into daily maintenance items (items to be carried at set intervals) and periodic
maintenance (replacement of parts when life is reached). Some parts (HDD, FDD, etc.) will not function in a
hardware manner when the life is reached, so these should be replaced before the life is reached.
ame Life fnspection/Replacemeni

Escutcheon Once/lwo months
(Accordingly when dirty)
Cleaning of floppy disk drive Once/two months
(type built in operation box)
Replacement of floppy disk sheet 3x106 passes/track

(type built in operation box) _
Replacement of floppy disk drive 12,000 access hours or 5 years of FDD motor rotation, Refer to left
(lype built in operation box) whichever is sooner
Replacement of hard disk drive 5 years or 20,000 hours power ON _ Refer lo left
Replacement of LC D backlight 5 years or 20,000 power ON hours (specified with power ON Replace when display dims
lime where brightness drops lo less than 50% at 25 cC)
Replacement of batter Cumulative data hold time 5 years When battery drop caution
alarm occurs _
50.000 hours (specified with rotation time when rotation speed
ooling Ian (control section)
drops to less than 20% of initial speed) _ Refer to left
eyboard IQ6 punches Refer to left
61
TENTATIVE
8.3 Maintenance of Escutcheon and keyboard

8.3.1 Cleaning of Escutcheon and keyboard
Wipe the escutcheon (display unit and plastic frame of keyboard unit) and keyboard surface with a soft dry
clean cloth. If the escutcheon is heavily dirtied, soak the cloth in a neutral detergent, and wipe the display.
Do not use alcohol or a paint thinner, etc.
The escutcheon and the keyboard are not for waterproofing. Be careful that a liquid doesn't go into inside
of it.
8-3.2 Replacement of NC Data Key

The NC data key is the printed circuit board which the switches are mounted on it, and is included into th e
keyboard unit. Replace it in accordance with the following procedure.
(1) Check that the machine power is turned OFF. (If the power is not OFF, turn it OFF)
(2) Remove all the cables connected at the back of the NC data key.
(3) Remove the tablet pointer flexible cable and keyboard cable from the PC B (HN20x card).
(4) Remove six screws, and remove the sheet metal adapter and the H R201 card from the keyboard unit.
(5) Remove fourteen screws, an d remove the NC data ke y from th e escutcheon
(6) Install a new NC keyboard with the process which is contrary to ® ©. -
Remove Keyboard cable
Remove Glide Pointer cable HN20X card
\
-
I:
IzsC'A
rH*
’ :i \ <r”
i
H
*\
&
4
A,
ssss??****
O
(: Remove 8 screws
NC data key
<o
$
. •
L -o
Remove 18 screws
62
TENTATIVE
8.3.3 Replacement of Menu Ke y

The menu key is the printed circuit board which the switches are mounted on it, an d is included into the
display unit. Replace it in accordance with the following procedure.
(1 ) Check that th e machine power is turned OFF. (If the power is not OFF, turn it OFF)
(2) Remove the menu key cable from the keyboard unit. Because the menu key cable is soldered on the
menu key PCB, remove it at the keyboard unit side.
tf'X (3) Remove 8 screws, and remove the escutcheon
(4) Remove 8 screws, and remove the menu key
(5) Install a ne w menu key with th e process which is contrary to (D -
<o
S
v«rf
I® r7
Remove 8 screws
and, remove escutcheon
fit
Remove ON/OFF switch connector S i/ ri.s
'O m IH 1
•o
'O
Remove Keyboard card
i ft.
iPv
it
5
Menu key
;
ill
r • T.V -' /J 4
\
iB «5£s.
Remove 8 screws
and, remove menu key
63
TENTATIVE
8.4 Maintenance of Floppy Disk Drive

8.4.1 Cleaning of Floppy Disk Drive (Head Cleaning )
When the floppy disk drive is used for a long time, magnetic particles or dust from the disk may adhere onto
the head surface. This can cause the reading and writing processes to be inhibited. Clean the head
periodically ( once every two months ) with the following procedure.
(1) Recommended cleaning disk
Maker : Japan Morex

Type : Morex cleaning floppy for double-sided 3.5-inch
Method : Dry
(2) Cleaning method

© the cleaning disk the floppy drive be clearned.
(2) Start the cleaning program, an d follow the instructions given on the screen.
(3) When the program is completed, eject the cleaning disk.
8.4.2 Handling of Floppy Disks

Observe the following items to ensure that the floppy disk can be used for a long time.
(1) Precautions for use

© Never tough the magnetic surface with hands. Finger prints on the magnetic surface
will inhibit the reading process.
(2) Do not touch the floppy disk with hands dirtied with oil or iron chips.
D Do not place the floppy disk near cigarette smoke. Do not apply solvents on the M
magnetic surface.
@ Always attach the index label to the correct position so that it will not come off. Do
not layer the index labels.
(5) Fill in the index label before attaching it to the floppy disk. When writing on a label
already attached to the floppy disk, use a felttip pe n ,etc.
(6) Carefully insert the floppy disk into the drive with it facing the correct direction.
Rough handling during insertion and ejection could damage the floppy disk.
© When bringing the floppy disk inside from outdoors where the temperature and
humidity difference are great from indoors, wait at least 30 minutes before starting
use.
(2) Precautions for storage

© Store floppy disks that are not in us e a nd t he backup floppy disks in plastic cases.
(2) Do not place the floppy disk where it will be subject to direct sunlight or near heating
appliances.
© Do not place the floppy disk near magnets or items that generate strong magnetic
fields. Magnetic rings and necklaces could also damage the data on the floppy disk,
so avoid wearing these items when handling floppy disks. D
@ Do not place heavy items on the floppy disk.
64
TENTATIVE
8.4.3 Other Precautions for Use

(1) Floppy disk drive life
The durability of the floppy disk drive is guaranteed for five years of the FDD motor rotation or 12,000 access
hours, whichever is sooner.
However, if used in a heavily contaminated environment, the reading an d writing processes could be
inhibited due to th e adherence of dust or foreign matter.
Periodically clean the head to prevent this type of trouble.
<T 5
(2) Recommendation for making backups
Make copies of the floppy disks containing important data to be used in case of an accident such as
damaging of the floppy disk or destruction of the data.
(3) Operating conditions

The floppy disk drive and floppy disks are extremely sensitive to changes in the temperature and humidity
and to dust, so always observe the precautions that have been described.
In respect to the temperature, if the working conditions are not satisfied (such as if the system is started at
below freezing), th e data track and head positions ma y deviate and prevent the data from being read
properly.
In this case, wait for the internal temperature to rise.
(4) Writing to floppy disks

The temperature must be 10 to 40 °C when writing to the floppy disk.
Always observe the temperature conditions when writing data.
8.4.4 Replacement of Floppy Disk Drive

© Check that the machine power is turned OFF. (If the power i s n ot OFF, turn it OFF)
(2) Remove the F1 30 cable from th e floppy disk unit. Connection of Floppy Disk
Unit fo r connection and removal of the F130 cable.
(D Th e floppy disk drive is covered with three sheet metals. An d three sheet metals are fixed with eight
screws. Remove those sheet metals referring to the figure 8.5.
@ Install a new floppy disk drive with the process which is contrary to © ~ (3).
NB
T
.*
f'*
A
A
65
TENTATIVE
8.5 Maintenance of Hard Disk

8.5.1 Handling of Hard Disk
(1) Precaution for Use
- Correct connection the cable
- Do not touch the connector section with or metal.

- Do not apply excessive force on the connector section.
- Do not drop or apply strong impacts on the drive.
- Do not disassemble the drive.
(2) Precaution for Storage

- Avoid strong the drive in high temperature, high humidity places.
- Do not place the drive near magnets or items the generate strong magnetic fields.
8.5.2 Other Precaution for U se

(1) Recommendation for making backup
The hard disk is a durable device, so make a backup of the hard disk to save important data.
8.5.3 Replacement of Hard Disk

Do not handle the hard disk without metal case because the hard disk has not much endurance against the
vibration and shock in comparison with other electric devises. Replace the hard disk as the Hard Disk Unit
(with the metal case and the stabilizing rubber).
(1) Check that the machine power is turned OFF. (If the power is not OFF, turn it OFF)
(2) Remove the F140 cable which is connected between the hard disk unit and the control unit. Remove
the HEATER cable and the THM cable from the keyboard unit.
(3) Remove two screws, and remove the hard disk unit from the keyboard unit.
(4) Install a new hard disk unit with the process which is contrary to ©~@.
fgfeTTÿo
f|iIE :' ara®?-
T)
W
3
w HI
O'
| /j\ CAUTION /j\ Hard Disk Drive is built in this product Do not drop and do no t give a strong impact to the product
because the hard disk drive is a precise device
/\ The hard disk drive has a useful life Please exchange the hard disk drive before end ot the life
/t\ Please make a backup of the customers files which is saved in the hard disk driveAt the
breakdown of the hard disk drive although Mitsubishi provides exchange service of the hard disk
drive, Mitsubishi doesnot guarantee a customets files which is saved in the hard disk drive And
Mitsubishi does not assume the responsibility concerning the damage caused by having damaged
the hard disk drive
66
T<
TENTATIVE
8.6 Maintenance of LC D
8.6.1 Life of LC D Backlight
CCFL (Cold Cathode Fluorescent Lamp) is used for the light source (backlight) of the LCD panel.
The estimated life of the backlight is 40,000 hours/25°C. (Time for the brightness to drop to 50 % of the initial
value).
Life time depends on temperature. When the LCD panel is used under low temperature or high temperature
a tendency to become short.
continuously, the life time has
8.6.2 LCD Characteristics

(1) Luminance
Luminance decreases at a low temperature by the CCFL characteristic. And, the time until luminance
meets rated value after is about 10-15 minutes.
(2) Uniformity, Luminous Dot, Dark Dot
It i s n ot defect or malfunction though uniformity, a small luminous do t an d a small dark do t may appear on
the LCD panel.
8.6.3 Replacing LCD backlights

Before replacing LCD backlight, remove the LCD panel from the escutcheon. In addition, make sure that
the machine’s power is O FF to replace LCD backlights.
LCD backlight type for replacement: L502174G01
© Remove the cable from the backlight connector connected to the LCD backlight power supply card.
© Remove the cable for menu keyboard from the keyboard unit.
(D Remove the cable for ON/OFF switch from the keyboard unit.
(D Unscrew the M4 screws (8 screws) to remove the escutcheon.
(§) Press the nail during pulling the LCD backlight out. (Figure 8.8)
(D Attach the LCD backlight for replacement in the reverse order of 1 ) -4).
\ 0
ill
fpBft :jprr=mi
n r\,
ho
mi H : 'tT
8I l
—
(2)
s
0
67
TENTATIVE
8.7 Maintenance of Battery

All data, such as Ihe parameter and machining program that need to be backup when the power is turned
OFF, are saved by a battery installed in the control unit. It is easy to get a battery because a familiar mm-
Type lithium battery is being used.
Replace the battery as a standard within one week if the Battery oltageDrop Caution Alarm is appeared.
If the battery isn’t replaced, the Battery Voltage Drop Warning Alarm is appeared. Then, internal backup data
could be damaged.
Battery type name: CR17335SE-R-CH2
8.7.1 Handling of Battery

Double oxidation manganese - Lithium battery contains inflammable material such as lithium, organic
solvent.
Erroneous handling of lithium battery may result in such an accident of heat generation, explosion or fire,
possibly leading to personnel injuries or machine malfunction.
CD Do not recharge, disassemble, apply pressure, heat, directly solder or dispose in fire the battery.
© Insert the battery (+)(-) correctly.
© Do not create short circuit between (+) and (-}. An d do not carry or store the battery with the metal
goods such as a necklace.
(3) When the battery is stored or disposed, do not stack or jumble up the batteries with other metal goods.
Then, put a insulating tape to the terminals of the batteries to prevent a short circuit.
© Do not use the batteries by mixing different types or old batteries together with new ones.
8.7.2 Replacement of Battery
© Check that the machine power is turned OFF. (If the power is not OFF, turn it OFF)
© Remove the battery cable from the control unit.
© Replace the battery from the holder.
@ Install the battery with the process which is contrary to ©~@.
H'
©Remove the battery cable IT'D
©Remove Ihe ballery
7©
i
A
i
: :-D
\ a
Ur '
IT
c -
| ACAUTION] O If the battery low warning is issued, save the machining programs , tool data an d
parameters in the input /output device, an d then replace the battery .
/K Do not short circuit, charge overheat , incinerate or disassemble the battery .
/t\ Dispose of spent batteries according to local laws .
68
TENTATIVE
8.8 Maintenance of Cooling Fan

Tw o cooling fans are mounted in the control unit. One cools down the NCCPU, and the other cools down the
PC CPU.
These two fans are same part.
Type Name of Cooling Fa n : MMF-06E24DS-RP3
8.8.1 Life of Cooling Fan

r The life of the cooling fan depends on the grease life of the bearing. The rotation time when 20% of the
rotation speeds decrease more than an initial rotation speed is defined as the life, and the life is 50,000
hours.
8.8.2 Replacement of Cooling Fa n

© Check that the machine power is turned OFF. (If the power is not OFF, turn it OFF.)
(2 ) Remove the fan cable from the FAN1 connector located around the left to p of the NC unit.
(D Remove the cover with opening the lock latch.
@ Remove the cooling fan
© Install a new cooling fan with the process w hi ch i s contrary to © ~ d).
©Remove the fan cable

©Remove the cover
y .
frs.
A )/
lit
r
>*.
..... .
i
sk.-'i
i •
-sf
M
Remove the cooling fan i
IV
:
i.:: j...
r*
5
i' i
(
69
70
71
72
asic Operations for Maintenance 1
1 Basic Operations for Maintenance
Th e minimum operations required for system maintenance are described in this chapter.
1-1 Unlocking the Password Key Lock
The functions and screens that cannot be operated by the user are locked with a password key,
and normally cannot be used.
1-1-1 Releasing the Key-lock

The key-lock can be released with the following procedures. Once the key-lock is released, the
key is remained unlocked until the power is turned OFF but is automatically re-locked when the
power is t ur ne d O N again.
(1 ) Select the [DIAGNOS] [VERSION] screen.
TP S 0 2005/10/20 Id : 31 : 47
w 50* Orp*» Vv\A 0. OOiii/nin
POSITION SET UP PROGRAM OOL C-COND. PARAM DIAGHOS DATA TOOL DISPLAY
INFO. DATA I/O LAYOUT MAP
MS0* ITPS 0 2005/10/20 Id : 33: 23
\/\j 50Y ' SJ.JJI Orpn ‘V'vV> 0 . OOin/miii

VERSION ALARM ALARM PLC MAIHIEN RUNNING GRAPHIC DATA ACCTJMD.
HISTORY IGNAL CHECK CONTROL MA I NT B. ERASE TIME
EH ® TPS 0 2005/10/20 1 4 : 3 4 : 3 3
|
'\A; 50* UQ > rp» VV\A o ooiii/nii*
DlivCHOS ERSION DIAGNOS OPTION SERVO SPINDLE HARDWARE LADDER

MONITOR ONITOR MONITOR MONITOR MONITOR
(2) Press the menu selection and input the keys in the following order:
3000[ INPUT
Following the operation above, the Hidden screen menu will appear when the menu selection
key is pressed
t
Screen selection key Menu key Menu selection ke y
t
73
1-1-2 Normally (locked with password key) Prohibited Operations
1. Setting of forced output

[Normal]: Menu on DIAGNOS screen.
*
[TPS
:
0 200S/10/20 ; i 4 : 3 4 : 3 8
so* iLUJJ rp«j vW*. O . OOin/jairt
DIAGHOS VERSION DIAGHOS OPTION SERVO SPINDLE HARDWARE LADDER

MONITOR ONITOR MON DIOR MOH1TOR MONITOR
[Hidden]: Select DIAGNOS MONITOR menu.

*3
HH&i TPS 0 2005/10/20 14:38:20
so * TTTO tpa V V\A 0 . 00 in/» in
IAGNOS VE RSIO N DIAGHOS OPT IOH SERVO SPENDLE HARDWARE LADDER I/O WRITE
i
MONITOR MONITOR | HOW IT OK MONITOR MONITOR WRITE CANCEL
2. Setting of servo parameters and spindle parameters

• Parameter setting menu
Servo window
Spindle Parameter window
[Normal]: Menu on VERSION screen.

i
Ell aa TPS 0 2005/10/20 14:34:30 i

'-A.- im rpa VVY- 0 . OOiu/min
DIAGHOS VERSION DIAGNOS PTION SERVO SPINDLE HARDWARE LADDEP.

ONITOR ONITOR j MONITOR MONITOR MONITOR I
[Hidden]: Select SERVO MONITOR or SPINDLE MONITOR menu.

93
ESIloa. JTPS 0 2005/10/20 14:38:51
’V v SO* iLjJJi z'pn VV\A O . OOin /min
i r,
DIAGHOS VERSION DIAGHOS OPTION SERVO SPINDLE HARDWARE LADDER P ARAM.

i.
When the PARAM. setting menu is pressed, the respective parameter window will appear.
74
3. Setting of system parameters (SYSTEM PARAM), pitch error compensation (PITCH

ERROR) and display of key history (KEY HISTORY), memory scope (MEMORY SCOPE)
[Normal]: Menu on VERSION screen.

: *
wm&\ TPS 0 2005/10/20 -14:34:38
'w 5 XEH? rpn VWV 0.00 in/miii
DIAGHOS VERSION DIAGHOS PTION SERVO SPINDLE HARDWARE LADDER

MONITOR ONITOR ONITOR MONITOR MONITOR
[Hidden]: VERSION” menu appears on the right end.

a*j3 TPS 0 2005/10/20 14:39:17
*\f\j SOY :5TQ» rp» ]V W 0 . 00in/».in
IAGHOS VERSION DIAGHOS OPTION SERVO SPINDLE HARDWARE LADDER VERSIOH
>3 I TPS
;
0 2005/10/20 14:39:38
VX * SO1. Orpn VWo.OOin/min

DIAGHOS SYSTEM PITCH HEY MEMORY
PARAM RROR HISTORY SCOPE
4. Setting of cutting parameter (CUTTING PARAM)
[Normal]: Menu on CUTTING CONDITION screen

TPS 0 2005/10/20 14:48:22
V\ - 50i m ji lpn • VW 0. 00 in /rain
WORK -MAT C-SP FR ORKMAT . C-COND. cur C-OND

TOOL-MAT PERCENT . TURNING LEARN
=Ll
[Hidden]: CUTTING PARAM menu appears on the right end
|
*>3
mm*- TPS 0 2005/10/20 I
'\A/ 50 Y JZD rpn VV'A 0 OOiu/mlti

*3
WORK HAT C-SD FR WORKMAT . COND. CUT CC'ND CUTTIIJC
i
I DO L- MAT ERCENT . TURNING
: LEARN PARAM
I:
303 TPS 0 200S/1O/20 14.41:07

\;\ .' 50*. HD > r p» V-.V 0 OOin/min i
1
Is CUTTING CUTT TNG CUTTING r • cmiD *
(
ARAM l PARAM 2 PARAM 3 :
75
1-1-3 Exiting the MAZATROL Screen

The MAZATROL screen can be exited with the following operation.
r
u TES 0 : 2 505/10/20 14:42:2a
'XA J 50 V rpa ;VVV- O . t)0in/tti.tt
DcM Ax».~*re(
OSITION SET UP PROGRAM OOL -COND* PARAM DI -i-liir.'i r<: 9iy TOOL DISPLAY
1HFO. DATA LAYOUT MAP
W Xm IP S 0 :2
1 Debug Functions >

JD . PARAH T>% Arrange windows neatly
I
z
When the password key is unlocked, bring the cursor to
this space and click on the right mouse button button to
display the window above.
The MAZATROL screen is exited when Exit is selected.
1-1 -4 Returning the Password Key Lock Releasing State
When the NC is powered on, it is always in the state of key-loced”.

Select Debug Functions ”11 31 Mode from the window avobe to r etu rn to the normal state
from the password key lock releasing state if you don't w an t t o turn NC power supply on again.
ebugWindow uI-
PS 0 2005/JE m\
cndchkFree
Debug Menu Button r
GL Functions >
PLC Menu
Arrange windows neatly - uisyiiKi
Exit
JT MA P
76
Basic Operations for Maintenance
1-2 Completely Erasing the Memory

The entire syslem memory (SRAM) area is cleared when the card, provided with memory, is
replaced or added.
1-2-1 Card with Memory Mounted

HN482 (NC memory module board)
-2-2 Clearing the Memory y 0 7

RotSw 1
The procedure for erasing the SRAM is described below. <5
(1 ) Set C to NC rotary switch 2 [RotSw2].


Rotary switch 1 [RotSwl] is 0 ”.
A
1,
(Refer to t he right images.) R n
F 0 1
E RotSw2
h XX'?
2) Turn the NC power ON .
r.
n
The 7-segment LED will change as shown below. R
The procedure is completed when Y appears.
Changes at a high speed between these sections.

t
D O
SRAM clear
Power ON
(3) The PC side of NC is started while clearing the memory. So when the alarm
messages are displayed while starting NC screen, click the OK to all messages.
(Note: The operation in MATRIX. Th e PC side is not started in M640.)
i
(4) After all alarm messages are cleared, shutdown the PC from the Windows start menu.
77
(5) After the shutdown is completed, NC power is turn to OFF
(6) Return the NC rotary switch 2 to 0 (Refer to the image

v
cP
CP
A
£ 8 1
x» s?
<j>
SRAM clear by RotSw2 C executes the following operation: O
1 . Memory test and zero clear to all SRAM area

2. Zero clear to PLC bit RAM and word RAM 6 8
78
1-4 Backing Up and Restoring th e SRAM Data

Of the various data used with the MAZATROL MATRIX, some data is backed up by a battery and
saved in SRAM even if the power has been turned OFF.
Flowever, this saved data will be erased when the memory is cleared. Also, the SRAM data might
be destroyed when the card is replaced, etc.
/j\ Always backup the SRAM data before carrying ou t work that could cause the SRAM data to be
destroyed.
The some data (parameter etc.) in SRAM are registered in FLROM, and can be read when
required. Th e default parameters are always registered in the FLROM when shipped from the
Yamazaki factory.
1-4-1 Operation Method of SRAM Backing Up
FLROM
SRAM
Common, local Common, local

variables variables
Too related tables
SRAM
arameters .Some data Parameters
Jaw shape data
Cutting conditions. Cutting conditions.

ne w cutting conditions aintenance new cutting conditions
tool
eriodic inspection
lllfe' Periodic inspection
|~ Extended coordinate
-r:'
antry control data Gantry control data
h.
HD
'-t
RA M %
All
C : \m a inte\s ra m bkf . dat
79
asic Operations for Maintenance
a
1-4-2 Backing Up and Restoring the SRAM
SRAM data is backed up and restored using the maintenance tool.
An outline is shown below.
Start the maintenance tools, and select the BACKUP screen.

ipZ',
BACKUP -
FLASK ROM
SSAX
EJCT-I'ATA UO
C: '-x-ai n . tfat
UPDATEJ MAIHTraAMCsl BACKUP [ OPTfOK EKIT
With the backup function, the SRAM data in the NC ca n be saved in another medium
Execute the following operations using the button (T) to @.
© SRAIVH>FLROM
A part of SRAM data in the NC unit (Note) is backed up in FLROM in the NC unit.
© SRAM<-FLROM
A part of SRAM data backed up in FLROM (Note) is read to SRAM.
SRAMÿHDD
The whole SRAM data in the NC unit (2MB), as well as the PLC's BIT-RAM and
WORD-RAM area are backed up in HDD.
The Names of backup files are fixed as follows. _
Content ile name ize Remarks
Whole SRAM C:\mainte\srambkf.dat 2MB
PLC’s C:\rn ainte\plcbkff 1 . dat_ 1M B F o r MATRIX Standard
BIT-RAM/WORD-RAM C:\mainte\plcbkfOf ,dat 4KB For MATRIX NEXUS
@ SRAM<-HDD
The above files, which have been backed up in H D D , are read to the original area in the NC
unit.
(Note) A part the SRAM data items read/written between SRAMoFLROM are listed below
• User parameters
- Machine parameters
- R registers (R21 00 to R2527)
• Cutting conditions
- Cutting conditions learn
- Maintenance check
- GL (gantry) parameters
80
asic Operations for
a
1-5 Backing Up th e Saved Data
Of all the data stored in SRAM and HD , the data indicating the customer's machine conditions can
be backed up by data input/output on NC screen.
It is recommended to backup these data before various maintenance operations are worked.
Save these data as the customer's current machine condition data if any troubles or fault occurs.
1-5-1 Types of the Saved Data
Item Device saved data

SRAM HD
Machining
programs O
Tool data O o
Tool offsets O
Tool files O
Jaw shape O
Cutting conditions O
Workpiece offsets O
User parameters O
Machine
parameters
O
Extended
O
coordinate
Macro variables O
Periodic inspection O
Note: R registers of R2100 to R2527 and R10500 to R11999 are included in the machine
parameters.
Note: The tool d at a h as the main data in HD a nd t he index table in SRAM.
1-5-2 Media for Backing Up th e Saved Data
(1) HD
The data of the item described in 1-5-1 can be backed up to an arbitrary HD’s folder of
NC.
(2) IC memory card (Using the NC front slot)
The data of the item described in 1-5-1 can be backed up by using the IC memory card
from NC front slot.
(3) US B memory
can be backed up by using the USB memory from
The data of the item described in 1-5-1
NC front USB slot or US B slot on pendant box side (extended from US B slot on the back
of NC).
81
1-5-3 Backing Up the Saved Data
Fo r example, the method of backing up the saved data by the US B memory is as follows.
(1) Press the screen selection key until the menu in the figure below appears, and select
DATA I/O from th e menu
osmou TOOL PROGRAM OOL C-COHD. P ARAM OIACHOS DATA 30 DISPLAY
LAYOUT DATA x/o 3Xiur WAT
(2) Input/output the data on the screen below.
MCCRW
T
—T il
t
|V: V=J
T.:.: E
I =F
tmUm
ITIIZZIZZZp:
•
T
i;
% •. - L \*i.
rrr r TOT**
n lAtl CUO tw o CCD CAM DMA

:
• n* « *w
s»
(3) Select the menu ke y USB”.

US B I/O menu is displayed.
(4) The DEVICE SELECT screen is displayed when DEVICE SELECT of the US B I/O
menu is pressed. The D drive is selected (highlighted) with the [ T ] key, and click [OK]
(or press the [INPUT]).
MC<-OSD NC->USD SD DATA I/O IR. DIR.
LOAD SAVE CONTENT SELECT PAKAH. DELETE SELECT
i'i » nr
IA: \)
I O : \ 1 M AZAT KOI.
(Effl
(Note) When two or more US B memories are inserted, the E drive or more might be
assigned.
82
0
(5) When the menu DIR. SELECT is pressed, the selected drive's folder is displayed in
SELECT DIRECTORY window. Select the folder to output data.
• W hen a folder is newly created, input a folder name with the keys directly.
r OTB TT tn RECTORY: »
n*> CMM PRtOOBAH
r I
r
. .
I'r
4 r
n
IT
&
— b~
r
TUC* DATA [irÿV [ c*

T
T
r
i
ZZTJ • AV p. Q6 i n/min
RV vn MC • >oins llBB LtniT* OJ.T* I/O

AD tiltt CSMCTtW* rcixcs YiUtW. DtiATfc
The selected folder name is displayed in « DIRECTORY » on the right side when OK
is clicked or <INPUT> is pressed. /
C usn <-r n r r . r c r o P T : ntcxti* »

PROGRAM PROGRAM
£
I
~:r :p:
O T nE R D AT A
t - 1.
OTHER D A T A
I
ESeSS'Ti TPE 0 20CS/10/1V 19:43:22

/v? so> UUl rpa VAS O 00 in /min i
f
| Hf '.-USA K| C- >USB usn narvr. nma x/o nip DTA .
'
.0 AD AVE COWTEHT SELECT VARAN. DELETE SELECT
(6) Select NC—>USB SAVE , and select the data to output.
83
(7) Selecting the program file
Press the menu SELECT ALL . W h en < IN PU T> is pressed, all program files are
displayed in the program area on the upper left. If not all programs are displayed in the
program area at a time, the programs can be confirmed by moving the scrollbar up and
down.
;<>
*- sfM *y, jirntc-roGr:
PBOCJIJ#*
pytfarJ -s
i
EEEt i T
--
T
Wt A
TOOL, riix Ctroor .TMT
_ __
'ÿy,
[ ASM W
Twissso;
_;
'? ' ' .. .

— her.::::
CTPS|tal ,>i> JOWlo/ll I ' H I*
:;ÿ> JP» >V'v*' #*S0 in/min iKtonirtKcu MCOCOAM WIMBI.'X »
Tttt nv.um ST WIT

roaiAt ki,f- I rm
(8) Selecting other data
Move the selected area from PROGRAM to OTHER DATA by using TA B key.
(When TAB key is pressed once again, the area is moved fro m O TH ER DATA to
PROGRAM”.)
Select and highlight all items by inputting INPUT”.
*h: • • JUKtt-JtHCf; HAJ'SHV >>

'• rPOGB-W PDr*on«4
. I
;
i ;
i
\
— r;;.:
1
...
.
:
• » » *' » t'HJ A
; -;;Tssri1*3
.........
ft
r
ttwfc
cun
rJL*
iit. CUJIP ,n.T-;
rums
•
«»r« i SSiS?-
IL »O ViSi
Uifl MAJX 3 j
EfliSÿ r> 3 > rc-Ti/tO/ll tl:45.ni j

0,3m TBAVGWIT -.IHVerS'..- »o CX* - '
S’”
At J. r n»
(9) When START menu is pressed, the copy is started.

The output situation is displayed sequentially in the selected directory column on the right
side. The copy is completed when the directory column is the same as [NC] on the left
side.
84
<r*
1-5-4 Restoring the Saved Data
Fo r example, the method of restoring the saved data backed up by the US B memory is as
follows.
(1) to (5) Set the USB memory's folder name in the same wa y as previous section.
::
(6) Selecting the backup data
When US B CONTENT -* START is pressed from the menu, all contents of selected
folder is displayed on the right side column.
IH I
msKTiisr
HM57 '*** Jt MUD

w> 253 A*A-‘
II »rt«T
(7) Loading the selected data

When NC<— US B LOAD -> START is pressed from the menu, the selected data is
loaded to NC The output situation is displayed sequentially in the [NC] column on the left
side. The loading is completed when the directory column is the same as [FID] on the right
side.
Ppr
P”* ..... un -
;i
i
»» potto ft.'B
n,t
PtRtlftXBJU
pi
HftT.-'VIIF >i
|.
imv:,’ .Mian ti-.M. VJiWy
mz<*
. *;>
IJZJ :
85
a
1-5-5 Saving to the various media
The US B memory was selected as a medium for saving in the above example. Hard disk and IC
card (front) can be used as a medium for saving.
Select the device from DATA I/O menu in the previous section (2).
cnuo lINUl) usa CAM DATA

DJ2K $AVIC
> Select US B
->ÿ Select hard disk
> Select IC card (front)
(D When a hard disk is selected
As for the drive and the folder, C:\MC_backup\Other is selected as default.

Select the target from under the above-mentioned folder by the menu DIR SELECT .
(2) When a IC card is selected

The drive is fixed on front IC card.
Select the target folder from under the ROOT of IC card by the menu DIR SELECT .
Other operations when the hard disk and IC card are selected apply correspondingly the USB
memory in the previous section.
86
a
1-6 File System Configuration
1-6-1 File System Format

Each size of the MAZATROL MATRIX file system is decided by the number of programs and
number of tool system parameters. Up to 960 programs ca n be set as a multiple of and up
to 4000 tools can be set
arameter Setting value
2 programs 2
0100 No . of programs 56 programs 16
12 programs 32
960 programs 60
Fo r 0100, set the No. of programs/16 value.
Note 1: Th e No . of tools is set according to the machine specifications.

Note 2: Refer to section 1-8 Initializing the Data for the actual formatting operations.
87
1-7 Setting Data with Special Operations

The following data cannot be set easily by the user. Special operations are required.
1-7-1 Setting the Date and Time

Date and time of MAZATROL MATRIX is automatically set when the power is ON using the
Windows internal clock as the reference. Thus, the date and time are set with the Windows clock.
(1 ) Double-click on the date above the menu or time area.
I TPS 1 j JOOS/1O/10 [l7:4J:J6

l 50 , [vW' 50s
POSITION I TOOL PROGRAM TOOL C-COND ARAH DIAGHOS DATA 3D DISPLAY
I LAYOUT DATA I/O SETUP MAP
(2) Date and Time Properties” of Windows is displayed, se t the current date and time.
The set data is validated immediately.
Dale a.jd qhnB Properties [Yf
Date & Time j Tine Zone ii Internet Tune j
D«t£
mm® ;
.... ..... .it — .
.
- f zoos
— -------
... i , , *
\
1 2 3
1 5 6 7 8 9 10
1 12 13 H 15 16 17
13 19 20 2i 22 23 21
25 26 27 28 29
|
:
I 3:04:56PM Z |
Current tine rone: Gf'lT Dayl*gi>t Time
[ CX Cancel
88
*
Basic Operations for Maintenance 1
1-7-2 Setting the Accumulated Time

Five types of accumulated times are displayed. The total time can be changed with the following
procedure.
(1) Release the password ke y lock.
Refer to the section 1-1-1 Releasing the Key-lock .
(2) Select the OPTION PARAM screen, and turn 0106 bitO ON .
Note: The total time cannot be rewritten unless 030 bit 6 is turned ON .
(The other data will be rewritten.)
(3) Select DIAGNOSIS -> ACCUMU. TIME (highlight), and open the
ACCUMULATED window.
~* s 3 14:51:44
'VV 50 * jS T []? rpa V\AA O. 001n/aia

VERSIOK ALARM ALARM PLC MAINTEH ROHNIKG GRAPHIC DATA
ISTORY S 1GHAL CHECK OffTROL MAIHTE. ERASE TIME
(4) Using the cursor keys, move the cursor to TOTAL TIME”
ACCUMULATED TIME
-ifitfSl
jfe -
TX I £«cl pa
aiiiSl
j 200o.dd.od:
(5) Input the time data to be set, and then press the INPUT key to complete the setting.
Ex. To set 2000 hours:
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 INPUT
(6) When yo u input data in above procedures, the 0106 bitO is automatically turned OFF.
Please select the SYSTEM PARAM screen, and confirm that 0106 bitO is OFF.
89
1-8 Initializing th e Data
1-8-1 Initializing the Data
(1) Turn the NC power ON.
....
(2) Press the screen selection key until the following menu appears. Select [DIAGNOS]
-» [DATA ERASE] from this menu.
Tr s 0 too 5/10/10
l
'W T |=—
4, S
POSiriOH
•
TOOL f ROGRAM; Vl; TOOI. C-COHD”. RRflM - I piRGHOS| DATA • ÿ in DISPLAY
•
LAYOUT DATA ETUP MAP
;;; - ~ ; , '
j j : j ires o :2ocs/io/i8 jveiSTS

Fvv 4% 50* [VV‘A so*
YERSIO.H LARM ALARM PLC MA32TTEH PLC RUHHXMG GRAPHIC ACCUMU.

ISTORY SIG HAL CHECK CONTROL : MALHTE ,
| ERASE ;• M
(3) Using the arrow keys and INPUT key, validate the initialization of all data on the
displayed window (highlight in blue).
• Z OO t DATA ADD WPC
TOOL P1S-E
TkxsL Qivv::f,T
i
(TTTT1HC OOMtL
ORK oppytr ALAJtH HISTORY
ACRO VAR. MADHtHWCE
OHPtfrriOPt <-99»9 lNPnY> j-.v-.WM
START TWIT .
(4) Follow the message under the data selection field, input -9999 and press the INPUT
key. The initialization is completed when the DATA ERASE window display
disappears.
90
a
1-8-2 Initializing the Programs
The initialization procedure of the area where the machining program is stored is shown below.
(1) Turn the NC power ON .
(2) Press the screen selection key until the following menu appears. Select [PROGRAM]
-» [PROGRAM FILE] from this menu.
_
ifv'j?
I 50 . 5o % J
OSITION TOOL Pit OG RAM TOOL C-COND.: ARAM DIAGHOS DATA 3„ DISPLAY
LAYOUT ATA I/O SETUP MAI?
0 (1,1) INSERT
4ÿ
fvv I IP so%
WORK NO. SEARCH PROGRAM TOOL DISPLAY CHANGE DIR. PROGRAM f

EDIT PATH 2PROGRAM PROGRAM CHANGE FILE |
; .j .| j IrPS 0 i 2005/10/18 jl? :48:24

KA , «*
PROGRAM PROCEAM NAME PROGRAM PROGRAM PART DIP.. PROGRAM PROGRAM
REHUIIBER] BRA9E INPUT COPY DIT SHAPE CHANGE TRANSFER
-L
i
(3) Select (highlight) [ALL ERASE] from t hi s m e nu . Using the operation board keys, input
’’-9999 and then press the INPUT key. Initialization of the programs is completed
when the highlighted display of A LL ERASE returns to the normal display.
TPS 0 7005/10/ia |l7;42:47
vU yw v
4* so% A3.L ERASE <-9999 INPD7> 7
i: -9999
DELETE SELECT i. V:'r;T;;; ; y PROGRAM

1 PROG. DELETE ERASE I
J
r~
i
(4) When DI R CHANGE is pressed, the following dialog is displayed. Th e program
stored area can be changed by the buttons. For the following three areas, all erase of
(3) is operated.
f >*ÿ*»
DIRFCTORv|ÿC: Proqra«a« jj-$

WORK No SIZE PKOT.P.AM KAHF.
----
(Selected area) (Directory display)
----
J3
iTANDAKI) PROGRAM K
—I -ÿ©STANDARD PROGRAM C:\MC_MachineProgurams
HACK UP PROGRAM -E>(2)BACKUP PROGRAM C:\MC_Backup\Programs
HOI) Ol’EKAT I(KO<;KAM- ®HDD OPERATION PROGRAM

C:\MC_Direct Mode Programs
91
92
93
94
95
List of data backed up (If the folder/file do not exist, the backup is unnecessary.)
Data details Folder (file) name

1 Machining programs C:\MC_Machine Programs
2 Machining programs for HD C:\MC_Direct Mode Programs
operation _
3 Gantry programs C:\MC GL Data
4 Machining programs for backup G:\MC_Backup
Sampling data tool data related C:\MC sdg
Operation control screen data C:\RUMMNG
7 Display data for NIC screen C:\nm64mdata
8 Data for graphic maintenance/ C:\m6y_ymw\Mplc
alarm navigation _
9 Custom display related module C:\Custom Display
10 3D interference check*Real C:\MC_Machine Database
simulator* 3D data for setup
1 Real simulator IN I FILE C:\m6y ymw\M740\Bin\ReleaseVealsimjni
2 NC system software C:\ncbackup
13 J2-CT parameters CAI2ctbus\Axisinfu.dat
C:\j2ctbusV***. prm
14 Maintenance data C:\mainte\mnt_j3kup.dat
5 Option data C:\mainte\(NC serial No.).opt
C:\mainte\(IMC serial No.). opt. old
16 I SRAM backup _ C:\mainte\srambkf.dat
17 I PLC internal memory backup C:\mainteVpfcbkf1 1 ,dat (other than NEXUS)
C:\mainte\plcbkf01 .dat (NEXUS) _
96
Matrix Data To Save
A d de d note in step 1 for backup-inch folder(R3)
The data fo r the Matrix control can now be saved to a n U SB Jump drive which will allows to save
complete folders easily . So, the data to save is somewhat revised from that o f t he M640.
Data To Save on Installation Checklist
1) Through Data I/O save the machine parameters, user parameters, cutting conditions.
Save to hard drive under Backup-inch folder if in inch mode, an d Backup-mm for
metric.(R3)
2) Using either Printkey or Printscreen3 (c:\mainte\printscreen3.exe) save th e
following 4 pages:
A) Go to privilege mode.
(T o access: Diagnos, Version, Right menu key », 1131 an d Input.)
B) page.
C) Version page- (Note: In privilege mode, the Model number will be
displayed)
D) O-Parameter page.
E) Hardware Monitor page.
3) Copy the c:\m6y_ymw\Mplc or Tplc folder.
4) Copy the C:MC_SDG\ Alarm folder.
5) Copy the Nm64mdata\eng folder.
6) Copy *.prm an d axisinfu.dat file from the c:\Program Files\j2ctbus
7) Save a new mntbkup.dat file using c:\mainte\mainte.exe maintenance tool to hard
drive. Then copy the resulting mntbkup.dat an d *.opt file from the c:\mainte.exe
folder to USB drive.
8) Save any 9000 series programs either by Data I/O or Explorer.
9) Save the Pic ladder. See Appendix B
If have a Gantry
10) Save parameter and programs of robot using Data I/O on robot side.
ll)Copy all of these into a folder with S.N. Machine Type and Customer Name.
Then compress to a zipped with serial number and date(YYYYMMDD).
Example 184305_20060512.zip. For s.n 184305 and May 5th,2006.
12) Place this on the shared on “locutus”(S:) folder of
Address |Z] S:\MazdtroHMachineDataFromField\184305_QTN300_IPH
Folders j ” “f feme 1 Sa | Type: iHddfed I

§ shared on tortus' (S:) 3 ft LJ fl843O5_2OO6O504.zip 154 KB WinZip File 05/04/06 12:15PM
:
lu GCM i
.t D (2004-02-03) Mahle Update 184305_QTN300_IPNI

* J O.ClassSyllabus
* j O.dassWorkbooks I This folder is Online.
* J OO MEAU consignment parts
Mazatrol\MachineDataFromField
by logging in using VPN or having someone in the office placing it there.
97
It is up to the regions how they wish to handle the data as they probably wish to
have their own backup. See Appendix 1 for more detail.
Data To Save on Service Calls if updated software.

1) Version page.
2) Alarm folder
3) Pic ladder.
4) *.LPC file if upgraded.
5) Machine a nd u se r parameters.
Appendix A Saving the Mntbkup.dat file

y .. v - Li
2nd
'
'
\ .
-
nafA' . si
-M&1MTENAHCE
- NC IACKUP - I
NC worn HC HODEI 1b X s-
FC&6551HY-NV
CONTROL UNIT TYPE
:_il 1 FCA655LHY-HV
CONTROL UNIT TYPE
1; 1 i
FOJC-MAG51-34 FCU6~NA651~34 wne

NC 5EE1A1# DE I . >j HC SERIAL*
Vnc_tool Fib Folder
M6S6993033-9 M6 56 993 03 39
BU5DRV32.DLL 48 KB Applccticn Ex
OPTION DATA OPTION DATA
setup, txt 1KB Text Docurrer
NC MODEL IHFUT Dload32.exe 2b KB Applcation
k px'pdv<6.s: a <r-u .-nanhrr ;
yjozl: CONTROL UNIT TYPE IHFUT I m62yticcd dl 32 KB Applcatien £x
a | fjMGSysHDNC M. ex e 80 KB Applccficn
PRODUCT ID#
— -
r
HC SERIAL# INPUT
.....—
J i
p] W6YSV5.DLL 24 KB Applcsfcicn Ex
PC 3-DEM- 0007007-00000
BACKUP = 51873-DEM-0OQ7OO7-OOGOO — — — -— — —
'1$*- INPUT
-4
IE# CHANGE
ID* BACKUP i j
--i •
-
j
gW62VbY3.DLL
fÿPrintSrreenJ.eve
lgm62ytd.ag.cil
ha
gj m62 vtaDi.nl
Z4 KB
20 KR
28 KB
143 KB
Applcaicn £X
ApplcsBinn
Appkctlen Ex
Applcation Ex
pMAIWrE.KE 368 KB ApplCctiOn
s/w UPDATE I HAIHTENANCE BACKUP OPTION <-<- pj mante.ni 3 KB
; 3-ÿmainte : ~fWj mrf._bkup.dot 1 KB DAT Fib <M
g|||g||
§J —
* i ; L_ J Vnc_t; :
M- P 1 Mcbeckjp?
\rÿ. \
lsti \i
•
*) -Cj nm64triat
i 1 Program I ' <7
i
Results new mntjokup jg
-'.it
Copy the new resulting mntbkup.dat and *.opt file to USB jump drive.
Appendix B- Saving of the ladder.
1) P r e s s DIAGNOS.
2) P r e s s VERSION. S e l e c t >RIGHT MENU> ke y an d e n t e r 1 1 3 1 an d
p r e s s Input.
3) P r e s s LADDER
MONITOR
4 ) Select NC
FILE
98
5) P r e s s OPEN.
6) S e l e c t OPEN a g a i n .
A)Display will say “Reading from Pic”
B) D i s p l a y w i l l sa y P ic Onboard C o m p l e t e
P r e s s OK .
8) P r e s s CLEFT MENUC key t w i c e to se e LADDER in b l a c k now.
9) S e l e c t MONITOR an d d i s p l a y w i l l a c t u a l v a l u e s .
1 0 ) If still n ot showing status, select START/
STOP
MONITOR
11) If No comments t h e n may be t h a t th e comments aren't

selected to be s h o w n .
) Press CLEFT MENUC ke y till se e th e VIEW, select it .
TOOLS
B) S e l e c tCOMMENT
ISPLAY
C)Make sure t h e r e is c h e c k m a r k b e s i d e | | COMMENT .
D) P r e s s SET when f i n i s h e d .
Still No comment?
T h i s is p r o b a b l y b e c a u s e th e comment file (*. w e d ) w a s n ' t
Loaded in with l a d d e r in s t e p s 5 an d 6 .
A) Keep p r e s s i n g CLEFT MENUC key till yo u see th e
main M i t s u b i s h i P ic Programming T o o l s C o p y r i g h t
screen .
B) S e l e c t ENVIRON .
SETTING
C) S e l e c t NC FILE
) SETTING
E) Click on th e STORAGE PATH Box so it is h i g h l i g h t e d

o r j u s t p r e s s arrow down key to h i g h l i g h t it .
F ) The p a t h w a y s h o u l d b e C : \m6y_ymw\MPLC
G) P r e s s SETTING menu k e y .
H) P r e s s th e L e f t menu key an select NC
FILE
R e p e a t s t e p s 5 t h r o u g h 10 to see th e l a d d e r w i t h comments.
l a d d e r a n d comments a re
1 2 ) If shown, go to next s t e p to
save l a d d e r and comment file.
1 3 ) P r e s s CLEFT MENUC
ke y till se th e C o p y r i g h t s c r e e n , th e
LADDER must be shown a s solid b l a c k .
14) Press NC
FILE
99
15) P r e s s OPEN
16) P r e s s OPEN a g a i n .
17) S e l e c t OK.
18) P r e s s CLEFT MENUC ke y till see C o p y r i g h t sc re e n a ga in .
19) S e l e c t I EXTERNAL
FILE
20) Press SAVE

PROJECT
21 ) P r e s s EXTERNAL
) SAVE
22 ) If a USB j u m p d r i v e is i n s e r t e d , then make s u r e t h a t

th e Drive/Path is s e t c o r r e c t l y to th e d r i v e .
23 ) S e l e c t PROJECT
NAME
24 ) E n t e r in an a p p r o p r i a t e f i l e n a m e , normally ladder
version .
25 ) P r e s s SAVE.
26 ) Select OK .
The l a d d e r is now s a v e d to th e USB J u m p d r i v e .
Note: When the project ladder is saved, it will be a folder that includes sub-folders
containing the ladder and comments. The lathe, e-machine, an d mill’s file structure are
different.
100
Appendix 1
Connect to shared drive, “Shared on Locutus” by entering the Mazak

network either from a regional office or through VPN. It is best to m ap that
drive so you don’t have to do a search via Network Neighborhood.
i— J Q Mazatrol
->9 shared on 'locutus' (5:)
j B D GCM
aC (2004-02-03) Mahle Update
4 shared on
Q MC parts order
ClMCAM_POSTS
i $ 0 ] 0_ClassSyllabus 'locutus' (S:) Cl MEAU WARRANTY STOCK
j E-iCl 0_ClassWorkbooks Cl MERGE FILES
B-Q 00_MEAU consignment parts This folder is Online. Cl MexicoT ransf erPrice
Ifl Cl 10.0 CAPRMS Documentation Cl Midwest
Select an item to view its description. fj
i aCl 100 Series APC pjnn
Once there, simply go to the Mazatrol drive an d copy the customer

information by using s.n. , machine type, customer name in folder. Create a
folder using this as your format.
=
|Cl S:\Mazatrol\MachineDataFromField 3
Folders x J Name J
Cl Mazatrol Cl 184305_QTN300 JPM

: E C MachineDataFromField
| B Cl MATRIX_PRM VIEWER MachineDataFromFieli
±j . j Utilities
The zipped file with data should be named by serial number and date.
Address |Q S: \lÿzatrol\MachineDa :aFromFfeld\184305JÿN300JFÿ1 3 $

olders X Name l
ÿ Cj Mazatrol Sj 184305_20060504.zip
: E'CI MachineDataFromField
| B -S) 184305JQTN300JPM 184305_QTN300_IPM
Once this is placed here, it will be copied over to the standard service drive
for safe-keeping and will be available by either intranet or through the
service web-site, http://main.mazakcorp.com/service/.
101
102
ystem Maintenance Work @
2 System Maintenance Work
2-1 Folder/File Configuration and Device Information
2-1-1 AT Side Module and File List

The AT side modules and files required for this system.
These contents are planned to be described in the next edition.
2-1-2 HDD Folder Configuration

The configuration of this system's HD folders.
2-1-3 Device Information
The default setting information for the Windows system device manager.
103
ystem Maintenance Work
1
2-2 Version Upgrading S/W
2-2-1 Preparing the Media Upgraded
NC system software (MAIN-A) and NC application software (MAIN-B) are provided in the media such as
CD-ROM. In order to execute an upgrade, prepare for IC card, US B memory, etc. according to the
following folder configuration.
(1) When IC card (Front) is used:
Folder configuration
© Create a Verup folder directly below the device (root), and put a version-name folder under the
Verup folder.
(D Only on e version-name folder is allowed under the Verup folder.
(D The configuration of the folders/files under the version-name folder is as shown below.
@ Create either/both Atsys or/and Ncsys fo r the folder(s) under the version-name folder.
(root) The Verup folder directly below the device is the only object to be
upgraded. (The other folders and files are ignored.)
Q Hi Verup
D l A1 Create only one version-name folder in the Verup folder.
CjJ LH Atsys
0 Diski
\-{h Setup.exe > Application (MAIN-B) upgrade file
— { e t c. )
1
P Ncsys
i~Q Bootsys.ncs
r-O NcentJ.ncs
> NC system (MAI N-A) upgraded file
Ncsystem.ncs
(2) When a medium, such as IC card (Back), US B memory, etc., that can be accessed as an external
drive of the NC is used:
Folder configuration
© The file configuration under the version-name folder is as shown below.
(2) The location and number of version-name folders arbitrarily determined.
(D Create either/both Atsys or/and Ncsys for the folder(s) under the version-name folder.
Ck) Cn AO The location and number of version-name folders are arbitrarily determined.
in AI
CjD CH Atsys
p Diski
> Application (MAIN-B) upgraded file
f- Q Setup.exe
1
( e.t.c. )
dp Ncsys
j-o Bootsys nc s
> NC system (MAIN-A) upgraded file
NcentJ.ncs
Ncsystem.ncs
104
ystem Maintenance Work 1]
(3) When the version backed up in the HD is used:
When the application and NC system are upgraded by using the maintenance tool, the contents under
the version-name folder are automatically copied under the HD's C:\ncbackup.
(Note that the contents are copied in the Atsys folder when upgrading the application, and in the Ncsys
folder when upgrading the NC system.)
Since the versions previously upgraded with this NC are backed up in the HD , it is possible to retrieve
on e of those versions by selecting an arbitrary version No. as required.
(Example) When upgrading the application version A1
C:
Device Ncbackup
(root) O CH AO
O D A1 DAI
Cj3 D Atsys Atsys
P Diski Lp Diski
r-o Setup.exe j~L— I Setup.exe
i
(e.t.c. ) (e t c. )
All the contents under the version-name folder, including the file
Ncsys
to be upgraded, are copied in the HD's C:\ncbackup before
upgrading.
105
1
2-2-2 Upgrading Procedure
By the flow chart, the upgrading procedure is explained.

This chart explains a standard prodecre, so please confirm the details by “Version upgrade
manual which will be offerd when every new NC S/W version is released.
START
£
Back up the saved data
Back up the customer’s current data for attention.
Back up all data according to 1-5-3 Backing Up the
Saved Data .
ik
Backup of the SRAM data
Farther, backup SRAM data in the N C u nit.
Backup all the SRAM data and PLC’s data area
according to ®SRAM->HDD of 1-4-2 Backing Up
and Restoring the SRAM
Install the NC PC side system (MAIN-B). Refer to

Version upgrade
the PC side system (MAIN-B) section 2-2-4 Upgrading PC Side System
(MAIN-B) for details.
£
Version upgrade
the NC system (MAIN-A).
Refer to section 2-2-3 Upgrading NC system
the NC system (MAIN-A)
(MAIN-A) fo r details.
The saved data backed up is restored.

Restore the back up data
Refer to section 1-5-4 Restoring the Saved Data
for details.
No
Parameter
Change?
(1) Add/Change the parameters according to

Version upgrade manual .
(1 ) Add/Change the parameters (2) Back up the parameters according to (T)SRAM
(2) Back up the parameters after ->FLROM of 1-4-2 Backing Up and Restoring
changing the SRAM after adding/changing.
(1) Confirm the version display after the operations

by the version display screen from the menu
Confirm after upgrading DIAGNOS -> VERSION .
(2) Request the confirmation of the machine
operation to the customer after upgrading.
EN D (Notice) Data backed up first will be used only when it

should be necessary to get back to former state by an y
chance because of unexpected phenomenon occurs after
upgrading the NC system.
106
ystem Maintenance Work 2
2-2-3 Upgrading NC system (MAIN-A)

Procedures for upgrading the NC system (MAIN-A) is given below.
Start Explorer from the Windows start menu, and double-click C:\mainte\mainte.exe to open the
maintenance tool.
The operation with the maintenance tool is explained urns ;
as follows. mwm mm
j-: wrnrn START |
r in>
© Selection of device
Select a device in which an upgrading HCJWSTCH URUTS
ic wmm cw START
file is included.
& 1X50.1 SWUX' -
——
* ic WUMB cm
© Execution of NC system upgrade STAR? ]
r.w
Click the [START] button.
[ ] MHHWKij BI,B»F DT
© Confirmation of execution
The following message appears.
.-Always push the emergency stop button when

upgrading with the actual machine.
$ IS IT OK
i R. Mt&r
m
9 OVERWRITE BOOT S'K

_ _
START- 0PDATXS& K-C SYSTEH S»‘¥? :
_
eaBferjÿHscjp st&p buttgn
---
$
—Leave the checkmark for OVERWRITE BOOT SA/V

OK CANCEL r ON .
[OK] Upgrading process is continued. — > Go to @.

[CANCEL] Upgrading process is discontinued.
(4) Exiting the application

When executing the maintenance tool without exiting the NC screen, the NC screen is automatically
exited.
© Designation of installation file

• When IC MEMORY CARD is selected for the device, go to ©.
• When HD is selected for the device, a dialog prompting a folder is displayed. Select a
version-name folder and click OK .
(B y simply selecting a version-name folder, the ncsys\Bootsys.ncs file beneath it is
automatically selected.)
Browse For Folder |? ]fx]

Select the Ver.Folder
c-: D nc backup A-
Ss L_j AJJ3 Selecting a version-name folder

B D B_A8
W C_J B_A8B
8 LJ B_A8T
m LJ B_A8TE
& CJ B_AC
:+; L_J Atsys
nesys v
K Cancel
107
© Copying of installation file
File to be installed is copied under HD's C:\ncbackup.
When C:\ncbackup\(version-name folder) is specified fo r the installation file, this file will not be
copied.
When the folder having the same version name already exists in C:\ncbackup, the folder is
overwritten an d copied.
INSTALLER FILES BACK UP,

(Message during copying)
Now . Setup Files Back Up..
© Execution of installation the specified file
Stop NC operation to execute upgrading with the file in which system software in the NC unit
(MAIN-A) is specified. Then, restart the NC .
SOFTWARE UPDATE
DURING NC SYS TEM RENEWAL ENVIRONMENT

3S* MAKING.
fH
OVERWRITING NC SYSTEM S/U (Upgrading process is displayed.)
SOFTWARE UPDATE
D UR IN G N C SYSTEM RE-ACTIVATION .
r
w
V NC SYSTEM S/W UPDATE IS DONE Vv'ITH SUCCESS.

PLEASE TURN ON THE POWER SUPPLY AGAIN.
OK
When the above message appears, press OK to complete the NC system upgrading process.
108
s
2-2-4 Upgrading PC Side System (MAIN-B)
Procedures for upgrading the NC application (MAIN-B) is given below.
(1) Release the password key lock. ( Refer to the section 1-1-1 Releasing the Key-lock )
Check the Windows task bar in the bottom of the screen, and if there exist an y applicatons in running,
close all of them.
(3) Upgrading procedure with using the maintenance tool

Start Explorer from the Windows start menu, and double-click C:\mainte\mainte.exe to open the
maintenance tool.
The operation with the maintenance tool is explained as follows.
® Selection of device sijiftirf Y

mwm mm -
ipitU?
-
m
Select a device in which an upgrading r j m a e m a a t sorrtttSE
-T,-—
mtmt
file is included. & ic mam cm ? $rm r
r
—
is>
(2) Execution of application upgrade
*S
Click the [START] button. •
. i* ic a m * ? a®
START
r gp
idUttCT srrup TOOL VP&ATS:

« ic mam cu®
r up
TART
J
(3) Confirmation of execution
The following message appears. f C-lt irmTC| KIISTXKiKCEj OACKVP OPTICK EOT
15 IT OK TO START INSTALLATION ?
[Yes] Version upgrading is continued. -* Goto @.
es No [No] Version upgrading is discontinued.
® Exiting the application

When the maintenance tool is executed without exiting the NC screen, the NC screen is automatically
exited.
(D Designation of installation file

• When IC MEMORY CARD is selected for the device, go to ©.
• When HD is selected for the device, a dialog prompting a folder selection is displayed.
Select a version-name folder and click OK .
(By simply selecting a version-name folder, the Atsys\Disk1\Setup.exe file beneath it is
automatically selected.)
rowse For Folder

Select the Ver. Folder
m
ri j nc backup Selecting a version-name folder.
+• LJ AJJ3
+ :_] B_AS
+' _J 6_A8B
+ _J B_A8T
to U B _A8TE
* _J
-
'±
_
i
B.AC
j Atsys
:_ j ricsys
OK ] Cancel ]
109
ystem Maintenance Work §
© Copying of installation file
A file to be installed is copied under HD's C:\ncbackup.
When C:\ncbackup\(version-name folder) is specified for the installation file, this file will not be copied.
When the folder having the same version name already exists in C:\ncbackup, the folder is overwritten
and copied.
warn
(Message when starting to copy)
Now . Installer Fites Back Up . . .
opying—
i (Message during copying)
m
data2.cab
From 'Diskl' ’Diskl'
N* to-
—
; <• ' _ -[ Cancel j
25 Seconds Remaining
(7) Uninstallation of existing system

Uninstallation of an existing system is executed.
Go to ® when initially writing an application or when uninstallation has already been executed.
a
o# Sstfut (Executing uninstallation)
k
[Cancel] Upgrading process is discontinued upon

caa i canceling the uninstallation.
(Completed uninstallation)
p
:v J j
[Finish] -> Goto ®.
110
System Maintenance Work
<D Execution of installation with the specified file

The installer automatically starts an d installation is carried with the specified file.
sssaaBr****’-
to* &**aS$**&«VteMl utsm
Sr'«.y*S>w fcOMCMto iifck ffe*4.
'
S
1
jH&fcSDtb'MMMM
c 31 ...
w~ 3
[Next] Upgrading process is continued.
[Cancel] Upgrading process is discontinued upon
canceling the installation.
(Message during installation)

CV.\M74flÿNÿÿwV5igeftN£L0IJL
|p|T
C; VVV i n do ws\system 3 2\d ri vt; rs \V irtiidldiivai.exe jx) Note: When the alarm shown left appears
immediately before the completion of
MANAGER not exist
installation, click OK .
I 3
(Completed installation)
P
tniUHVhwW Wl.'ÿtrf LTwptHn
tbviniifdtiMfiWumK-ii i ÿ e R t A
FAT tikf FrusSÿj m&.
[Finish] Upgrading process is completed upon

exiting the installer.
f )
111
i
2- 3 Adding/Setting Software Options
2-3-1 Preparing S/W Option

The S/W of MATRIX is officially sold and provided in the Windows file form.
The file is named (N C serial No.).opt .
For example, if this NC's serial No . is M7123456789, the option file is provided under the file
name of M71 23456789. opt.
Copy the option file officially provided onto the US B m em ory or IC card (front) for the
preparation.
(1) When US B memory is used (Recommended)
The option file installed is selected the maintenance tool. So, the option can
stored on an arbitrary folder.
(2) When IC card (front) is used
Store only on e option file (The extension .opt ) to root of IC memory card. (It is not
possible to select the fi le b y the maintenance tool.)
Difference from conventional option

The option was provided by ROM cassette until M640 series. When purchasing an option fo r
the second time or later, only difference information between the previous time and this time is
written in RO M cassette. Therefore, two o r m ore RO M cassettes exist when the S/W option is
purchased additionally. For when NC unit is the ROM
cassettes must be installed in order.
In MATRIX, the option is supplied by file (fixed file name is given for each NC serial No.). So,
even if the options are purchased two or more times, all option data reflected fo r past
purchase history is written to the latest option file. The differences of option handling between
the conventional model and MATRIX are described below.
640 series MATRIX series
Type ption ROM cassette Option file (Windwos file)

Media edicated ROM cassette US B memory, IC card, etc.
Option data Data of difference from last The always latest option data
time
Keeping after All option ROM cassettes are The latest option file is saved in the
option is installed attached to the machine. following of NC's FID. (automatic
saving with maintenance tool)
C:\mainte\(NC serial No ).opt
112
i
2-3-2 Adding/Setting Software Options
The S/W option addition and setup methods are explained as an example of using the US B
memory use.
(1) Set the US B memory stored option file to NC unit.
(2) Start Explorer from the Windows start menu, and double-click C:\mainte\mainte.exe to
open the maintenance tool.
(3) (Only when S/W option is added) S«J'*i.‘niMANa ickns 51

xutnteuHcc
Select MAINTENANCE mepu, . JK BACKUP
? : W” m r i F T
and click [>] button.
rm
O5KTK0I, WIT
FCW-WSlSKW “Sail.IT
BC SttUU wi-
~ 5j
*
itc aemur
xniuttTH ®123«S«?85
The current NC's option contents OFTIOK PAT A OFTIO * BATA
are written to
C:\mainte\(NC serial No.).opt
. m mm is m I
a mtvim ptat% eoifraji wit ww' iitrer j
by this operation. NC SSSIS.U MSOT j
Normally, the file is automatically :

created when the option is set
m KFOATE OFT I OK |
last time as described later.
When the option is set fo r the first time, this operation is not required because there is no
option data in NC .
(4) Select the OPTION menu, and pOtS _ li®

err i os
display the Select a Option
; SOTUiC
Files- & .t.o nmm w soresto
screen.
(5) Select the [HD] of SETTING

menu. \
Select [1C MEMORY CARD]

when option file is prepared
in front 1C card. [ «AliifENAKOE| DACRt#
UPDATE OFT I OK EXIT
(6) Click the SETTING button.
113
A dialog prompting an option file selection is displayed. Specify drive/path/option file name.
(When the 1C memory card is selected, this dialog is not displayed.)
Sitfcil .1 Optkw Hlrs |
3 fee}; US*
Cjtxea
SfyBixxs* 13ft
i3
'
;
: • -U
0
M? &$<*#**& 5
3B
m FfcgiSSa? f mSem —
Ftes r_w~
Specify a file and click the Open button. The specified file is copied to C:\mainte\, and the
contents of option file is ready to be set in the NC unit.
When the option file having the same file name as that of the specified file already exists in
C:\mainte\, confirmation message for overwriting appears.
[Yes] The file is overwritten and option setting is started.

Note that the extension of the original file must be
V MA Y I OVERWRITE ? changed from opt to opt.old when saving.
HIIIE:::)] No
[No] The file is not overwritten and option setting is
discontinued.
Note that when specifying the option file in C:\mainte\, option is set to the NC unit by the file
specified without copying.
Option setting is completed when the display of the SETTING button in the option setting
screen turns to normal from the grayed state.
Alarm message appears in the following cases, and the option setting is discontinued.
When C:\mainte\(NC serial No.). opt is a file with a different serial No.
from that of NC . B’-. y -Q
2 or more option files exist in C:\mainteV
OPTION ERROR
2 or more option files are created by copying the specified file
in to C:\mainteV
(*) In other word, the number of option files (file having the extension
name of .opt ) in C:\mainte\ has to be only one and its file name has
to have the same serial No. as that of NC unit.
(7) Th e maintenance tool is ended.

(8) Confirm the option effective setting has been updated on the option screen after
turning NC power supply ON again.
114
i
2-3-3 Attention for adding S/W option
The state of option setting is changed from « A » to «B» by adding an option. The following
indicates the transition of the option setting.
Before setting the option addition

NC
Option « A »
HD
C:\mainte
L (NC serial No.).op t . - -Option « A »
After setting the option addition

NC
Option «B»
HD
Renamed
USB memory
and seved
(NC serial No.) .opt C:\mainte
Option « B »
t;(N C serial No.). op t
NC serial No.). opt.old
Option «B»
Option « A »
The latest option file is saved on HD as (N C serial No.). opt , and the second last option file is
saved as (NC serial No ). op t old .
When the option setting is different from the customer intended state by a wrong
purchase/order etc. of the option, return to the state of option «A» according to the following
procedures, and confirm the option arrangement again.
Method of return to the previous option state

Rename the option file under C:\mainte on Explorer:
(NC serial No ). op t —>(NC serial No.). ne w
(NC serial No.).opt.old->(NC serial No ). op t
Install the option file C:\mainte\(NC serial No.). opt from maintenance tool again.
115
2- Servicing with the Maintenance Tool
(1) Start up Explorer from Start menu (right click), and then start the maintenance tool
(C:\mainte\mainte.exe). Select M AINTENANCE menu to open the MAINTENANCE
screen. The NC model, serial No. and control unit type can be input on the screen.
Refer to the Maintenance Tools Instruction Manual (BNP-B3934-902) fo r details.
3 MAINTENANCE TOOLS §8 ®
MAINTENANCE
' NC
“(C) (a) BACKUP ---
NC MODEL NC MODEL
;
FCA750PY-N02 _il FCA750PY-N02
CONTROL UNIT TYPE CONTROL UNIT TYPE
FCU7-MA513-22 FCU7-MA513-22
j
NC SERIAL# (b)DEL. >j NC SERIAL#
M7001234567 M7123456789
OPTION DATA OPTION DATA
(d) N C M OD EL INPUT
A p r o d u c t i o n number
note to a s e r v i c e p a r t (e) CONTROL UNIT TYPE INPUT
(g) NC SERIAL# INPUT
S/W UPDATE MAINTENANCE BACKUP PTION EXIT
The correspondence of each button is explained in the following section. (This is not
related to the work procedures.)
(a) Backing up from FLROM to HD
The NC model, serial No. control unit type and option

data registered in FLROM are written to HD,
ARE YOU SURE TO SAVE DATA TO BACKUP FILE ? C:\mainte\mnt_bkup.dat • • • Maintenance data
C:\mainte\(NC serial No.J.opt • • -Option data
Yes No
(b) Deleting backup files
The HD backup files (C:\mainte\mnt_bkup.dat) are

deleted.
V ? AR E YOU SURE TO DELETE BACKUP FILE ?
Yes No
(c) Writing from HD to FLROM
The NC model, serial No., control unit type and option

data ( \mainte\(serial No.). opt) saved in the HD backup
1J AitF YOU Sf SlF TO RFSsOiif DATA ftACfrt P FIiF > file (C:\mainte\mnt_bkup.dat) ar e registered in the
Nr
FLROM
Yes f4o
ORD _|si A password is required to return the product information

to the NC.Only Mitsubishi personnel can carry ou t this
procedure
-r
K CA1ICEL | CLEAR
116
(d) N C m o de l input
ca n be selected
J The NC model
or ca n be directly input.
from the combo bo x
After inputting the NC model, click on the O K” button.

The NC model in the backup file
r •3 (C:\mainte\mnt_bkup.dat) will be updated, and the NC
MODEL in the display window of the MAINTENANCE
screen will be updated simultaneously.
OK ] CANCEL | CLEAR Press CANCEL to cancel input of the NC model,
and press CLEAR to clear the items input in the
combo box.
(e) Control unit type input
The control unit type ca n be selected from the combo

box or ca n be directly input. After inputting the control
unit type, press on the O K button. The control unit
type in the BACKUP display window of the
MAINTENANCE screen will be updated.
OK 1 CANCEL j CLEAR
(f) NC serial No . input
NC SERIAL* Input nine characters after M7 .

After inputting the serial No., click on the O K button.
The input will be checked. In the input check, the No.
i of input characters and the validity of the characters will
M?r be checked.
If input check is okay, the NC SERIAL # in the
BACKUP display window of the MAINTENANCE screen
OK CANCEL CLEAR will change.
The backed up options will be cleared when the serial
No. is changed. Note that the options will be cleared
when the password is input and the NC data is written
in.
g) Writing to HD FLROM of service part unit
The NC model, serial No . control unit type and option

data written in the HD backup file
A&F YOU to aesto&e DATA FROM fc&oar n F > (C:\mainte\mnt_bkup.dat) are written to FLROM of the
service part.
Vet Mu The service part is a special unit whose “serial No.” is
M700’ (Two characters following M7 are 0.
Arbitrary characters since the third character.)
The function is same as C, but the password input is
not required when writing in the service part.
117
118
~r
System Maintenance Work 2
2-5 Inputting and Outputting Ladders

The ladders stored in the NC's FLROM ca n be output to the external media by ladder monitor.
Conversely, the ladders stored on the external media can be input to the NC's FLROM/SRAM.
Starting the ladder monitor

The ladder monitor is starded in 1 131mode
*/3
EUlsiilP®-- * 'SO«S/i«/*o
. W so* ]i a Orpe rVV'A 0 . OOSn/ttir*
DIACWOS VERSION IftGNOS OPTION SERVO SPINDLE JIPADtJALE| LADDER VERSION
M ONITOR MONITOR M ONITOR MONITOR § MONITOR
Tw o ladders exist because the ladders are operated by two CPUs in NC unit.
The ladder input/output must execute both COS1 and COS2.
2-5-1 Saving to External Media

The procedure is shown below:
© Open the ladder which runs in NC on onboard edition area.
© Save the opened ladder in external media.
NC HN123card External
(Vertual:COS2 side) ©
7?
NC HN482card NC HN163card Projectÿ/\ÿ — Project
(SRAM/FROM) (Real:COS1 side) Save / Open
V*4 .
PC
ROM area A-* side
/
re a for / ROM wrile Save
COS1
Temporary
Onboard
storage
Area for edition area
Copy when area
COS2 Open
the power is
I \
N
n—<= T
Execute ladder Edit/Monitor
(a) Click ENVIRON. SETTING -ÿ CONNECT NC Setting to select t he la dd er of

COS1 side.
I Ull
£
r~
1 ill r iLC ‘Vlf u©
(b) Select M01 from the list, and press SET . (The selected environment is displayed
on the the lower right of the screen. M 01 is displayed in case of the COS1 side. M0 2
is displayed in case of the COS2 side.)
119
CONNECT Hfr SETTING . x
OTjilJeiMiirsa
SE T
Warning:
When connection destination WC is changed, the
PL C on onboard is ost.
i
i i
aT' SST :
(c ) Return to the following screen pressing F1 key , and click NC FILE .

i I M
SC OTOM/L Df/IKH.
ill nir rut •\ Wuswi. JITHhC
(tlP :
(d) Click ‘• OPEN .

i i t$i
ik Sflfc VUUFY WJ1E

*C
ten it I riawi 5§OP BSS?
(e) Click OPEN -> OK .

X
-
373»j>: 1 1S 5101 ? 05/10/20 20:50:20 130 532Bvt«
» tt er
PLC/»«tw*rk 05/10/20 20:50:20 3 3 & Bv t
SEL. ALL SELECT

PEN PARAM.
/CANCEL + PFDC.
(0 Return to the following screen pressing F1 key twice, and click EXTERNAL FILE .
I »i
U rs£c c-sr ulABWs. If IF

L
(M3 i
(g) Click SAVE PROJECT

I | M)1
r
*35£. j r fixicT s
(h) Click E XT ERNAL SAVE .
120
SAVE- PROJECT a
a
-J g] PROCRAM
-0 373HXI19 051017
'.r: {*3 Parameter
0 parent
SELECT
EXTERNAL SEL. ALL
AVE PARAM.
/CANCEL
i PROC.
(i) Set DRIVE , Path and Project name . Click SAVE .

XTERNAL SAVE - 0
RIVE
ffra j
LIST
F i l e name PLC ty pel Dale of creating | Heading
m.. Oi rectory
Drive/Polh _ [D'Vtenp
l«d_O5O0O5|
Title
SAVE CANCEL
(j) When the following dialog is displayed, the saving is completed. Click OK .
CospIctecJ.
m
, -l‘ v
;sv>
m& m
(k) Return to the following screen pressing ”F1 key twice.

i | toll
I
ur fill
;
XttF. CiTX flWOi. | i ta r eve
j.
(I) Click ENVIRON. SETTING . (This work is not necessary when there is no COS2
side. Jump to and end the ladder monitor.
t I Oil
i uu ? “itr CtR C«ICt ; tiV*. C* */XG.

LUGKX.
ar
“
(m ) Select M01 from the list, and press SET on CONNECT NC SETTING .
121
CONNECT NC SETTING , - '
IS m SE T
Warning:
When connection destination NC is changed, the
PL C data on onboard is lost.
(n) Operate (c) to (k), and save the COS2 side ladder.
(o) End the ladder monitor clicking END .

i I til
t
u JU tWR iCYICC ?}MA. ClJJJQSGS.
SOW | JCU1 DC
2-5-2 Loading from External Media

The procedure is shown below:
© Clear the ladder which runs in temporary storage area.
m ed ia o n the onboard edition area.
(2) Open the project saved in external
© Load the opened ladder to the temporary storage area in NC .
@ Save the ladder in ROM area.
if the steps of (2) and © are executed without deleting the ladder of step © when the project
name between the ladder executed in the temporary storage area and the ladder saved in the
external media differ, two are registered (multi-ladder specification).
NC HN123card External
(Vertual : COS2 side) media ©
Project /x Project
NC HN482card NC HN163card
(SRAM/FROM) (Real :COS1 side) SaveZ r Open
© 0
Erase ladder
©
RO M area side
Area for ROM write Save
COST
J Temporary
storage
Area for edition area
Copy when
area
COS2 Open
the power
is ON
Execute Edit/Monitor
(a) Click ENVIRON. SETTING CONNECT NC SETTING to select the ladder of

COS1 side
i I tfil
'I
m (
il<
'siV-JW-
* ME
JitiK tevicr nr-jn.
j SISS I iCLP LUi
122
(b) Select M01 from the list, and press SET . (The selected environment is displayed
on the the lower right of the screen. M0 1 is displayed in case of the COS1 side. M0 2
is displayed in case of the COS2 side.)
CONNECT NC SETTING x
SI
i SE T
Warning:
PL C data on onboard is lost.
arjp CT i
i
'
(c) Return to the following screen pressing ”F 1 key , and click NC FILE .
i | Ml
U. C DCDHiU. Wirot. i
;
*1P W)
rju: rite
i
2T11HC \
(d) Click ,,DELETEM.

t i Mi
i
Cftt AYt vtwrr ICXTE fcrawT
i
(e) Click SEL. ALL/CANCEL , and all data is selected.

X
-
£/\ 373»lX l 13 05101? 05/10/20 ?0:50‘20 130S$?0yt«
•' Pirsroete/
PLC/M«two/h 03/10/20 2 0.5 0: 20 3360vtc
$CLECT
ELETE f sa. AIL
| /cwa
(0 Click DELETE .
i Wl
I~I
&Sf S&
I
—
(g) Click YES on DELETE CONFIRMATION screen.
123
3
It» aÿcil iwJ I He i® deleted.
Is ii all riiM1?
El SO
(h) If the ladder is “RUN state, STOP is urged. Click YES”.
FtC »* »ri s ftlW s t i l e ,
E
J* &Ieiipn «>rfc»r®ed ifl*r »lgp Pt,C? f
NO
(i) When the following dialog is displayed, the deleting is completed. Click O K .
.
—
ftSMsttid »
,-E P|
, CcfttpJeletJ.
-V»
ft,;
(j) Return to the following screen pressing key twice, and click EXTERNAL FILE .
rant uivu‘ w text I | Ml
I
lit
j.
c
rSLT B7a*
1
SB ® j IM?
(k) Click OPEN PROJECT .

*3 iaitr I I tail
rgg. i
n&< j | ffi
(I) Set DRIVE and File name , and click SELECT1.

:$aECI; PROJECT? 0
DRIVE
iilsjsff, I PLC typeFPate of c i ea tins [Head i nr

E&.. Di rectory
B:
Dr i ve/Pftt h jD: Vlcmp i

Project moie [ij>d_05030fi |
i
SELECT CANCEL
(m ) Click OPEN .
124
PE N PROJECT :
m
• a Iÿ.CS0805.,:| rKUUHAM
Q 373HX1 13 051017
Parameter
£2 param
SaECT
PEH SEL. ALL SELECT
PARAH.
/CANCEL PROJECT
PROG.
(n) When a message that prompts you to comfirm overwriting is displayed, click A LL
YES .
UP-- •- X
The program (373MX119.«P?) already exists.

Are you sure OK to overwrite?
YES A LL Y ES NO
(o) When the following dialog is displayed, the loading is completed. Click OK”.
HE.Mwrij -
Cc«»lete«3.
a
i
sail
(p) Return to the following screen pressing F1 key twice, and click NC FILE”.
ÿ • • • n ' t. ;.5U5.'; H.I* i i »>i
il>
rue
:
S I
:
HflH i
(q) Click ’'SAVE”

4 t | eat)
ft't SAVE VERIFY

JSk tGLU FCfirUT
(r) Click SAVE .
125
x]
j= -FREE SPACE VOLLWE •
“a PROGRAM LARGEST CONTIGUOUS
3 [arÿ
..£2 373WX \ 19
Par a n s t t r
051017
r BYTE
am
TOTAL FREE SPACE
r BYTE
FREE
SPACE
YOLUUE
SELECT
AVE
SEL. ALL
PARAM.
/CANCEL + PROG.
(s) When the following dialog is displayed, the loading is completed. Click OK .
;X
Collet c4;
(1) Return to the following screen pressing F1 key , an d click ROM WRITE .
esni; j.ifi'.-fr. TO zrp I |
; :
ra l iCLZK eran i WSl'.*’
(u) Click YES .

PW wire • -• X
• TStflPiAflV »H3KY
d.lt or CfCAHIC
1J
I'-Alt t> CREA1 1»;
IV) >co tr It* it In RGB?
(v) When a message that prompts you to comfirm overwriting ROM is displayed, click
A LL YES .
wsm
AM data in the lar get *i 11 be deleted,
Ihe program rersory dale oil I bs written into ISe target.
Do you lly *on( to execute?

ES NO
(w ) When the following dialog is displayed, the ROM writing is completed. Click OK .
126
ry .
C«*ol«leiJ.
a
$
'
llilll
rÿ
(x) Click PL C RUN/STOP,,.
¥ i «i
roi SAVE
If VIR1FY wire
M
GITC rcfÿi
-&> | gg |
(y) Click YES

xl
TATUS [SlS
Is PLC started?
m NO
(2) Return to the following screen pressing F1 key once.

| SO I
? i
nr Ltfotn tcvict «wi. KlAGfCi.
« j tar
i
(aa) Click ENVIRON. SETTING . (This work is not necessary when there is no COS2
side. Jump to (dd), and e nd t he ladder monitor.)
i I ai l
ILE
«;
fits. /iCtT*
JL
soviet rlf-JU. ?|ACME.
fii • nr M)
(bb) Select MOT' from the list, and press SET on CONNECT NC SETTING .
CONNECT
'TTTT'f
NO SETTING
Tj
- f
\* X
iasa«g«8afflHI SET
Wa rn i ng :
PLC data on onboard is lost.
(cc) Operate (c) to (z). and save the COS2 side ladder.
(dd) End the ladder monitor clicking END .

1 I dt
ILL } “Sr iCCP i :evKt iff}*. C- IfirtZ.

SI'S j -w Dfl
127
2-6 Replacing the HD
2-6-1 Replacing the HD

Preparation
• HDD unit for replacement (Installed NC system (MAIN-B) of the same version as customer)
When MAIN-B has not been installed in the HDD unit, prepare NC system for upgrading
by the US B memory etc.
• US B memory for data backup
The replacement procedure of HD is shown below.

Note: This method assumes that the NC is running properly. If Windows does not start, this
method cannot be used.
START
Back up the customer’s current data.

Backup of the saved data Back up all data according to 1-5 Backing Up the
Saved Data. .
ackup of HD D
4 internal data
Backup the HDD internal data.
Refer to section 2-6-2 Backup data of HD for details.
The HDD unit is removed, and it is replaced by a

Replacement of HDD unit new HDD unit.
At this time, replace a front cover of a new HDD
unit to a front cover of former HDD unit (The name
plate a nd t he seal are affixed).
V
Upgrading of NC application When MAIN-B has not been installed to replaced
HDD or when the version should be upgraded to
the latest version, install prepared MAIN-B
according to 2-2-4 Upgrading PC Side System
\7 (MAIN-B) .
Erase the all program area on PROGRAM FILE
All erase in program area
screen. Refer to section 1-8-2 Initializing the
Programs for details.
Restore the backed up data by following steps.

Restoration of backup data
(T) Restore the backed up data to HDD according
to 2-6-3 Restoring the Backed up Data”.
© Restore the all saved data according to 1-5-4
Restoring the Data .
V
Back up the NC side data to new HDD.
Data backup to HDD
Refer to section 2-6-4 Backing up the NC Side
Data to HD fo r details.
EN D
128
sv *
2-6-2 Backup data of HD
Copy the specific files in HD to an external memory of the US B memory etc. by the Explorer.
_ ...
List of data backed up (If the folder/file do not exist, the backup is unnecessary.)
Data details Folder (file) name

1 Machining programs C:\MC_Machine Programs
operation
3 antry programs_ C:\MC GL Data
4 Machining programs for backup C:\MC Backup
5 Sampling data, tool data related C:\MC dg
Operation control screen data C:\RUMMNG
7 Display data for NC screen C:\nm64mdata
alarm navigation _
10 3D interference check- Real C:\MC_Machine Database
simulator-3D data for setup
11 Real simulator INIFILE C:\m6y_ymw\M7401Bin\Release\realsim.ini
__
2NC system software C:\ncbackup
13 J2-CT parameters C:\j2ctbus\Axisinfu.dat
C:\j2ctbusV“*.prm
4 Maintenance data C:\mainte\mnt_bkup.dat_
5 Option data C:\mainte\(NC serial No.).op t
C:\mainte\(NC serial No.).opt. old
16 SRAM backup C:\mainte\srambkf.dat
7 LC internal memory backup :\mainte\plcbkf11.dat (other than NEXUS)
C:\mainte\plcbkf01.dat (NEXUS)
Note: For applications installed after shipment and the network settings made after shipment,
check with Yamazaki and backup if necessary.
129
HI
2-6-3 Restoring the Backed up Data
The backed up data according to Backup of HDD internal data is restored to replaced HD.
List of data restord

(If thefolders/files listed in the table below do not exist at backup, it is unnecessary to restore.)
Items marked with
• under [Resore] in the table below are restored.
It is unnecessary for the items with O to restore, because these items are directly restored from
NC internal data by the maintenance tool in the next step.
Data details estore Folder (file) name

Machining programs C:\MC_Machine Programs
operation _
Gantry programs C:\MC GL Data
Machining programs for backup C:\MC_Backup
5 Sampling data, tool data related C:\MC_sdg
6 Operation control screen data C:\RUMMNG
7 Display data for NC screen C:\nm64mdata
alarm navigation _
10 3D interference check- Real C:\MC_Machine Database
simulator-3D data for setup
11 Real INIFILE C:\m6y ymw\M740\Bin\Release\realsim.ini
2 NC system software C:\ncbackup
13 J2-CT parameters C:\j2ctbus\Axisinfu.dat
C:\j2ctbus\***.prm
4 Maintenance data O C:\rnainte\mnt bkup.dat
5 Option data O C:\mainte\(NC serial No.). opt
SRAM backup C:\mainte\(NC serial No.).opt.old
6 PL C internal memory backup O C:\mainte\srambkf.dat
7 Machining programs O C:\mainte\plcbkf11.dat (Other than NEXUS)
C:\mainte\plcbkf01.dat (NEXUS)_
Note: Fo r applications installed after shipment and the network settings made after shipment,
check with Yamazaki and reset if necessary.
130
2-6-4 Backing up the NC Side Data to HD
The data of the item with O in the previous page is restored by backing up to HD in which NC
side data has been exchanged.
(1) SRAM data and PLC internal memory backup

Start Explorer from the Windows start menu, and double-click C:\mainte\mainte.exe to open
the maintenance tool.
Select the BACKUP screen on MAINTENANCE TOOLS .
t
'.‘;l
• S A CK ® ?
i
FLASH KOX
JJ
ECT-DATA IxO
_ id C do t
l
-V BACKUP
a PTIOK
L EXIT
Click the [>] button on the lower right.

Backup the some all SRAM data (2MB) in NC and PLC internal memory area to HDD.
Refer to the ® of 1 -4-2 Backing Up and Restoring the SRAM for detail.
(2) FLROM maintenance data (the NC model, serial No. and option, etc.) backup
Select MAINTENANCE screen on MAINTENANCE TOOLS .
/
m KAIUTTJJAiiCE
r-
KC MODEL
LXA7SI1P - m?
COKTKDJ. TJK t T TYPE
/<i n PY-mi;1
a.-irrsoi. mi JT TYPE
LUIIV-KASI KCU7-MA .
KC CiERI AL* f:i A; VC SERIAL*
X7001234S6?
/
f1
K? 123*56783
OPTIOK DATA OPTlOIf DATA
/
i
A production bJt KC KODKI. ttrpltr
note to o service ijJoxt ITCOKTHOL IJIflT

1
TTKK IKKITT
/ V
KC IHrUT
I
\
>
C.-» UPDATE 3 n,M;rTE)iA;Ki|| SJOSIP CTIOK EXIT
\
Click the [> ] button on the upper right.
The NC model, serial No. and option data registered in FLROM are backed up to HD.
The Names of backup files are fixed as C:\mainte\mnt_bkup.dat and (NC serial
No).opt .
Refer to the (a) of ”2-4 Servicing with the Maintenance Tool for details.
131
2-7 Replacing Control Unit
2-7-1 Replacing Control Unit

Preparation
• HDD unit for replacement (Installed NC system (MAIN-B) of the same version as customer)
When MAIN-B has not been installed in the HDD unit, prepare NC system for upgrading
by the USB memory etc.
• US B memory for data backup
The replacement procedure of NC unit is shown below.
CÿSTARTÿ)
Backup of the saved data Back up the customer's current data

Back up all data according to 1-5 Backing Up the
Saved Data .
Backup the NC unit internal data.

Backup of the NC unit internal data The target data is the following data.
(D All SRAM data and internal PL C data
@ Th e maintenance data in FLROM (including the
options)
® The ladders in FLROM
Refer to section 2-7-2 Backing up the NC Unit
Internal Da1a for details.
V The control unit is removed, and it is replaced by a new
Replacement the control unit control unit.
At this time, replace a front cover of a new control unit
to a front cover of former control unit (The name plate is
affixed).
r Clearing of SRAM area Clear the data in the SRAM mounted in the
replaced control unit's HR482. Refer to section 1-2
<0 Completely Erasing Memory for details.
Install the NC system software to NC unit's

Installation of NC system
FLROM. Refer to section 2-2-3 Upgrading NC
system (MAIN A) for details.
Restore the backed up data by following steps.

Restoration of backup data
(D Restore the backed up data according to 2-7-3
Loading the Backup Data .
® Restore the all saved data according to 1-5-4

Restoring the Saved Data .
Calender setting Set the date and time.

Refer to section 1-7-1 Setting the Date and Time
A for details.
Data backup for emergency Back up a part of the SRAM data like the parameter
etc. to FLROM in preparation for various data
areas' breaking down. Refer to section 2-7-4
Backing Up Data for Emergency Purposes for
EN D
deÿis.
132
2-7-2 Backing up the NC Unit Internal Data
The following NC unit internal data is backed up.
© Al l SRAM data and internal PLC data

The maintenance data in FLROM (Including the options)
The ladders in FLROM

r
(1) SRAM data and PLC internal memory backup

Start Explorer from the Windows start menu, and double-click C:\mainte\mainte.exe to open
th e maintenance tool.
Select the BACKUP screen on MAINTENANCE TOOLS .
/
iUEfnH«K£;rqG6.s
-BACXOF
D
FLASK ROX
IZLii /
/
SBAX
EXT-I'ATÿI-0
_LJ CD C :s
/t c' 51-mLOc t
*
/
/
/
ft'iTE Mill lAHCEj j DACJOIP J|| OfTICH j EXIT

Backup the some all SRAM data (2MB) in NC and PLC internal memory area to FIDD.
Refer to (3) of 1-4-2 Backing Up an d Restoring the SRAM for detail.
(2) FLROM maintenance data (the NC model, serial No . and option, etc.) backup
Select MAINTENANCE screen on MAINTENANCE TOOLS”.
/
mm m H
AIHTEHMCZ:
JtC
i BACK'D?
C KODEi
/ HC MODEL
COXT KOI
Y-KD2
TYPfii /TQ J--Y- im 2
COlfTKOL 1131 IT TYPE
PCIIT-XAM:*-?? / k) KD7-HA 513-3?
KC SERIAL/
X/001234567
/
I
i-
f
)rt: SERIAL/
H7123A5i785
OPTICS DATA OPT I OH DATA
A product icA KC XOOKL ItiPbT j

crv :co
&ote to a ort
l COKTROI. UK I T TVPK l jrpirr |
/ \
/
1
i
S-V irTOXTEj
mi;iTEMiMCz|| ,.;l ... ornoir EXIT
Click the [>] button on the upper right.

The NC model, serial No. an d option data registered in FLROM are backed up to HD .
The Names of backup files are fixed as C:\mainte\mnt_bkup.dat and (NC serial
No).opt .
Refer to the (a) of 2-4 Servicing with the Maintenance Tool for details.
133
(3) FLROM ladder backup

Backup the ladders on LADDER MONITOR screen of NC.
Refer to the section 2-5-1 Saving to External Media of 2-5 Inputting and Outputting
Ladders for details.
Tw o ladders exist because the ladders are operated by two CPUs in NC unit.
The ladder must backup both COS1 and COS2.
(Example)
Th e step (i) of the drive, path and project name settings are as follows:
Drive/path C:\mainte\ladder
Project name COS1 side— >cos1
COS2 side— >cos2
134
2-7-3 Loading the Backup Data
The following backed up data is loaded to NC unit.
® All RAM data and PL C internal data

(D The maintenance data in FLROM (including the options)
(3 ) The ladders in FLROM
(1) Loading SRAM data

Stard the maintenance tool, and select the BACKUP screen.
J
i05 ST)
m
BACiCUP
FU5K J»X
sax
DCT-DA Ti/l/Q
:\JW
/
e*v5TWLb>:( .dot
ijax
1
/
'K UPDATE JjlAjfrTfflANCEj ACKUP |( OPTION j EXIT
Click the [<] button on the lower left.

C:\mainte\srambkf.dat and C:\mainte\plcbkf11.dat (or plcbkf01.dat ) in FIDD are loaded to
SRAM in NC unit.
(2 ) Loding FLROM maintenance data (the NC model, serial No. and option, etc.)
Select MAINTENANCE screen on MAINTENANCE TOOLS .
/
fU S I
jJAIlITtKAJICE
KC i SAC y.vp
KC MODEL
KCA7SUE - KUJ
COKTROS. UKtT TYPE
KU'/'K AS 13*-??
/ÿ •
KC MCC'EX.
ECA75U PY-KUL’
cojrrKOL trsix TYPE
F(,U7-«A5N-7?
KC SERIA1* KC SERIAL*
H712345(B7B9
CTTIOK DATA / OPT DOM DATA
A pr<oduct ion r.uric-sr KC MODE . IKFi;r

cote t o • » serv 1C«* JW l \ COIfTROJ. i n u r TYPE IK PUT J
>-
’
. .isEgr ,’Z j
/
/ \
'V UPDATE
*
j XAIIlTGUilCrjj OiCSXIl\ I OPTIOK EXIT
Click the [<] button on the upper left.

C:\mainte\mnt_bkup.dat in FIDD is loaded to FLROM in NC unit.
Refer to the (b) of 2-4 Servicing with the Maintenance Tool for details.
135
(3) Loading FLROM ladder
Load the ladders on LADDER MONITOR screen of NC.

Refer to the section 2-5-2 Loading from External Media” of 2- 5 Inputting and Outputting
Ladders for details.
In the step (i) of the drive, path and project name settings, select the drive, path and
project name set in (3) of 2-7-2 Backing up the NC Unit Internal Data , and load both
COS1/COS2 ladders.
136
2-7-4 Backing Up Data for Emergency Purposes
Backup the parameters, etc., into the FLROM for emergency purposes.
Stard the maintenance tool, and select the BACKUP screen.

L
.
1
Btcxvp
1
FUSS BOX
;
4
J?AH / /
XT- DAfl 2x0
_lj_Lf c: .dot
/
OPI'ATE LsÿINTfcUMCI BACKUP OPT It'S | EXIT
/
Backup the some SRAM data in NC to FLROM in NC .
137
ppendix 3
3 Appendix
3-1 Using th e DIAGNOSIS Screen
3-1 -1 DIAGNOSIS (ALARM Screen)

This is diagnosis screen. Detailed information is given for up to 16 current alarms.
3-1-2 VERSION Screen

The system software, spindle version, servo version, system model name and serial No. are
displayed.
S3
; unta I sam mamnj um i txmtm j jtatnaar. m n i t a 1
»I* rC07-MA&13-Xl iJliJUM. M7i73*567B9 HGOti. »-CA7 5 0 ( * Y ' K 0 l

'
r»i VOttJ nta MprpR HMTOJTR
WUX-JI lOOIVlTOO- B ÿ Mt l BUY ’J J ) i ) JTCS-l
MXIJt-B 1DOJW001-A*V« fiRV-f < ) < ) J2tT-2
loOJDDU-fcXVfi PRY-iil < ) .liCT-3
1-XDUtU-r t001U3T3’HX119 BHV
3, ) < ) ,7?£»~4
LMiDtn-U IOOIB373-HXL15 SRV < ). < ) JZC3-S
ix;y s«-x? ) < > .ItCT-C
ear-jr?
< ) atcr-i
BRY-C? ) < ) CZCT-B
BRV-W )
< ) JTct-y
8RY-10 < ) < ) J?Ct-10
BRY-H ) < } JZCT-11
flnv-12 > < ) Jtcr-ii
H*V- 13 ) i > JtCT-13
»Mt lfl ) ( ) .J2CT1*
»»V- J5 > < >
BRV-J6 ( ) < )
BPM-1 ) < )
< ) < >

8f»»-3 < ) 1 )
STM-4 < ) < )
Hy p -1 < ) i )
B PM -6 i >4 1
iim-i < ) 4 )
nrp-o 4 ) < )
SI IS1* TP * U yoos/io/n u. 0 0 : 3 4
TTL& V- M O. OPIn/adi
r JÿCKOC TL'RJ JCJM P I AC NO 3 OPTION RT:»TO SPJMIMJT. liAsJ.DMajti:

MJTMl HdHlTPIl HUM ITO* WOHUOY. WOM IT OR
No. Display item Details

1 UNIT Control unit type
2 SERIAL Serial No.
3 MODEL NC model
4 MAIN-A NC software version
5 MAIN-B Screen software version
LG- Currently selected language version
LADDER-F Ladder (COS1 side) version
8 LADDER-B Ladder (COS2 side)ÿyersion
9 LG P Currently selected PLC language version
0 SRV-1 to 16 Servo unit software version
1 SPN-1 to 8 Spindle unit software version
12 J2CT-1 to 14 J2CT unit software version
138
ppendix 3
3-1-3 HARDWARE MONITOR Screen

The hardware mounted on the control unit and board is displayed.
M I W ; antrm - gtw mmjrm- t w i w j wn* »*r»»x ion rt» •
IW 1 1 VLC | t W* 1
1 **1 54 n <l.03) tfUlBi K
tra 1S4
*
( *»* | 11C- } et»n« i
x*n»3| IRIO ?i i*i« >| l i n t ii (DID ij IBH> ti )iw tf B|

X
7
3 kxlA3 Bifrtd
[ETHER] is displayed when

031-Bit4 is ON .
Display item Details

CNC HN163 The CNC card name and sub-version are displayed.
N123 The C NC card name and sub-version are displayed.
PLC The PLC card name and sub-version are displayed.
MEM HN482 The SRAM/FROM card name and sub-version are displayed.
EXT HN531 The axis extension card name and sub-version are displayed.
IC US B HN251 The front IC card/USB l/F card name and sub-version are
displayed.
THER Only the item is displayed when there is an Ethernet option.
RIO RIO 1 RIO 2 RIO 3 4 RIO RI O 6 RIO 7 RIO 8
1
2
HN203 HN203
4
5
6 I
The IC card name used each part system or channel is

displayed.
139
ppendix 3
3-1 -4 SERVO MONITOR Screen

The servo monitor is configured of the following five screens. The status of the servo is
displayed on each screen.
- SERVO MONITOR screen (Servo monitor) 1/2

SERVO MONITOR screen (Servo monitor) 2/2
• ABSOLUTE MONITOR screen (Absolute value monitor)
• SERVO DIAGNOSIS screen (Servo diagnosis)
• SERVO STATUS screen (Servo status)
The screens can be changed in the following order with the page feed keys.
SERVO MONITOR screen 1/2

I NEXT key T BACK key
SERVO MONITOR screen 2/2
l NEXT key T BACK key
ABSOLUTE MONITOR screen
i NEXT key t BACK key
SERVO DIAGNOSIS screen
I NEXT key t BACK key
SERVO STATUS screen
Note: The SPINDLE STATUS screen is displayed only while releasing th e key lock.
140
(1) SERVO MONITOR (Servo monitor)
The servo status is displayed on this screen.
fir • frrio w
W B i * 1 wasurtii w t n * »n « Soxsv ywtnsrm i vcmi mtMj B»

SKJIVO w o w r r c u u / ? )
li] iX) m |A| 1C)
M* M/m) 0 <> * 0 0
(>UOOP (1J 0 o c 9 0
SPUKD 0 9 0 0
FTID XJVT £ ( « « / ÿ in) e a <»
nrjiRTHT O) 0 0 9 0
MAX CUM «*> 0 o c D 0
WAX n i R 2 0 0 9
MAX Olh3 0 9 o 0 «
0VTR LOW <AI 9 e o o
OYilH b£C i *) 9 0 0 9
OPT. rover. <*> 9 6 6
WAX nst.pc*ct: (*> 0 0 D -0 a
JWRTtA WLTIO {V) o 0 a
TUT . <BJ>) 0 9 9 i
ATJ.I <WU* (dB) 0 0 0 *
0
MP PIVP 0 O 09 00 0o
M-lUKW 00 00 00 00 09 00 00 09 0 00 00 DO 00 .00 <H> 00 00 00 00 00
1/ *0 >1
_
o. Display item Details
The status of the position loop gain is displayed. Position
loop gain refers to the following:
GAIN (1/sec) Gain [1/SEC]
Feedrate (mm/sec,)
Tracking delay error (mm))
ROOP (i) Droop [Command unit]

The error of the actual machine position
commanded position is called droop. _
to the
SPEED (1 /min) Speed [1/min] This is the actual motor speed.

FEED RATE (mm/s) Feed rate [mm/s] The feed rate of machine end is displayed. (Only Vx )
The motor current is displayed with a continuous current
URRENT %) Load current [% ]
conversion during stalling. _ _
The current FB percentage in respect to the current limit
is displayed.
MAX CUR1 (%) Max. current 1 (%]
The peak value is constantly sampled, and updated
every second.
The currenl FB percentage in respect to the current limit
is displayed.
AX CUR2 (%) Max. current 2 [%]
The max. value of the current FB peak sampled after the
power is turned ON is displayed. _
The FB value of the motor current in terms of continuous
current during stalling is displayed.
MAX CUR3 (%) Max. current 3 [%]
An absolute value of the current FB peak value sampled
in most recent 2 seconds is displayed.
OVER LOAD (% Overload 1%1 This data is used for monitoring the motor overload. _
This dala is used for monitoring the resistance load state
0 OVER RE G %) Regenerative load [%] when the power supply for resistor regeneration is
connected.
The estimated disturbance torque in terms of stall rated
Estimated
1 ST FORCE (%) [%} torque when the disturbance observer is valid is
disturbance torque
displayed.
The estimated disturbance torque in terms of stall rated
torque when the collision detection function is adjusted is
MAX estimated displayed.
2 AX DST FORCE <%) [% ]
disturbance torque An absolute value of the estimated disturbance torque
peak value sampled in most recent 2 seconds is
displayed.
The estimated load inertia ratio when the collision
3 INERTIA RATIO (%) Load inertia ratio [%]
detection function is adjusted is displayed. __
The present operation frequency of the adaptive filter is
4 AFLT FREQ (Hz) AFLT frequency [Hz]
displayed. _ _ _
15 AFLT GAIN (dB) AFLT gain IdB] The present filter depth of the adaptive filter is displayed.
_
___
6 AM P DISP Amplifier display
_
The driver's 7-segment LED display is shown.
Alarms and warnings other than the amplifier display are
7 LARM Alarm
displayed.
141
ppendix 3
(2) SERVO MONITOR (Servo monitor) 2/2
The servo status is displayed on this screen.
W * s ; t a « } uioctu >u»s {' B n i o i xrvt BiaKTOa yamm > taa&ta* *n*rTa»|

fERYO H0*JTGR<2/J?)
vj 1=1 IA) l<-'1
rTnr cwr *P) 0 0 0 0 0
C R I P MATT <**) I. *.
twin <**) . 0. P. 0.
*XC JOK (ÿ») <5. , 0,.
acv* ro
po d *ÿ».]
<•») o<
. ©.
0.
0. 0. J:
0.
n>«A]a “) o, 0. o’ J?
WfltJK RO? |mj • 3 1 .* - »1*. 0. '*10*
fWMKL IT ÿ»> 0, 0, s>. 0.
PS tr.BO* 1) 0. 0. 0. 0. 0.
ftn*. CW? U> 0. . 6. .0, £>.
CHOI cw>ooo<»<>ooo<>olJ OOWWOOOOOWWll OCWTOOOOOPGOOOll 000000090000001J. <XKX«O»OOOWOOI
CWD2 OOOO11«OS>OOO<K><X> o o o o U o o o o o o o o o o OoeolJOOOOOOOCOO OOOOlJuOOOOOOOQO oo&ollbcoooooooo
cxX>o Jr->o<xÿ>c«>1 r * x > oooolooooocaJtJofi o<XH>Jo<>ooo<JolOpo oot>oiooooooo3ooo o©i» o*><*HW>3<>c>o
CWD>* POOOW® 9 P I M W 9 I V cJCBJOOOOOOOOPOaOCa <JOOOOO*>«0<HX>OCX>0 PC f ico owioooowwwo
oe » C<S3<>OOC«OOOC»C><>CK)0 OOOOOOOOOOOCKXXXX OOOOOOOXVXXKKXtO OOOOOOOOOOOCOOOP OCKJOpOPOOOOPPOOP
oai«i OOOOOOOOOtXXSOolO o o o o o o o o o o o o t j o l o OUOOOOpOAO&OO&lx) r x i m M V K X V X x j o b o 1 a ( X o o o o o o o o o o c w l o
«a l POOOQOOOPPPPPPOO 0 0 1 X ) p Q < X » 0 0 0 0 ( X « > OOOOOOQOOOOpQpOti #**>«KjOWOWO«W
PT*2 CÿXXXXHKXXXXXKXIO O O C Q O O W O O O O O O O O OOOOOCKKKXIOPPOOO OOOPOpboOOPOOCWJ (WWOOWOOOOCWOO
trt S3 D00000cx>0000oc>00 OOOOPoOOOOOPOOOO OOOOOOOOOoCOOOOO oooooooooooouooa oooooooooooooooo

=73* i)oo<jcx>cÿk><w3ot3o iwwcoooooooopofi ppp»*H?oc>PP«=<><*a*{><> o**>o<H3«>»c<>oooo<x» OO<ÿ>OO<X>O<)0CK>O<><J
ST5S O O O C P O M W X W O O O OOOCWÿO<>OPOO<><K>9«> o , * > 4 > C H ? W > p O O ( > « * ; w o u - W O W W W I H W POOOCkOPOOCOOPOOO
»TfS* D»V>«>C<><>X>OC>0©<>00 OOOOOOOOOOOOIXKXJ OOOCOOOOUOOOOOrtO OOOOOOiVJOOtKWOOO oooooooooooooooo
*/>* II

The position pe r rotation of the encoder d el ec to r i s
displayed.
CYC CNT (P) Cycle counter [pulse] The grid p oi nt 's v al ue i s u se d as the 0 position and the
position per rotation is displayed in the range of 0 to RNG
(movement unit) multiplied by 1000. _
The grid spacing for reference point return is displayed.
GRID SPACE (mm) Grid spacing [mm]
The unit is [deg] when using a rotary axis. _
The distance from the dog off to g ri d p oi nt when dog-type
GRID (mm) Grid distance [mm] reference point return has been carried ou t is displayed.
The grid mask distance is not included. _
This is the position on the NC’s basic machine coordinate
AC POS (mm) Machine position [mm]
system.
MOTOR POS (mm) Motor end FB [mm] The feedback position of the speed detector is displayed.
SCA (mm) achine end FB [mm] l The feedback of the position detector is displayed.
(mm) Remain
EMAIN mm ] The remain command value is displayed.
command
Current position
WORK POS (mm) [mm] The current position is displayed.
J2L
Manual interrupt
MANUAL IT mm) mm] The amount of manual interrupt is displayed.
amount
the error of between the motor end FB and machine end
0 B ERROR FB error [Command unit]
FB is displayed.
The compensation pulse amount for dual feedback control
1 FB COMP (0 DFB error [Command unit]
is displayed.
12 CMP1 Control input 1
3 MP2 Control input 2
16 CMP5 Control inp ut 5
17 STS1 Control output 1
142
ppendix 3
(3) ABSOLUTE MONITOR Screen (Absolute value monitor)

The servo’s absolute position is displayed on this screen.
i
vtasini i tnatmn »»n* DTTTW aw > wann* Isnjnt* »t*rrsi [ K o n a x w * m »|
PXacOLtrtt MPMITPU
W1 t. J 3z\ [A1
A65 sta
t*t>r voa ÿ**> o. #. o. 0. t.
row M>8 ft. . o i o.
KM: W)B <ÿ») ft. t, 0. ft. ft,
o a o ft o
o 1) ft ft ft ft
O CP) 0 ft ft p ft
fin (P> ft 0 ft
n <p) ft ft ft 0 si
Ko ft ft ft 0 0
ABSft O o D ft
ABSn 0 9 o ft
M5*Q«
<*> t 0 p ft
V 7* *5 \
No . Display item Details
_
AB S SYS Detection system The state of the absolute position detection system on the
servo side is displayed.
ES : Semi-closed encoder
EC : Ball screw end encoder
LS : Linear scale
MP : MP scale
ESS : Semi-closed high-speed serial encoder
EC S : Ball screw end high-speed serial encoder
INC : Incremental
2 PO P POS mm) Power position [mm] The absolute position at NC power OF F is displayed.
PON POS Power ON position [mm] The absolute position at NC power ON is displayed.
MAC POS
mm)
power is turned ON. __
This is created from the absolute position when the NC
Current position [mm] The coordinate value at the NC basic machine coordinate
mm)
system is displayed.
5 RO
6 PO
EO
Rn Cumulative number of The cumulative number of the motor rotation is displayed.
rotation
Pn Phase The position in one rotation is displayed.
Each rotation is divided by 4 0 9 6 , The range is 0 to 4095.
10 ABS0 Basic point The absolute position basic point is displayed.
This is the FB position memorized basic point
setting.
1 ABSn Current position The current absolute position is displayed.
12 , MPOS Scale offset The initial offset distance for the MP scale is displayed.
143
ppendix 3
(4) SERVO DIAGNOSIS Screen (Servo diagnosis)
The servo mounting state and alarm history are displayed on this screen.
r— vri rrm-
ratior. Hiooiii t « * m « } arum OTTO »anw |irn*« m n t n SJ*»SB» HSIIW }
xi IYJ IS [A1 1C)

tin IT r«*£
OMIT Ho.
S/W VTIVSICHI
comrnoi.
KMCrTYV*
r.wc. oinjtAj, m>.
eCiWLE TYTU
S C A1 X 8 ZK 1 KL Ho ;
MOTOR
WOtOC 7 D« 0 P 0 0
AJ*f JJf3* I JO-OJ w) p. 0OI 0 IPOJ 0 |00) 0
100) 100} o JOOI 0 |OOJ 0 1001 0
100) 0 IPO I 0 100) IOC) 0 100] 0
« 100) o 100) 0 1001 rooj 0 IO0) 0
5 00) n 10QJ 1001 0 |00| 0 100) 0
i 100) fOP) o (0C) 0 I00J 0 fOO) 9
7 100) o )O0) 0 100) 0 )0OJ r«»p) 9
a 100] 0 |O01 JO0) 0 100] 0 I»0) 0
HAurrE nisi Ov oo oo oo 00 00 00 00 00 CO 0D 00 OO OO CO 00 (7000 00 OO
oa oo oo oo 00 oo Co 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 OO 00 00 00 <70
HAwrrins 00 00 oo o 00
13/ 7°

UNIT TYPE Amplifier type This is the servo amplifier type.
2 NIT No. Amplifier serial No. This is the servo amplifier serial No.
S/W VERSION. Software version This is the servo amplifier software version.
CONTROL Control method SEM1 : Semi-closed loop
CLOSED : Closed loop
DUAL : Dual feedback
EN C TYPE Motor end detector This is the motor end detector name
6 EN C SERIAL No. Motor end detector This is the motor end detector serial No.
serial No.
MC DT Machine end This is the machine end detector type.
detector Only displayed when CLOSED or DUAL of control method.
SCALE SERIAL No. Machine end This is the machine end detector serial No.
detector serial No. Only displayed when CLOSED of control method.
MOTOR Motor This is the motor type.
10 WORK TIME __ Work time T he cumulative ready-ON time is displayed.
1 ALM HIST 1 to 8 Alarm history Th e Nos. of the past servo alarms are displayed.
12 MAINTE HIST Maintenance record The amplifier’s maintenance history or NVRAM (special memory in
servo) status is displayed. _
3 MAINTE STS Maintenance status
144
ppendix 3
(5) SERVO STATUS (Servo status)
Th e servo statuses are displayed on this screen.
He WnSw _ _
| OJHQCSIS WBUW ; em m &>no HWJUW wm* j IWRWWK enures J
SERVO STATUS
X1 m IA1 ICJ i
ALARM CO O XT 1 too, OOJ o |0o,ooj 0 [00,CO| 0 100,001 0 100,00) 0
[00,00) J00,00) 0 [00,001 0 coo, 00 ) 0 |00 j 00 ) o
[00,00) |00,00) 0 [00,001 0 100,00) 0 100,00) c
[00,001 0 100,00) [OO, 00 | 0 100,00} 0 100,00) 0
5 [00,00) 100,00) 0 [00,001 0 100,00} 0 100,00) 0
[00,00) O 100,00) 0 [00,001 0 J00,00) 0 100,00)
7 100,00) 100,00} 0 [00,00) 100,00} 0 100,00)
°0 ly
[00,00) 0 J0o, oq ) 0 100, ©0} CoO,Oo) 0 100,00) 0

[00,00) JOO,O0) 0 [00,00| 0 100,00) 0 [00,00) 0
0 too, 00 ) 100,00) [00,003 0 ) 0 0 , 00 } 0 100,00) 0 1
11 [00,00| 100,00) [00,001 0 100,00) 0 IDO J 0
i
IP. [00,00) [00, 00) 0 [00,001 0 100, 00 J 0 100, OOJ P s
DA ADDRESS 1 OOO 0000 ODDO 0000 0000

DA OUTPUT 1 o 0 0 0
oopo oopo l
»A ADPMS99 2 000 0000 0000 I
2 c
DA OUTPUT 0 0
1
17/ 20 £j

ALARM COUNT Alarm No . The servo alarm No .
Count
amplifier power ON. _
The number of times of servo alarm condition implemented after servo
DA output L DA ADDRESS Servo parameter svQ61 setting value (address)

DA OUTPUT Servo parameter s v Q 6 1 setting address data
A ADDRESS Servo parameter sv063 setting value (address)
DA OUTPUT Servo parameter sv063 setting address data
145
ppendix 3
3-1-5 SPINDLE MONITOR Screen

The spindle monitor is configured of the following five screens. The status of the spindle is
displayed on each screen.
- SPINDLE MONITOR screen (Spindle monitor) 1/2

• SPINDLE MONITOR screen (Spindle monitor) 2/2
• SPINDLE DIAGNOSIS screen (Spindle diagnosis)
• PS DIAGNOSIS screen (Power supply diagnosis)
SPINDLE STATUS screen (Spindle status)
The screens can be changed in the following order with the page feed keys.
SPINDLE MONITOR 1/2
I NEXT key T BACK key

SPINDLE MONITOR screen 2/2
SPINDLE DIAGNOSIS screen
1 NEXT key t BACK key
PS DIAGNOSIS screen

SPINDLE STATUS screen
Note: The SPINDLE STATUS screen is displayed only while releasing th e key lock.
146
ppendix 3
(1) SPINDLE MONITOR (Spindle monitor)
The spindle status is displayed on this screen.
fm
AIB
»ViV»
aana ; IUOQD
SPIXDU2 MOtUTOK .
&nv>O0
fipcna
rtr.D
LOUD
MM nm i
i
(.1/300)
ÿill- 1)
U)
<*>
n» ; inis ; IOW KMJT» S»J
HKIKDIJCI |
t>
0
9
o
0
0
151MWDU ?)
0
&
a
0
— »l
0
p
0
o
0
0
IBPinotro
0
tv
0
o
0
0
fSD 1*01*5 J
0
©
o
»
0
MIU c t m i <*> 0 0 Q 6
MM CUBS 0 0 o
(rtm tixxt> <• 0 0 0 0 0
OVXR REK c*> 0 0
nrrr . roues C’O 0 0 0 9
MM Dttr.»x>«ci; ( *»> 0 0 0 0
OffiXTM RATIO (V) 9 0 9 t>
ATX.T rPLQ. «*«) p 0 0 C 0
AT LT CL3* iatt) 0 o 0 0
r*%e>EtuiTtni£ tft> 0 o o 0 0
D1SP 00 0 00 00 00
0 co no oo 00 OR 00 00 00 00 Oo 00 00 00 t>-0 00 00 00 00 00

GAIN 1/msec) Gain [1/msec] The spindle position loop gain (1/s) is displayed. The
_
value is no t set when in control modes o th er t ha n
position loop control.
DROOP (i) Droop [Command The feedback tracking delay to Ihe commanded
unit] position is displayed.
This is valid only during position loop control as with
item 1.
3 SPEED (1/min) Speed [1/min] This is the actual motor speed.
FEED RATE (mm/min) eed rate [mm/s] The feed rate of machine end is displayed. (Only Vx )
LOAD (%) Load %]
conversion during stalling. __
The motor load is displayed with a continuous current
6 MAX CUR1 (%) The current FB percentage in respect to the current

limit is displayed.
MAX current 1 [% ]
every second. __
The peak v al ue i s constantly sampled, and updated
__ __
MAX CUR2 (% ) The current FB percentage in respect to the current
l im it i s displayed.
AX current 2 %]
The max. value of the current FB peak sampled after
the power is turned ON is displayed. _
3 MAX CUR3 (%) The FB value of the motor current in terms of
continuous current during stalling is displayed.
AX current 3 l%]
An absolute value of the current FB peak value
sampled in most recent 2 seconds is displayed. _
OVER LOAD {%) Overload (%] This data is used for monitoring the motor overload.
0 OVER REG {% ) This data is u se d for monitoring the resistance load
Regenerative
[%] slate when the power supply for resistor regeneration
load
is connected.
11 DST. FORCE (% ) Estimated Th e estimated disturbance torque in terms of stall
disturbance
torque __ [%]
displayed. _
rated lorque when the disturbance observer is valid is
2 MAX DST FORCE (%) The estimated disturbance torque in terms of stall
MAX
rated torque when the collision detection function is
estimated
[%] adjusted is displayed. An absolute value of the
disturbance
estimated disturbance torque peak value sampled in
torque
most recent 2 seconds is displayed.
13 INER1IA RATIO (%) Load inertia The estimated load inertia ratio when the collision
(%J
ratio detection function is adjusted is displayed. _
4 AFLT FREQ (Hz) AFLT Th e present operation frequency of the adaptive filter is
frequency displayed.
15 AFLT GAIN (db) he present filter depth of the adaptive filter is
AFLT gain [dB]
displayed.
16 TEMPERATURE (X ) Spindle motor [°C] The spindle motor temperatureis displayed.
temperature
17 AMP DISP Amplifier display The driver's 7 -segment LED display is shown
18 ALARM”’” Alarm This item is displayed when alarms and warnings other
than the amplifier display is occurring simultaneously.
147
ppendix 3
(2) SPINDLE MONITOR (Spindle monitor)
The spindle status is displayed.
r*m Wfrij~ St$
IKKU* ; >IK*TVIS m i n i ] arm*- VKD warm* P T * U * * * « * jjanwrax Banna;

SfJHtU.1 MOM ITOH <2/7)
j s p iK D t c a j l«:p*MDur2j tKt>XMDlX3) ispixomi 12SPJ#D».E5J
eve cur <»> o 0 o o
CRIO SPACE (M > - o. 0, 9. 0.
GRID In ) 0. 0. 9. 0.
KXC VOJf (M) 0. 0, e. o,
MOTOR P03 <*-) 0. . 0. 0. 0.
SCA TV fwO o. 0. 0. 0.
KEMAXH <wo . 0. 0- 0. 0.
WORK 1*08. («*) . 0. 0. 9. 0.
MANUAL IT |w) 0. 0. 0. 0.
ns riwou m o. , 0. 9. 0.
W.'C COMJ* <4) o. 0. ©. O- 0.
:>ct)i
0O0OOO0WX3OO000O ooi>«w>oooooooooo oooooooooooooooo 1
DJD2 OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO OOOCOOOOOOOOOOOQ
CMD3 OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO

CHD4 OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO
o® $ OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO ©OOOOOOOOOOOOOOO OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO
CHM OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO 0. OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO
Stal oooloooooooooooT *
STS 2 OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOl OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO
STS3 OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO
ST 5 4 OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO cocoooooooooocoo
STS5 OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO
STBS

This displays the position within on e rotation of the encoder
detector. The position is displayed within on e rotation in the
YC CNT (P) Cycle counter [Pulse]
_
range of 0 to RNG (movement units) * 1000 using the
grid point value as 0
_
The grid space for the reference position return is
RID SPACE (mm) Grid space [mm] displayed.
When rotary axis, the unit is [degj. _
This displays the distance from the dog-off point to the grid
RID (mm) Grid [mm] point when the dog-type reference position return is
displayed. Th e grid mask amount is not included _
AC POS (mm) Machine position [mm]
displayed. _ _
The NC basic machine coordinate system position is
MOTOR POS (mm) Motor end FB .mm] The feedback value of the speed detector is displayed.
REMAIN Remain command [mm]
Current posirion
WORK POS [mm]
12 1
Manual interrupl
ANUAL IT [mm]
amount
SCAFB (mm) Machine end FB mm] The feedback value of the position detector is displayed.
[Command The error of between the motor end FB and machine end
0 B ERROR (i) FB error
unit]_ FB is displayed.
[Command The compensation pulse amount for dual feedback control
1 FB COMP (i) error
unit]_ is displayed.
1 STS5 Control output
148
ppendix 3
(3) SPINDLE DIAGNOSIS Screen (Spindle diagnosis)
The spindle mounting state and alarm history are displayed on this screen.
i4e xwbM t-kfe
VZKCTOB } ( M » K MGWrnat j 0 mad j «RW3 *«CHai
I
« W T « KW»CO* W J f lT O B t
tfvxwMje MACHOS*
SpjMZ7|ÿ>] ISP lJ*P*-*4)
mrr TYEE
UK IT Bo .
8/W YFRSJO*
C6BTK03U
I
KKC.TYPE
* EBC.6ER3WL Mo.
|81TB ENC. IYTE
SUB EMC.8Ea.Mo.
tOTOft
*010t TXX* 0 0 0 0
ALM HIST 1 00]
[00]
[001
100]
0
0
[001
[00J
0
0
100)
IOO)
0
0
[00]
100]
M
3 100] 100) 0 [001 tool 0 100) Si
4 100) 0 100) [00) 0 100) 0 too) 0
|00) 9 100) 0 [00J 0 [00 J 0 100) 0 ?
[00] [00] 0 [001 [00) 0 00 ] o|
0
too)
ioo)
0 [00]
1001
0
0
[001
[oOl
0
0
too)
tooj
0
0
100]
[00] M
0 S
MAXHTF BJST 00 00 00 oo 00 00 OO 06 00 00 OO 00 00 00 00 00 00 CO 00 DOrt -
00 00 00 oo 00 oo 00 00 00 00 oo CO 00 oo oo 00 00 00 00 oo .
AXBJfc ft a 0 00 CO 00 oo I
j

UNIT TYPE Amplifier type This is the spindle amplifier type.
NIT No. Amplifier serial No . This i s t he serial No. of the spindle amplifier.
S/W VERSION. Software version This is the version of the spindle side software.
SEM1 : Semi-closed loop
CONTROL Control method CLOSED : Closed loop
DUAL : Dual feedback
5 NC. TYPE otor end detector This is the motor end detector name.
Motor end detector serial
EN C SERIAL No. This is the motor end detector serial No .
No.
This is the machine end detector type.
UB ENC TYPE Machine end detector
Only displayed when CLOSED or DUAL of control method.
Machine end detector This is the machine en d detector serial No .
UB ENC SE R No .
serial No. Only displayed when CLOSED of control method.
OTOR Spindle motor This is the spindle motor type.
0 WORK TIME Work time The cumulative ready-ON time is displayed.
1 ALM HIST1 to 8 larm history The Nos. of the past spindle alarms ar e displayed.
2 MAINTE HIST Maintenance record The maintenance history is displayed.
3 MAINTE ST S Status The NVRAM (special memory in servo) status is displayed.
149
3
(4) PS DIAGNOSIS Screen (Power supply diagnosis)
The power mounting state and alarm history are displayed on this screen.
He Mnicrm
v r a s i a t j Dr»a*sis HOT»T» j o n w i j sjrjjvo mrrtw [xwxwx w*orn»|

*>» &X*CHOI;S
<1S> <17> -uav <19? <?o>
1131X1 TYPE
uxrr no.
s/w YEBaiox
COM AxX$
IM VOLT 1 <V> 0 :
MAX TOLT X <v) O
HIM VOLT Z
WAX VOLT 2 (X) o :
WOttX 1JH8
AIM JBiKX 1 1001 0
\
2 100) 0
3 [001 0
J tooj 0
5 1001 0
« [001 0
7 1001 0
0 o
:HAn*TE urn 00 00 OQ «0
_
00 oo <J0
HAXXrrg *1rs 0

UNIT TYPE Amplifier type This is the power supply unit type.
UNIT No . Amplifier serial No. This is the serial No. of the power supply unit.
SA/V VERSION Software version This is the version of the power supply side software.
C ON A X IS Connected drive The driver connected power supply unit is displayed.
MIN VOLT 1 MIN voltage 1

J absolute value)
___
This displays the minimum PN bus voltage after the NC power ON.
This displays the maximum PN bus voltage after the NC power ON .

MA X VOLT1 MAX voltage 1
(absolute value)
he minimum PN bus voltage in most recent 2 seconds is displayed.
MI N VOLT2 MIN voltage 2
(absolute value)_
MAX VOLT2 2
displayed, (absolute value) _
The maximum PN bus voltage in most recent 2 seconds is
9 WORK TIME Work time The cumulative ready-ON time is displayed.
0 LM HIST1 to 8 Alarm history

ar e displayed. _
The history of the servo alarm No. and time generated in the past
_
Maintenance
1 MAINTE HIST The maintenance history is displayed.
history _
AINTE STS Maintenance

2 The NVRAM (special memory in servo) status is displayed.
status
150
ppendix 3
(5) SPINDLE STATUS (Spindle status)

The spindle status is displayed.
r*» tmfc
OT3U*fMJ6*nis mon»Jttrrw| tawti H«n* ww |HWM K*JTO» )
SPIUDUE STATUS
r-> JlH>DtDT4:lJ fsiMjHnii:?) ISFIMOUÿ] [SP*XD1JIS)
KLH&4 COBHT 1 100,00) [00,00} 0 100,00) 0 100,001 © too, 00 ) 0
i | C 6 , 00J 0 [60,00} 0 106,80) 0 [60,00) 0 160.001 0
3 100,00 J 0 (00,00) 0 JOO.OOJ 0 100,00) 0 100,00) ©
4 100.001 © 100,00] 0 {06.06) 0 100,001 0 100,60) 0
too, DO) 1.00,00). too, o«) © too,©*) 0 loo, ©O) 0
100,00) 0 (60,001 6 100,001 100.001 0 100,60) o
'1 too, 00} {00.001 o [00, ©0 | 0 100.MJ 0 loo,oi»i 0
JOO.OOJ 0 1 OD , 0© 1 [00,00) 0 106,00] a 100,001 6
100, OOJ J06.06) [00,60) 0) o [00,00)
}0 loo, 00)
o
100,06) a 100,001 a |00,00) o [00.001 l.
U 100,00} (60,00) 0 ICP.OOl 0 <00,00) 100.00) 0
12 too, OO) (06, OP) loo, 00 ) O |Oo,0D) 0 joo.oo) 6
K WMWEB8 1 000 006 000.0 ©006 0000 ;

DA DOT 6 UT X 0 6 O 0 0
DA AOGSKSip * 0006 000 oooo <060 0600
DA Otm>DT ?.• o o o 0 0
o. Display item
ALARM COUNT
A output L
Alarm No.
Count
DA ADDRESS
DA OUTPUT
DA ADDRESS
DA OUTPUT
Spindle parameter
Spindle parameter
pindle parameter
pindle parameter
Details
The servo alarm No.
_
The number of times of servo alarm condition implemented after
servo amplifier power ON .
setting value (address)
setting address data
setting value (address)
setting address data
151
152
153
154
y >.
-*
|r? PPSPIAVW
HfÿP
•'•A: I® m
Fit© v»V«3or*
i
2 PROGRAM TOOL DATA *:

[TKRCe ] [PROGRAM FIXE [TOOL OFFSET 1 :
[E l A MONITOR ] [TOOL PATH CHECK J [TOOL FILE ]
[MACH III BIG :
•
-
MONITORING ]
)
[SHAPE CHECK
[PROCESS CONTROL
* 1 [TOOL LAYOUT
A|DRXLL MONITOR J :
[SPINDLE %0A£> GRAPH XC ] [PROGRAM XÿAYOUT
;\ilKAVIGATIOH T RESULT .
[AUTO MEASURE
. ] [H A V IG AT ION
— PREDICT ION J [
I
WORK: OFFSET USER PARAMETER DATA I/O
I ADDITIONAL WPC j [MACHINE PARAMETER [DATA I/ O PARAMETER 3
[MACRO VARIABLE 3 [PLC PARAMETER )
[MKASXIPF 1 i
[STRAIGHTNESS GRAPH 3
3
;
•v
v
CUTTING CONDITION i>IAGHOSIS (USER)
[ CUTTING OoNDXXIOH LEARN 3 (MAKER) 1
[MAINTENANCE CHECK 1
[RUNNING CONTROL 3
(GRAPHIC MAINTENANCE )
:
I
...
i )
f.
ru\;~oH — n> 1 5 Gain1 NAM mm/min <CUR SORXINP UI> ? i :

~ i
£
:
MAP
Operation Procedure : Display selector key > DISPLAY M AP
155
WVYWAY \ÿYA'AY\\\W.Vi\NNW.Wk\\\V\\% YVYWkYVWV.WW (Y»'»VAYSYI'IY» \YY*Y.\\Y»YVA\
urn*
1 %>
m
I Ccu./ÿ
&rfssft Vv>V >'.<ÿÿ H'->& *

I
5
OSITION UFFER NEXT COMMAND WHO-
»
«Ei
*
TRS-CNK
>
I
I
X 0, X . c ( ) ( )
. 0. UNO. 0 0 0 >
i i . Zl 0. T
% X
0.
P. Cl 0, NEXT CtttAXHKD XOW
I COUNTER
<W0DAt>
0( 0)
i
:
I 2 » xz 0. G S F 0. M 0
i
I
2 O- Z2 0. H G 1 G 17 G G 23 G 98 G 21 G 40 \
2 - 2 0. T G G 80 G G G53.5 G 64 X
C 69.50 97
:
0, W 0, G 68 G 67 0X23 G ?
i
.
G123 1G111 G50.2 G113 G13. 1 %
\
ACHINE EMAIN OFFSET \
:
.
© xi . XX 0. 0.
I . 0, c 0. i
0. in . M. SPDIi 0 MIN-1 10 0 200
0. (0 ) 0 M/MXN | \
f$ ci B . B ; . SPDL 0
X2
-
,
ci
X.2
0.
0.
T . SPDII
(0 )
0 MIN'1
0 M/MIN
T. SPDL l|
Zj
:t
I . 2 O. T . SPDI2 0 MIN1
T. 5PDL
XI-AX|
0
i
I©
I l
C2 .
-
C2
w
0.
.
i
FEED
<0) C
0.
M/MIM
MM/MIN
Y-AX
Zl-Rxj
| 1 o I
t
I
:
NO . 0
WRIT
->->
:
(
ito. 0
)
MflGAZNPKNo.
(CIR-DR
<
LO W TNo.
6 i>
)
)
i
;
j C2
13
Cl
0.
0.
0.
,
* /»ln
/a in
* /»in
B-RX I
l -A X|
X2-AX
o
0 ;
T -OFFSET S( 0) 0* j LOW 0. MM/MIH Z2-AX

II# { 0) X 0. 0 MM/REV 2-AX B o
0.
W-AX : 0
i Z 0.
i
t
1
I
I.
/v 5o% 1s i fl> rain -
i
W\A iran/nin
m
_J:*
TPs - o;. mmmmm I
:
1 i
ACHINE ?0KK H. SPDL M. SPDL IP S

LOCK LIGNT JOG RE V
L
'.VAVA'WM'. - /.V.W/W.VA
Operation Procedure : Display selector key — > POSITION
156
• A~faitV iWrr»yÿ aaÿas d££fc ‘.YMÿWNWAVn:
I
( VERSIGMj DiaCSDSIS JSKITt® I OPriflH \ SERVO W3HITflR I 5PDE<LE i « M 7 W i HJ3*mS££; IfDMTTfiR j
I >
pxm yyyyyÿyyyyyyyy ERIAL yyyyyyyyyyyyyy wox>eL ymryyy>ryyyyyy
ERSION ITEM VERSION MOTOR MACH THE ITEM VERSION

£TEM
MAIM -A 1001WOOO-A*WQ SRV--X ( )
< ) J2CT-X I
£
MAXH-S lQQIMOOl-AÿO 9RV-V ; : < vvM / > J2CT-2
XG-ENG iooim>n~Axwo SRV-Z < •
> ( :: :' • ÿ '• ÿ

ÿ
> J2CT-3 \
.
XADDER-F 1001W568-A0016 SRV“H :ÿ;ÿÿÿ• >;< V
•
>)
•
I2CT-4 \
I ADDER- B SRV-A V < «J2CT-5 I
I
I LCP SRV-6 ) ( ) J2CT-6
i SRV-7 ( > < ) J2CT-7
t- SRV-8 > < ) J2CT-8
£ SRV-3 ( > < > J2CT-9
* SRV-XO < > < ) J2CT-10
J
SRV-11 > ( > J2CT-11
SRV-12 ( ) ( ) J2CT-12 t
f sRv-13 ; . C ) < ) J2CT-13
S.RV-X9 < > < > J2CT-14
1 SRV-15 ) < )
SRV~16 ( > ( )
.
SPH-1 ) <
. SRN-2 > < > ?
SRH-3 ( > < >

SP1I-4 < ) i )
SPH-5 < > ( > 5
3PM- 6 < > ( )
*
t
SPH-7 ( > i
l
SPH~8 ) c
-
i
IP S 0 2005/10/31 1 1 : 16:03
i
i
I I
KrC % c ISOmln'1 W vA Own/sln
i i
lAOHOS VCRSlOM OX AO NOS OPTION SERVO SRIMDIE HARDWARE LADDER
MOHXXOR MONITOR MONITOR MONITOR MONITOR i
£
>
fty.WAV/AW»V
Operation procedure Display selector key --> DIAGNOS

.
—>
VERSION - > VERSION
157
I
iMlM \
<
fi* Wn,tx Htb f
|
W3OTM I DljtfKOSIS JfflWITCR jOFIXIMij EHITO KDHTTtffi
I KPJJfiOi BEMITOR [ H3HDVJCE lStNITCK|
:
1 ETA 29 GANTRY ROBOT CONTROL 51 RE-THREAD
2 HIGH SMOOTHING CONTROL 30 FLASH TOOL 58 PROGRAM MEMORY EXPANSION
3 SPIRAL 31 INCH AM COM VEST 59 LOWER TURRET MA7.ATROL ?
4 EIA 3D COMP. 32 ROT- AXIS SHAPE COMP. 60 MILL TURNING MAZATROL
t
5 ROTATION 3 3 CO O SLOPE CONST. 6 1 H IG H SP EE D SYNC. TAPPING
6 GEOMETRIC 34 SCALE FEED BACK 62
t i- T SCALING 3 5 SOB SP 1/1000 DEG POST. '
63
8 EXT-DATA I/O 36 VARIABLE 60 0 SETS 64
9 MA2ATROL 3D 31 SCALE F/B (A ) 65 »
10 POLYGON MACHINING 38 CYLINDER 66 5

1 1 HO B MACHINING 39 SYNC. MAIN S P . TAPPING 61
I 1 2 5 -PLANE 40 SIMULTANEOUS 5 AXIS 68
1 3 HIOH SPEED 41 B AXIS CONTROL 69 s
14 SHAPE COMP. 42 IC CARD HUMMING 70 }
'
;
THREAD 43 ETA U L R I C A , TAP CYCLE :.
16 SOB C-AXTK CONTROL 44 EI A PATTERN CYCLE 12

\
1 11 INVERSE TIME 45 PROTCOL B . 73
1 8 DYNAMIC COMP. 46 SHAPING 74 1:
1 R0T- 41 2N D AOX. FUNCTIONS 75
70 -,To“ 48 NURBS IMTERPORATTOH 76 l
t
I 21 POLAR COORDINATES INPUT

22 COMPARISON STOP
49 TH.TED WORKING PLANE
50 SP/ROT. PARA. ADJUST
77
78 ::
23 HV CHTR. 51 TABLE UNBALANCE DETECT 15*
• :• 24 SYNC. CCHT . S2 5-A XIS TOOL COMP. 80
25 EI A CONVERSION 53 AUTO PECKING 81
26 SPLINE 54 ETHERNET RUNNING 2 t
i
21 G 5 4 . 1 55 TOOL CENTER POIHT CONTROL 83
78 SYNC. MILL TAPPING 56 THREAD S TA RT P OIN T COMP. d -
-r*v
1i ?'
0 : 20 05/10/31 ; IX : 1 3 : *3
:
Ay o* lb 150min’s vW* OPUB/BIU
LACHOS VERSION OIAGHOS OPTION ERVO SPINDLE HARDWARE LADDER

\
: MONITOR MONITOR MONITOR MONITOR MONITOR
I \
1
Operation Procedure. : Display selector key --> DIAGNOS -->

VERSION - > OPTION
158
mm
?
• » ' .- ? ' ‘• »>V« j{>fU j ÿ’?*
E-TO
VV
m
:v r o'- 77 r OTÿIT,.;. To
I
VERSItM | DUU2H0SIS HDNITtJR | OJTTCH SOIVO WCMITttR [sPQHKJB WfflttTJK j HSRDVSiJE MUnTtHt i
SERVO MONITOR ( 1 / 2 )
X1J m Z1 J JB) icx)
I
I
i
t:
DROOP
SPEED
AIN
(»i_n-l)
(J/soc)
i 1) 0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
<
FEED RATE (wm/win) 0 0 0 0
-DKRENT (%) 0 0 0 0 0J
MAX ClfRl <%) 0 0 0 0 0
:
: MA X CUR2 (h ) 0 0 0
MAX CUR3 *) 0 0 0 p
OVER LOAD 0 j
<**> 0 0 0
OVER REG *0 0 0 0 0
DST . <* ) FORCE 0 0 0
i
MA X DEFORCE <*) 0 0 0 I
J
INERTIA RATIO ih ) 0 0 0 0 0 i
1
FLT FREQ, (Hz) O 0 o o
KFVt CAXH (<*B) o 0 0 p
MP DISP 00 00 00 00 00
ALARM 00 00 00 00 0 00 0 0 00 00 00 00 00 OO 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
I
:
i rrnsrg \
%
:
1
A?Y. LSLLiD min'1 :\W-
mmm TPS 0 j 2005/11/04 110 :1 2: 04
50% wn/win t
I
DXAGNOS VERSION DTAG NOS OPTION SERVO SPINDLE HARDWARE LADDER \
MONITOR MONITOR MONITOR MONITOR ONITOR t
>
:
WWAVWA1 ‘ . v / w / . ' . y .w . v .
Operation Procedure : Display selector key --> DIAGNOS -->

VERSION - > SERVO MONITOR
159
{ • i fe y'VjjjTs KVsp
VERSItBT | DlftQfOJwIS tSBCCTCK ] OfTItBf SERVO BUKITHR j SPIMDLE WDnTt»| MfiKEWMZE MMTTCR j
SERVO MONITOR<l/2)
(XI) tzi) BJ CC1-J
AIN ( 1 / SOC) 0 0 0 0 0
DROOP U)
i 0 0 0 0
SPEED (min-l) 0 0 0 0
FEED RATE (JftM/jfcii) ) 0 0 0
CURRENT <*> 0 0 0 0 0
MA X a m i <*> 0 0 0 0
MA X CUR2 *) 0 0 0 0 0
MAX CUR3 <%) 0 0 0 0
OVER LOAD <% ) 0 0 0 0
OYER REG <*> 0 0 0 0
DST- FORCE *) 0 0 0
\mx DSX.FCRC£
INERTIA RATIO
<*>
<%)
0
0 0
0
0
0
0
IRFLT FREQ. 0 0
RFLT CAIN <iN) 0 Q 0 0
MP DISP OO 0 00 00 00
ALARM 00 00 00 00 0 00 00 00 0 00 00 00 oo oo oo oo 00 00 00 00
1/ 16 -H
PS 0: 200i/n/04 ,10:12:04
W 50*5 isW.
s
Owin'1 VV\A 0»m/»in
DXAGN03 VERSION OIAGNOS OPTION SERVO SPINDLE HARDWARE LADDER

MONITOR MONITOR MONITOR MONITOR MONITOR
Operation Procedure : Display selector key --> DIAGNOS

VERSION SPINDLE MONITOR
— >
160
‘AWAV\YVVYÿ yiwiWMV , V A \
miitm i v 'it 11 \Y.\\>YASYiWiV/» V WYNWA’AÿWAVYi
I mmmmMt
i s
* it* Wy*ivft :K*'s
j VERSION | Diaorosis: WKITOR | OFrrnH j SERVO MBflTCR SPIKDLE MJKITGS | KWÿDWSIHE MfflmUR
I
I :
I :-
%
\
\
l
C HC J ( P tc ) ( HE M J X
\
1 HM1(>3 A (1.03) HW102 B HN402 ft :
2 KK123 A I
I
j
EX T ] |xq USB j i
KH-531 A HR 251 A ( 0 . 0 2 ) f
|
i
< (RIO 1 ) (RIO 2 ] [RIO 31 (RIO 4) (RIO 5 ] (RIO 6 ] (RIO 7J (RIO 8 ]
1
X i
2 5
KM 2 03 H203
i
4
i
5
:
1
f i
I
>•*•'
—— 1
msmr TIPS 0 2005/11/04 j 18 : I ? : 46 ;
\
f\Aÿ 50% iili) min *v
0jwn/«in
s * • • / »• • . I»tl,,lw>.«'i • • ' V»’ 3
:
I&CH08 VERSION DIAL*OS ORYXOH SERVO 3 PIN OL E HARDWARE LADDER I

J
?
»V.v. /.W . S ' A V . • / WA’.’.VW AW
Procedure : Display selector key --> DIAGNOS

VERSION ~> HARDWARE MONITOR
—>
161
* MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC
MITSUBISHI CNC
PLC PROGRAMMING TOOLS
V
COPYRIGHT. O 20D4 Ml
ISUBIÿSHI El ECTRIC CORPORATION RIGHTS RFSFRVFn .
i I»
eanm iKf
RE me DI/W80S.
Operation Procedure : Display selector key — > DIAGNOS

VERSION - > LADDER MONITOR
—>
162
\\\S\Yl\yAU
tyrrrtiÿaaw “<YÿYAW«iYiYi
ttlftVittiWf • am
l
>
fife
? t; iS
WVhfert
- -
mI t
l
iLM3K
1 5LBJW msrana | f\jQ sionc [
I
;
5
MO . ALARM MESSAGE HEAD DATE TIME TYPE
i
5 471 .TOC toon not $mm IX . IS 1 0 : 4 7 OP&RATB
i
I
I
I I
i
I
I
I
I 1
5
5
I
f
i
•i
?
;-
j
i
t
l
l
-ÿ
wmmm
i
ii
I 7x mo mm HOT F01WB
I ov
ioo% j
i
1
VERSION ALARM ALARM PIJC MAXWTtH RUSHING GRAPH Xc DATA ACCOM* . i
i
HISTORY SIGNAL CHECK CONTROL MATNTEo ERASE T-THE

Il
Operation Procedure : Display selector key

— > DIAGPTOS — > ALARM
163
i IWmmMm milM t
file Sotp Wrtfo* Hjfc
H.7BW [aLsrai HiJ.Ttiia J p i . c s u m | i
I o. .
'
A.LIUUI MESSAGE DATE TIME TYPE 1
42 DATA RENEWAL HO T ALLOWED -100, ) 10.31 10:22 OPERATE 1
406 MEMORY PROTECT 10.31 9:54 OPERATE
;; 442 DATA RENEWAL HO T SHOWED . ( 1 , »I00, > 10.31 9:43 OPERATE
DATA REHEKM, HO T
442 ALLOWED t 1, -100, ) 10-31 9: 38 OPERATE
1
DATA RENEWAL HO T
442 ALLOWED : 1, -100, ) 10.31 9:32 OPERATE \
442
DATA RENEWAL MO T ALLOWED £ 1, -100, ) 10.31 9:27 OPERATE \
406
MEMORY PROTECT 9:17 OPERATE
I 442
DATA RENEWAL tfOT ALLOWED c . .. l , -100, ) 10.31 9:15 OPERATE
MS2ATROL PROGRAM
439 CKSlGHATBO 10-31 9:11 OPERATE
439
MAZATROL PROGRAM DESIGNATED 10.31 9: 8 OPERATE
MAZATROL PROGRAM
439 DESIGNATED 10.31 9: 3 OPERATE
40 6 MEMORY PROTECT 10.31 B;59 OPERATE 1
439 MAZATROL PROGRAM DESIGNATED 10.31 8:59 OPERATE I
406 MEMORY PROTECT 10.31 8 : S3 OPERATE fe
dPSW OOSAOET 8LC
'
10.31 8:49 SYSTEM
I
1
-'
58 DORROTT RI.C >
\&0.:CORROTX.S1C
_ ,
i
£ .
328,62700,
.t.SC
3) 10.31
10.31
8:49
8:46
SYSTEM
SYSTEM
;
i 130 HO OPERATION MODE 10.31 8:45
468 MAINTENANCE CHECK WBRMIHO 4, ) 10.31 8:45 OPERATE
i
642 DATA RENEWAL HO T ALLOWED < 10,31 8:45 OPERATE
10.31 8:45 SYSTEM
.
|
U-
' 1 EMERGENCY STOP (&OOOOFFTE/ §0 $ 2 ) 10.31 8:45 SYSTEM
10.31 8:44 SYSTEM
10.31 a; 44 SYSTEM
j 1/ 5 -M
i Tp S O I 2005/10/31 10 : 23:37
rv/\> g*5 : ~~ D 7 50 m in ’
1
VV'A OIUIL/JAIR
I
I
VERSION AI i ARM nij'KM pix; MA nn f.n PU; wimum; GRAPHIC TEXTPILE
HISTORY SIGNAL CHECK CONTROL MSIHTS, DISPLAY
Operation Procedure Display selector key --> DIAGNOS

.
— > ALARM HISTORY
164
The Procedure Of Reset Alarm History And Extended Alarm History
1. Go to DIAGNOSIS screen and push DATA ERASE button.

X
ii+
Ui» mVTmnr ;N r ilfcHal, {
n. I.XKM KF..13WC DATE TIM TW B

I
:
j
:
1
I
:
IM 0 2(106/09/2* 22; 3? : 2#
W 7*v> TB Or[i» vVVS 1 .
VERSZOK Al.ARH IK wwm* RDIDJTHC cpj-.pmc DATA CtDW.

HISTORY Sir.HAf erase* OONTBCT, HAIKI BRBSB
2. Move cursor to ALARM HISTORY 3. Move cursor to COMPLETION J
and push INPUT key. INPUT -9999 and push INPUT key.
TOOL DATA CHUCK JAW TOOL DATA CHUCK JAW
TOOL FILE TOOL FILE
TOOL OFFSET TOOL OFFSET
CUTTING COND. ALARM HISTORY CUTTING COND. ALARM HISTORY
WORK OFFSET J WORK OFFSET MAINTENANCE
YAR. MACRO VAR.
COMPLETION <-9999 1NPUT> COMPLETION <-9999 INPUT>
START INIT . START INIT-
4. Explorer and Delete C:¥MC_sdg¥Alarm¥Alarm.txt file.
8SS 88
7
File Edit View Favorites Tools Help i:
WJ Back - -ft-
earch Folders )Jÿ\ ~
V :»•- - : i MC _sdg\ Alar m vi
olders X Name Sire Type
+
_
__) MC_Gl Data
I M-I .Machine Oat ab as
mm
_=J E xcbjdeAlarrri
89 KB
1 KB
Text Document
Text Document
*
-
_
_j MC .Machine Program
| MC.sdg
__
A Alarm
I CiistOfnMenij
I cutest
_ ) u* morn
_I
'.
ojties
_l dbl
_
_) tug
I Tocillnf or matron
V
> < >
165
166
'*•:
fwÿ.raS15AI»|p0;:
___
m m
fife w .Wipÿ W-
EJSPK | sown MCSTORZ \
I I*.
Ho . Title Sts. Condition No . Title Sts. Condition i
1.MF1 0000 XZ30,X$30,X690,X930 19 . RESET 0111 X1C$(X4ES,X845,X8ES
. 2.HF2 0000
0000
X231,X531,X891,X931
X232 ,X532,X89?,X932
20 . MX AXIS IHP
21. MJ.aXXS SMTH
- 1000
1000
X1F9, X4F9 , X859 , X8F9
XlFA,X4FA,X85A,X8FA
3.MF3 i
4,MF4 0000 X233,XS33, X893, *933 22.SYHC-Z 0000 X274 ,X5?4,X8D4 ,X974 >
|
1
5. SF 0000 X234,X534JX094,X934 23 . SYNC -c 0000 X27S,X57S,XBD5,X97 5
*\TF1 0000 X238 , X538 X898 ,X938
# 24.SXKC-SP 0000 X27fc,X57«.,X0D6,X976
7.TF2 0000 X239,X539,X899,X939 25.SYHC 0000 X204,X504,X864,X904
1 .
8 HF
9.DEH
0000
1000
X23C,X53C,X89C,X93C
X1F8,X4F8,X858,XBF8
26.GOV. :
27-61 V
0000
0000
X200,X500,X860,X900
X20X,X501,X861,X901 :
10 . JOG oooo xieoÿafio.xBio.xBeo ZB.XIIREADXHG 0000 X203 , X503 , XB63 ,X903
1 3 . HANDLE 0000 XlEl,X4El,X84I,X6El 29 . CONST 0000 X205 ,X505 , X865, X90S
1 2 . STEP 0000 X1E2 30 . SKIP 0000 X206,X506,X866(X906
13.PTP 0000 X1E3,X4E3,X843,X8E3 3 1 . OH ZERO RTH. 0000 X207,X5O7 ,XB67 ,X9D7
14 . ZERO RJETORH 1000 X1E4,X4E4,X844,X884 3 2 . FINISH 0000 X26O,X5GO,X0CO,X96O
0000 X268,XS68,X8C8,X968
’ ’
IS . MEMORY
iCjTJVPE ' ““ SS:;S:S5J:ÿ 3 3 . PRESSURE
34.HAXXHG 0000 X26C,X56C,X8CC,X96C '
17.MDT 0000 X1EB,X4EB,X84Q,X8EI) 35-MFIHX 0000 Y226 , Y526 , Y9A6 , YAA6
IB . OPERATION OOQ0 X1E2 ,X4E2,X842,X8B2 36.MFXH2 0000 Y227,Y527,Y9A7,YAA7
1
I X/ 3~±J i
• inÿj.0] 2005/10/3X j 10 : 2 3 ; 43
I
\T\j 0A ZJ 7 SO min’1 VV\A 0»m/»in
i
VERSION ALARM ALARM PI C MAINlEH PJ.C RtUtNXHG i
HISTORY SIGNAL CHECK CONTROL
Operation Procedure : Display selector key --> DIAGNOS — > PLC SIGNAL
167
* w
Fite Vfcteri
susm JCCSTCBCC nx: Slant,
HO. ALARM MESSAGE HEAD DATE TIKE TYPE

47 1 1TC »ATfc HOI TOmp 11.15 1B;'47 OPERATE
*
w~v- : - _ •
'Q';VSO:.
•
•
*:• :. .*>
i : *;
il
TOOL. FILE
__
TOOL OFFSET
• • -
. . ..
lTTTTliG COHO. ALARM HISTORY
*ÿ
WORK OFFSET MftIHTE«JUiCB
MACRO VAR. •
l%0, . %ÿVVÿ>5v:J i£
. '•
ADD me
COMPLETIOH <-9999 XNPUT>.
START IH IT,
| 47 l » C DATA. MW FQ1W*> [IB: 4 8 ; 2:1

jVU 100% kW 100% } .
VERSION ALARM ALARM PI C MAINTEN RQNHING GRAPHIC DATA ACClJHlI.

HISTORY IGNAL CHECK CONTROL MAIHTE. ERASE TIME
Operation Procedure : Display selector ke y — > DIAGNOS --> DATA ERASE
168
A. rfliV'ii niRivav‘'-y‘v'v‘ÿ}‘\)‘ÿYi '~'v-
.w«.ifr'>nvrii 6M .
-
;
<
Fite- WWSor* Hrÿ>
SXSJOI p««oi
j rrrcif ITJRIK j KEY MisTtaa | fO«w scan7. |
:-
i
i
i
i
Ol 0 019 01111011 03 7 0 05 5 toooooooo 073 00000000 091 jllOOOOOl
02 3 02 0 01000111 03 0 05 6 i 0 07 4 iOOQOQlQl 09 Z loooooooo
03 4 021 10111111 03 9 ; OOOOOOOO 05 7 j IOOOOOOOO 07 5 j OOOOOOIO 09 3 [00000000
<
4 6 022 11101 1 1 1 o4 0 iooiloioo 05 0 i
'
0 07 6 jOlOOOOlO 09 4 j OOOOOOOO
05 8 023 11101111 0 4 1 jOOOOOOOl 059 j £00000000 07 7 loOOOlOOO 095 ioooooooo
06 4 02 4 10001 1 10 04 2 OlOOOOOO 06 0 j o 07 0 j 10101000 09 6 10000000
07 1 025 10011111 04 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 06 1 : £00000000 07 9 i 0 09 7 0
oo 2 026 11111111 04 4 1000 06 2 ; 0 08 0 : 0 0 98 1
09 2 027 00111110 04 5 100 0 06 3 £00000000 O Ol 0 09 9 O
oio 0 0 20 10100000 04 6
?
25 0 064 0 00 2 0100 16
oi l 0 029 10010100 04 7 06 5 0 OB3 j 0 0101 0
I 012 0 03 0 11110011 04 0 2000 06 6 0 08 4 :
0102 0 i
f
013 2 031 11100100 049 2000 0 67 j 0 os 5 | 0 0103 0
01 4 1 032 OOOOOOIO 0 50 50 0 06 0 :j 0 00 6 | 1 0104 0 :
5 015 0 0 3 3 11001101 051 0 06 9 1 00 7 | 0 0105 •
0
i
016 : O 03 4 . 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 05 2 0 07 6 ; 0 08 8 j 0 0106 IOOOOOOOO

017 4 03 5 i 10000010 053 j o 071 ' £ 00000000 08 9 | o 0 1 0 7 -OOOOOOOO
01 8 2 0 36 U 1100 1 0 05 4 07 2 UOQOOOOOO 09 6 5 0 OIQO 0
\
\:
i-
DI -rJ Ij#'?' |fg||ftjj2005/ll/15 1 18; 50 : 58 i
\
j
V v 100% WA ioo% r• : s
1 I
>
DIACHO# SYSTEM ITCH KE Y MEMORY
:
PA*Uki ERROR MI STORY SCOPE
<
& I
Operation Procedure Display selector key DIAGNOS ->

'
VERSION -> VERSION - > SYSTEMPARAM
169
rtfUH rirc»f zmam RT T m v i w i ' ; msfufn s n > n ;
Ol « o i9 muon 03 ? 0 OS5 £ 0 0000000 P?3 00000009 09 1 11 0 0 0 0 0 1

02 3 02 0 01010111 03 9 0 056 0 01 4 00000101 09 2 ooooo lo o
03 d 021 10110111 03 9 08000000 057 tOOOOOOOO 07 5 00100011 093 00000000
04 02 2 11110111 04 0 00100000 05 6 0 07 6 9IOO0O1O 09 4 00000000
05 02 3 11111111 04 1 00000001 05 9 400000000 07 7 0O1O10OO 0 95 00000000
6 4 OS 4 i m m M t 04 £ 00010009 060 0 018 1010000 1 09 6 0 10OOO0O
07 1 OS 5 10 0 11 0 43 OOOOOOOO 06 1 1,00000000 07 9 0 09 7 0
08 <> 0? 6 11111ÿ1 04 4 0 06 2 0 OH O 0 09 6 2
09 ? O71 001111ÿ0 04 5 0 0 63 i.00000000 on i 0 09 9 0
OlO 0 02 0 111000019 04 6 0 D64 0 08 2 0 0100 16
on o 02 9 1 1 VJOloA 04 ? 0 065 O 003 OlBl ?
012 0 03 0 11 1111 11 \ 04 8 2000 06 6 0 08 4 0 01 0 2 0
01.1 oil 10000100 \ 04 9 2000 067 0 f. u 0103
O il 1 03 2 00000010 \ 05 0 0 0 68 0 08 6 0103 0
01 5
016
01 7
0
0
3
03 3
03
01900001
034 0091 oq 01
00000110
s
VlSl
cfcp
29
0
0
06 9
OlO
07 1 4OO0OOOOO
0
0
08 7
08 8
08 9
0
0
0
01 0 5
0106
O107
8
00000090
00000090
01 Q •> o3 6 01010000 Ot U O O? 2 L 00000000 09 0 0 oioa C
\
i
\
\
\
>- v
oiM y '*£? ® 2006/12/01 09:52:31
V\* so % H fl >AAA 1 . 46 tsi/mS

\ H IT
\
\r*r
\
Cursor to the coirect. 0 parameter
Press BIT INPUT- '
170
M ; fejg 4: I
F$* 'ÿitev* twp
SYSTEM rmm| nttDt mum } I&Y tfusreaa* ) lasas# %tmm J
3 B 01 9 XI 111011 033 9 05 5 & 00 00 0000 07 3 00000000 m% 1100 OGOL

of 3 02 0 01 0X0111 03 8 8 05 $ 0 07 4 00000103 092 G 900010 0
03 02 1 10110111 039 00000000 05 7 *08009900 07 5 00100011 09 3 j 0 0000 000
04 6 0.22 lillOlll 04 0 00100000 0 58 0 07 6 01000010 0.94 00000 0 0 0
OS 0 023 11. trio X 04 1 00000001 059 £09000090 077 OO1010OD 00800000
6 4 02 4 I 11**1011 04 2 00010008 06 0 0 07 8 10100001 09 6 O1OO0OOO
07 0*5 1 001.1 m 04 3 00000 D 00 mi *00000000 07 9 0 09 7 0
08 2 02 6 II nun 04 4 8 062 o 00 0 0 mb 2
m ? 027 001X1110 45 0 06 3 £00080000 08 1 0 09 9 0
OI P Of0 11100000 0 4$ 0 cm 0 00 2 01.60 : 1$
Oil 0 02 9 XI I 18 10 0 04 7 0 06 5 0 00 3 0 0X81
01 2 0 03 0 llilllll 04 0 2880 06 $ 0 OQ 4 0 0.1 Of 8
01 3 2 03 1 10088100 04 9 2098 06 7 0 00 5 8 0X83 8
01 4 1 032 OOOOOOiO 05 0 0 06 8 0 08 6 i 0104 0
0X5 033 01000001 05 1 0 069 0 087 0 01.05 0
01 6 0 034 000X0001 05 2 29 07 0 0 00 8 0 0186 00880808
01 7 5 m% 00000110 05 3 0 O il 400000000 00 9 0 0187 08000000
o in 036 010X0000 054 07 2 £00000000 O90 0 0180 8
on :;V/| iwi 2006/12/01 09:52:50
/V. 50 % lift Orpm VW*‘ .1 , 4 in /m in

...
I-
1
BIT- f
J 4 3r- IHPIST
X
/ EX
the bit. yo u want, on ur off ... Highlighted = 1 or On Not Highlighted = 0 or Off
171
Y ÿ A V T l Y l V A*>YtYYn VTYtT. YlYlT tYYYiV/YlY\ YiWr>1 Yl T w«vWftwiWft\YTÿ
&£&$&£ '
T. 'J& %‘.Zp***r ~ • mu
FI** Hrt>
5
SYSTEM FWtfO* ITCH EKH£R j KEY JCISTflJOf | KQCJHY SCOfE | \
:
o #208 #234 -;
2G #5 2 70 101 #130 15 0 10 2
>
I 0 0 0 0
XIS s j
i P3
I
2
j 1000000
3
0
13
-1
:
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
o
0 0
0
0
0
0 0
0
0

0 0 0 0
0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 \
0 o \
i
I 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0
\ 0 I o : 0 0
.....
0 i
I ; o 0 0
j 0 0
0 •: 0 :
—
1 ;
0 0 0 0
? i
0 i 0 0 0 0 0 i 0
:
0 0 0
0 0 0 0
1/16 jj
0 0 0 0
2J
Tl I
c.ÿ*r.v5«cn.‘v.
ÿ'
.*.y
I W'ioo* :
an sar™ i
1X8:51; 17 5
I
5
;
DIACMOS SYSTEM JPXTClt EY MEMORY DMrK Ko.
S
ERROR HISTORY SCOPE SEARCH
Si RHBBRBR TJjJJ.'J A W W X ' . ' A W A ' A W / A V W .V.’.V
Operation Procedure : Display selector key --> DIAGNOS

VERSION - - > VERSION - - > PITCH ERROR
172
fR-tif
F7? R;T % \o -O
rÿiLLi
f
SYSTEM rwam | men unm KEY msTmor iwoarior SCOPE |
1 2 3 4 5 <5 ? 8 0 10 1 1 12 13 15 16 17 18 10 20
0 MS 5ft MS MS Fl MS F3 F3 F4 CR F4 DS 48 Fl Ml CR DS DS DS F7
20 Fl DS F3 DS Fl DS F3 DS FB Ml CR UD UR FS UR UR UD UR F3 DS
40 FG FG FG FG FG F6 F6 FG FG FG F6 FG MS DS FG F7 DS F4 F4 UD
60 UD UD UD WD UD UD UD UD UD UD UD UD UD *D TB TB UD UD UD UD
80 UD Ml MO CR UD DS F3 FG Fl F2 F2 F2 F2 F2 F2 F2 F2 F2 F2 F2
10 0 F2 F? F2 F2 F2 F2 F2 F2 DS F7 Fl DS Ffi F3 F9 AX AH AT AE CR
12 0 F2 FA DS Fl DS Fl F2 F2 F3 F2 F3 F2 f3 F? F2 F3 F2 UR UR UR
14 0 UR UR 48 40 4A 41 41 42 43 45 44 42 42 4B 51 40 51 4B 4A 4C
16 0 53 48 5B 5B 55 55 53 53 56 56 54 54 F2 DS F3 UD F4 DS F7 DS
18 0 FG FA UD UD UD UD UD UD UD UD UD UD UD M0 CR DS F6 DS MS DS
20 0 F l MS DS F7 F2 FG FA UD UD UD UD UD UD UD UD UD UD UD Ml
220 CR DS DS 08 FT Fl FA 40 F3 F4 F5 OS FG FA UD UD UD UD UD UD
240 UD UD UD UD UD HO CR DS F7 Pi FA F3 F4 F5 DS F6 FA UD UD UD
260 UD UD UD UD UD UD UD UD Ml CR DS MS DS Fl DS FB Fl Fl DS DS
280 DS FS Fl DS F8 F2 DS F8 F3 DS F8 F4 DS FS FG DS FB F7 DS F8
300 FA DS FG F6 FG MS DS Fl DS FG FA UD UD UD UD UD UD UD UD UD
32 0 UD UD MO CR DS FS Fl DS FO F2 DS F8 F3 DS F8 F4 DS FO F4 DS
34 0 FO F6 DS F» F? DS Ffi FS DS F6 FA UD UD UD UD UD UD UD UD UD
360 UD UD Ml CR DS DS DS F7 F8 F8 FB FR Fl DS Fl DS FA DS F7 FS
30 0 DS Fl F4 Fl DS F3 FA PD PD PD PD PD PD PU PU PU PU PD DC
400 F4 F4 FA F2 H4 H. M3 CR CL CR CR CR CR CR CR CR CR 40 DS F4
420 Fl DS FO PD PD PU PU CR F2 l CR CR CR CR CR CR Fl DS F3 UD
440 F4 DS F7 DS FG FA UD UD UD UD UD UD 1ID UD UD UD MO CR DS
460 F7 DS DS DS FG FA UD UD UD UD UD UD UD UD UD UD UD Ml CR DS
400 Fl DS F? Fl FA F3 F4 F5 DS DS F6 FA UD UD UD UD UD UD UD UD
50 0 UD UD UD HO CR DS Fl Fl FA F3 F4
mmmi :TPS 0 (2005/11/15 18:51:35
EE E
PXA0H03 BYSTF.W PITCH RE T MEMORY

P ARAM ERROR ISTORY SCOPE
Operation Procedure : Display selector key

VERSION - > VERSION -> KEY HISTORY
DIAGPTOS —>
173
YftmvWlWWYlWYlVW.W yVA*> ViV. S*VV»%\VISNNWIV.VIWTVV>V.VAW,/VAV\ WVS
jMliaF
i
Fite WWwf Hfr9f>- *
* serra* r«a« ) ?XTCM ERROR j KEY rasrraac vaxsci scare i

t l
\
i
TRIGGER N o. 0 IIP AMPLING CYCLE 0 X I.TBS
i o. QZGHKL
* +ÿ + *-ÿ + -+ 4-ÿ
* +- + +
I i
$
00000000-0
IJ
ooooooo-o I
l
00000000-0
i oooooooo-o
00000000-0
I
i 00000000-0
I
i
<
i
: 7 00000000-0
£
:?
i oooooooo-o
i i
\
1 1
;
\
i
i ioos/ii/is jiafsi: sa
l
t
W ioo% ['VIZ vV*A ioo%
YSTEM pxtm KE Y MEMORY RTRRT i

i
ERROR H.TS20RY SCOPE
BB W TW / . V i V . V . V A W . ' . V WÿHWX'IWW.'ÿTO
i
m u«
Operation Procedure Display selector key --> DIAGNOS -->

VERSION - > VERSION -> MEMORY SCOPE
174
Memory Scope
• Primary Function
Digital Recorder
-Ability to monitor 8 (eight) signals set to anything that is

an address
• inputs, outputs, latches, etc..
1
7
5
1
7
Memory Scope
6
Cursor down to the desired signal number

In this example, signal No. 1
DIAGNQSIS(MAKER2)
ile Window. y Help
'
Hi » i
mm
SYSTEM -P AR'Mr I PITCH EPP.0P. | KEY HISTORY. >v;KEK0RY \3rftW
rS:
TRIGGER Wo.C
. Wo. SIGNAL , +
1 00000000-0 ;
M
.ly,
M3
$
2 .00000000-0 V -:
Hi 3
3 00000000-0
*ÿ
4 00000000-0
ft}.
5 00000000-0
6 00000000-0' ,
. V'lllifPSiii
m
ISW*
;v
y.
£
. K
7 00000000-0 •*
&
S Jslfvfe,
: %
8 00000000-0
«
A:-
•. m- VVVilitl £
iVfii
m mm \ i H M aMfimB
vy •
i ij'-y.’ /-;;'1 \ «* vy;- •
-“- : ‘-‘i * v
}'ÿ' ’’ WW \ \ “:v
-7',l/,‘V;7 % v ’
33 EMERGENCY STOP
VV 10 0% [xjj Orpm WA 100 SiiHiP • r,
ss;
is-:
iiiiiin
ÿ Y’
j? VVV--‘
- '
C D E
V.;
8
.V iiiiil
----- -
>
4
X A; i
S'-VT
•$
Memory Scope
Input the desired address, example X140-0

(For X146, type X146-0 input)
DIAGNDSISIMAKER2)
3
Rle Window Help
mrntmmmmmt
SYSTEM ».<£AK| PITCH ERROR | KEY HISTORY M EM OR Y 3 C OPE
v-'H’-W
r '>ÿ .
:
: ;
Ho. SIGNAL
1 00000000-0
2 00000000-0
TRIGGER No. 0
+ ;
DOWN
T; +
--
SAMPLING- CYCLE
iiiMiiiMHi silS
lilgi
3 00000000-0
$
f . j
- r*S€:li
4 00000000-0
S 00000000-0
6 00000000-0
.7 ooo.ooqoo-o : I;;
M
Yg,
8 00000000-0 m
...
ift
&
m
3 EMERGENCY STOP [ j ~'.:7 ]lÿpgjg ['2000/03/25' [12:52
Vv To 05 xj} Orpm [WvA 100 X14D-0
. B C D E ?
1
7
7
1
7
8
Memory Scope
Insert up to 8 address’s
DIAGNOSISJMAKER2)
File VÿindoW' Help
V3TEH PARAH PITCH ERP.0R KE'2 HISTORY
TRIGGER No. 0 DOWN

.......
.ICCKORY-
mmmmummmmmmmm
: ;
111
No SIGNAL, :f; +ÿ +
1: X0140 -0
2 00000000-0 mmmmmssmmSBmrnmmsi i'm
3 00000000-0 ii 9y
Cy'ti
4 00000000-0
l§g§
00000000-0 fM •ÿi;’
s 'V;
& - w
00000000-0 >•
•0
£1 a&
7 00000000-0
8 ooodoooo-o
m mk
X
§*#« 2#
wmmm. -:
f?
Ni
33 EMERGENCY STOP ; '.(2,
’
I'vv’iaos jxQ] Orpm fvWv 100
§§*
mmm
:. •• B C D f
«r
M
si
Memory Scope
XI 40-0 through X147-0
DIAGNOSISIMAKER2)
ile Window Help
m
_ _
3Y3TEK PAR AH | PITCH EB P OR ] KEY KISTOP.Y HEHORY SCOPE: .
---- ----
wimmm
o.
1 X0140
2 X0140
SIGNAL
-0
-1
+
----
TRIGGER Mo . 0 DOUN SAMPLING CYCLE
-— ~ + ----
tie
3
~+ I
X'
®1§®M
%
3 X0140 -2
ÿ i
4 X0140 -3
/ >\\; ;§
5 X0140 -4
6 X014D -5
IV?
v, m
7 X0140 -6 -
m- XX& X xMWB
X0140 -7 .-ÿÿ-•
'
: > ;
'
.,-
... .
&
aMMHMM [ f 12 : 57
'
3ÿEMER(ÿHCY. 7- v , 2303/03/29
P'/v 100% [Vjjr r pm 1 00

_
£\ _£jr
• •
IAGHOS ; SYSTEM PITCH KEY. HEMORYf; m *

'START,,, >i
PAPsAM ERROR HISTORY SCOPE 1 & X'iv
1
7
9
X140=Reset
1
8
Memory Scope
0
Enter the No. for the desired trigger signal
MAKER2) i pi
File Window Help
e. Tr¬
] | KEY MEMORY SCOPE:
_ _ _ _ _ _Vvv'
SYSTEM PAJ..UI PITCH EPROP. HISTORY
-------- ----
W3M
. . .
— x 7.,1m?
>
RIGGER: Ho. 6 DP SAMPLING CYCLE 20 ' ‘
o. SIGNAL . -yw, + r- +
1X0140 -0
$ iu;
'•'5
.2X0140 -1;
3 X0140 ~2
H
4 X0140 x3;
.5 XOl'lO -4 .
6 X0140 £5 : Illiii M
..X0140 ;B6:
fSililil; :ÿ $
wsg®
8 XOi.iO: -7
liii 11
0:M - I-;
3 EMERGENCY STOP r~~~ I :2P0p/03/2ÿ. rls,; 02

fvv 1005 [zSQf rpm |vw ioo'
DIAGIJOS SYSTEM .PITCH , KEY, MEMORY START

PARAM ERROR HISTORY SCOEfel ?7$
u l
In this example, signal No. 6 will be used as the trigger

signal. (X145)
Memory Scope
ENTER 0 TO USE THE RISING EDGE
ENTER 1 TO USE THE FALLING EDGE
DIAGN0SIS(MAKER2) U
File Window Help WmsmmF wmmwmmmmmmmmm
SYSTEM P ARMI:.|‘:P ITCH ERROP. KEY HISTORY MEMORY SCOPE 1 $ g ti w
p
. '. ..
; / *? *• ; ;; ‘
. ;; :V ;:ÿ-< >avi ;
TRIGGER No. 5 DO TO
o. .
; SIGNAL.
-
-:4 - +V I- -;+ - -:+i mmmm
:TUW;
+ + .V:.
1 X0140 . ..-0 I' ;v;,it
l|raHn| W
2 X014Q ~i
3' X0140 =rs2 r|®

. : '-.. ‘l
-ÿ•ÿ
'.'O’
4 X0140 -3 Jg $ m My
i
W: mm
5 \X 0140 4 lltiSIfllll I
6 X0140 5
-A
7 X0140; -6 i mt istsi l
Vtvy/
3 X0140 -7
lliil®«a
3 EMERGENCY STOP V ] . ( IPlT 0 f 2000/C3/29 [“12: 58

j-W 100% p® Orpm |WA 100 • ;* M
3*
DIAGNOS SYS TEH PITCH [ KEY -START
SCORE®I
•
. - ;
'S’
I PARAH ERROR. HISTORY M i
1
8
1 THIS EXAMPLE USES THE FALLING EDGE
1
8
2
Memory Scope
INSERT TIME
(2 0 = .14 SECONDS)?
PIAGNOSIS|MAKEH2)
File .Window. Help
SYSTEM PAR All j PITCH ERROR
_
|KEVHIST0RV «wn?co»]
'
[E 3
wmmmmBi
No. SIGNAL .........

TRIGGER Ho . S DO'JW SAMPLING CYCLE 0 7.1ns
i
1 XOl'lO
2 XOi-4.0
-G
IP ,7
.
‘
IS § I
3X0140 -2
Wm ; g f|
‘
\ <•
4 XCI140 -3
gmxgMmmmmm
as p §i
B is
I M w®
5 X0H0
6 X0140
-4
-5
I M 8 11
X014U
8 X0140
-6
-.?
W:
Wi
§i® 11111 ; li
® w, US M
m jg
II
EHEBGEMCY SIOT : [ [T2:S3PI?
i 33 i jTPS 0 2000/03/29
w 1005 gj rpin
fW A ioo' p
I| m . s
IAGNOS SVSTFW- I PTTfK CFY MFWriRV' LTÿÿi START
PRESS START
'i
Memory Scope
The sampling cycle begins after the
desired trigger occurs.
g DjABN0SIS|MAKER2| [$£}
File . Window Help 1
y W , t wmm
SYSTEM PAP AM ] PITCH ERROR] KEY HISTORY SCOPE

y - •
j : . :v yw.-y.;.,.y .
-
j, ;'V
o;
1 XG14G
2 X 014 0
SIGNAL
-0 ;
1
----
TRIGGER No. 6
----+
UP SAPLING. CYCLE
-
U'
M
, 20 . x 7.1m 3
'V
v“
-+
m
—
J :-7:
3 X 014 0 -2 mmmmi
4 X0140 -3
__ _
_ _ ;
S X0140 -4 ~~
:_ _
6 X0140, 5
~
7 X0140 -6
8 X0140 -7
j ' '
- 7
j33TEHERGENCY 2,
'
fl IÿPS 0 [-2000703/39 FÿTof

|vv'l00% prjjj Orpin. jy-M 10 o 1
•
' O '
-o •
: ' '
V.w- y.
-
DIAGNOS SYS T Ell PITCH KEY HEHOEY

m EH»vraa
|
PA RA H ERROR HISTORY ECPE
1
The result of signals w ill b e displayed after the sampling
8
3
time cycle expires.
184
Maintenance Check
3l“fc
• • ÿ ÿÿ ÿ $
.....
.
Vi
vMmm®
i
®2
&raf
1
il;
VI ?*
“65.3. .1 0
• '• 'v- • ÿ ; . *• ÿ
Bflgigj[
•
~
* • . py- •
IB B
• -..
2
-
'ÿÿ
'
||||j|P
.' FT witm
SL
lliflf 1
J 5.'. m i
%
m
aJ*
ÿ '
J,,
BE
1
f.
I
,
t
©i
;#§ IS
1
;:'4& ÿ
Z1 -0.023
.:
( »
oc
k,
il§S
itf
m
0. N
nA
mm
*r :
m
X2 . T13 0
. . .
•:ÿ
I 11
I * aw
» 22 .
..... :.
: •- •'
f •
-
PC
.
. 5.... Si...
4W®8#L m
si
is
-'ÿ;
ll I
>ÿ A . . .; i*S
n- i;-
1 M
si
Uj.
•»
.* •:i . *> i &
S 8 »l
in s
I
xW
t.v
o
o
0.
u
**/&/ÿ ’ • • ÿ ' >
Molin’ i If
ly'i aa
SSlSMlt-i m
r-t'i
ilKg *:» r>\ 111 1 i
-Ill $
vi
HWHI ;>v
Ai-
•
3ÿ 1
i*V'\ :
Maintenance *%< K
r
.'I '
V
<
£
:9*
r-
Check . mu&zBx
.~ .. A? A- •*<' .?
*Y-» v.
?ÿ' ;
V '.<
H
• C --
,r
*
:1 it V 1 2 13
y 'ÿÿÿ-
WfS
uV >£ •ÿ •
I S | T L+ 0
A N
If v;
K. R F
TV
• 3TT. .
T/
i
Bi rXj°
>. o .1
t u
• - :i '• i
mi t i
;
A 1 pi * I-
8 '• i
v T w *|A..' «» 1 1T*
8
Vi
1 v?;“ i v
V .« »WI V
*
t '. <* 1
1 :i;;8 TTT
8
5
8H R
ia««
. .
1
Maintenance Check Display

8
6
|/*MWNIt;HMiK?E C H E C K
Pil*.' Wrdcw Hob
o. m w r n m j c i OTCK aiti.1 (»l pxmoua ana;
trot.
lSOp-HJfS' CHECK .1TOK 1 18 ELI 1593.. 6. A
3000
0C0-WS CHECK . 3TEH2 H82LJ 1998. 6. 4
'
c
l CHECK'GUIDE ’ BAY 1.18 2L1 1993. C. A
tUB-ou- 6;
CHICK BHMDiG
1
I382LJ L953. C . 4
LUB-OIL
3- CHICK COOldlTI XZVEL I102L] . 1593. C . 4
0
Function CHAN f 1 1821] .1993,. C. 4

c o o i jj r i j i ir z K .
.
_o
CHECK- aar- LcvEi t;; f I192L) . 1993. C. 1
IH CHIP SUCKl’T • 0
am.HicHnajioÿRU i 118 2L] L993. C . 4
'
• P riodic check of items : . [.m 0:i 'l999/p5>3C . '34147

. ri/~2'±i
fv.- SOI |Z0 Orpa )*V/ O.OClu/iU) K V.-f'-v;;
Last date of check OSITION DliGUOS

. .
if m Lonuiewi
mu
that has elapsed since the last Check
Machine function continues, even af er the display of time

elapsed exceeds the target time
2 pages, 8 lines each, 16 items total

i
i »k
\t
I HC* *• •
o. JlXHTEHftJWCe CHECK D AT A IM E <H) PREVIOUS CHECK

5
: 1500
QO-fiKS CHECK ITEMS 101] 2005. 1 0. 3 1
I 000-fcfcS CHECK ITEMS

VV
00 0
101] 2005. 10 . 3 1
f
l
I
5 * 1500
l 1 l 101] 2005. 10 . 3 1
I
£
1500
;*
m •0
i io n 2005. 10 . 3 1
%
l 101] 2005. 1 0 . 3 1
:=
0
v t 1°1] 2005.10. 3 1
I 0
I
CD v.;
— I 1013
1.
2 0 0 5 . 10 . 3 1
I
o
6 1 101] 2 0 0 5 . 10 . 3 1
I
1/ 2 -iJ - \
Ij
; M 0 2005/10/31 - 1 0 : 2 3 : 5 7 l
V \/ 0’s Iff 7 5 Owin'1 VW'- 07*m/j»in
s i
:
l’OSXTXOJI D1A0W0S - LOHGTCRW
1
''. DATA
i
Operation Procedure : Display selector key DIAGNOS — > MAINTEN CHECK
187
; W
His
File Hr*.
ISOO-BRS CHECK ITEMS

HO
1 II
18
19
20
5 21
22
7 23
8 24
25
10 26
11 27
12 2B
13 29
14 30 o ?: /ÿ
15 31
16 32
1/ 2
1
;
ir s o' 2005/10/31 1 0 : 4 ; 06
0>» . .0? TSOBIJII 1 VAA Owm/nin
POSIT.tOH DtACHOS
PRTA
DIAGNOS -->
Operation Procedure : Display selector key -->
MEINTEN CHECK -> LONGTERM DATA
188
'itnn'TR u
Mazatrol Fusion 640M MAINTENANCE CHECK Dtspl-ay
Function:
• Pertodls cfleet Herrs. the lasl dale of sheeting. and ti e time that has elapsed since ine I3&1
dsie or cPEcv.lr-g are displayed.
• Periodls e l e c t Items car ba regls'.arec.
£8.173 rtf-S:
Tne machine will net stop even rT:ne display df die. time wfclsh: has elapsed since tne lastdate oT
checking exc-aecs 'fie target lime.
Data display
1. Displayed data
P WMBTCH*JKige OUECK m
FJ« ..*#W=W Hflp
Ho, ILkTfTtllTAJfC CB1CK UAtA. . TOT&lHJj PJvI 71 D VS 5 HIC K
WE B
i
i
r
I ;t4i : I
%
1 Pd : 1
it; I
a S i; m m
1
s m ili %
iÿmm
i
I:
f)
m m m;
»«» W4V«V>iV4MMm .
Hi j~ i jggvff/ jiggfe
».
L.
w i&et EUSHH ESZEEBHH A-,

1
D725S1CB3S
2. Display data description
Me. tem Ur It Data desedpflon

n c-. CAficK number
HA-IMTUCrvHCE.
3 Hvr# or a e«rti>:l- cr«3 Rem
CM to: HAT*
3 iM t Graph k:a; repreggnlaton cf ire rate et 1h» currer, Brr-e la Bre targe l. rm e
• il Targcl irne aur Target fmt for the rxf.DO'c chxK HOT
1
8 53 CuTcnUme Hru’ CuTcrTt BmsfcfUiepenca'c chscK Itesa
9
S3 REV30US OJZCK 'V M. 0 The art da% cf periodic cire-rt Hem
PJ<;C Page number
3. Registering the data for regular check itei
1
9
0 A. Presetting, the target time or the current time
f 1) Moÿ/e the cursor to r.he data item sstiere data is to c<= preset.
(2‘f Enter ‘me.

Example: Specify fc90 and press ihe INPUT icey to input 90 .
Note: Entry cf toe current time updates the date of date item [5] (PREVIOUS CHECKS
Data display for Cong-term check items (1500 and 3000 hours check items)
1. Displayed data
CHECK Pi
Fib H«]p •;
1SD0-HJS CHECK IJLHS

Kto- /'ÿ
1 IT.
2 ii'
3
i CD
>•
S ti'
*5
VI S2J Ilf 123
LO u
It ZT
IS 2D
L3 m
U. $0
LS £'*31 V
LG - DE¬
r;a~d
i ftJsTfl f is3®?B5?as ; neiia'

w lfitil m luu* |W
07355-1:0692.
a. MfifB U.Tit. Data descrpUon.

£i; e . Cfteclc numa-r
K Check terns -oca terra ensefc Hsre.-

a; Fat* Fags minber
Maintenance Check Display
Display operations
The display status of cata item will reverse when- the oirrent time reaches the target, time. After
a:m per.cn of checking. rr ÿ the cursor to No.” using the cursor key and then press the INPUT
key. The display cf data item will then return from the .reverse status to Che rarmac status.
Entry of the check items to be displayed
The check items to fee displayed cannot be entered directly on the MAINTENANCE CHECK
display. This subsea cn cescrbes the procedure for adding cr deleting the check items to be
displayed.
1 ) Save the factory-set data cf display items beforehand into the file.
21 Execute the File Write function to create a file under the specified directory (see Item 2
below).
3) Edit the text file as required l see hen 1 betcw).
*5) Execute the File Read function tc fetch the data onto the display (see Item 2 below).
1. Registering the data of the check itemrs
Using a comnerciavy aval able edrtcr. open the text fi© of the folcwng format under the
spec flee directory tom 64mdstai engVnai rnenan ce.txt ).
(urcon] ; .n*stf*rof c-en'cai-c cr,czv. terns'

.Cc'ur-enr Vn»
i, CHECK -JUICE V&Y LUB-OIL
2-4,
rail IS ] ; n'es*ar Zff ate c£ ,Tdm z
I.CKAHJE HVDFJtULIC UNIT OIL
32.
[TW13-0]; Weakerof KtC-nrs cnec*.terns
1, CHECK HACHItfE LEVEL
32 ,
Note: “eng' in the directory name cone spends with the language currently selected for the
1 display mate.
9
1
\
M aintenance Check Display
1
9
2
Entry of the check items to be displayed
A. Dataformat of the periodic check items
[urconj P-ixic-ali-s ebacÿb icinto - lJp to 24 items can be registered.

1, -TÿE-TT:
ma WAY LUP-OTL
- Se t the description after the serial number and
comma.
24
Note: The description can oonsst of up to 4D characters (a two-byte code is counted as two
characters). Excess items or characters will be ignored.
B. Data form at of the lo ng-term ched items
[insllS] r h*c c it. ana - Up to 32 items cam: be registered.

l, • : m> ?eg HSHE53JLI£ SSSU. OIL
- Set the description alter the serial number and
comma.
22
[BSil-Q] SCOO-hr* c Ic
2,. CHECK WACKIKE LEVEL
22 ,
Note: Th e description can consist of up to 40 characters {a two-byte code is counted as two

characters). Excess items or characters will be ignored.
2* Read and Write of check items’ text file
__
A> the check items presented cn the MAINTENANCE CHECK display can be read in from, and'
written into, the specified text file. Use a commercially avaBable ed&ar to prepare a text file
ccnlainirÿi the desired check items t o b e r ea d m and presented cn the display.
A. File Read
Using a commercially available edftar< prepays a text file (containing the desired check items}
and copy it into the specified cirecsory.
j&>MAIMTEHAN6ECHECK
Film
iu7 My,
File ftead
Filÿhoi zazcic.z
Select the option 'File Reac through the item Tile cn Ihe menu bar to start data loading. The
contents thus reaa In vrill be displayed as shown betow upon completion of loading.
:/«iMiinewawe cure*
Fib- Vrxlcw h.fc ssmÿ '•
- -
' smm
'
wamnifle* DtECj-riiti. .TIJIl
S2s;’*;-v
].POD.-}i0aÿHi.(;>tv;iTia5;
m VN*.
_ i ,
rHECXCUIOl-.WTf ‘
,
Syy.-:
$£Sx).
m >&y:
2- CB20t.SPI«l,n -v- : ;f •
S
LOT.-OItÿ:: : ; •
.
0
' -t: ‘ ”7
: -31’-”
;E
-;:b
Vst
mmm ,' : ; m lit
.. ..
..----3:
B. Rle Write
Select the option Tile Write through the item Tile' on the nvsnu bar to save the display data.
A text file containing the current display data will be created under the specified directory.
yfeMAIttfrewroE CHECK
filu, WrÿsTl-ksIp •.ÿ•?ÿ
1
9
H~d-”v fisrirar
3
r
194
r*
'IY,'-'. V.'I'I VI'. Vi‘:V.'\ AMAMM .NA'.'I W AVA\\VA\WAÿYÿWÿÿSWjNSÿÿV
I mMm
F
SMU£322S.*-..ÿY__ r '
.. _/.....,- || „ . - OY « Y v . • , j t .' J
Gs&gggi
r*
y
* L; - r
»
:h Vfafort IV&
r
ronfT UtHE/riCE/3D | C O /ISO sen LIWT | S XS TC K< 1I 5U I) T UR KISC HKMTHE TU S SCLJD i
\
I >
;
D25 f
I 1 30 5 04 9 0 D73 30 0 D97 00000000 0121 j 0
i
2 0 D26 2 D50 0 D7 4 } 50 0 D98 00000000 D122 I 0
>
:
i
$ 3 D2 7 0 D51 D7 5 I 1000 D99 00000000 D123 j 0 s
04 0 D20 05 2 O 97 6 10 DlCO OOOOOOOQ 01241j 0 1
v i
5 0 029] 05 3 0 07 7 i 50 0101 00000000 0125 j 0
6 03 0 054 D7B 3 D102 00000000 0126 0
I ? 03 1 0 05 5 D7 9 1 20 D103 00000000 D127 0
::
8 32 D32 3 05 6 0 DB O : I
20 0 D104 oooooooo D128 0 5
f) 45 D3 3 5 05 7 0 DB1] 50 0 D105 oooooooo 0129 0 \

34 oooooooo I
IO 3 0 05 8 0 DQ 2 j 70 0 D106 0130} 0 5
t
-
ll 0 D35 20 05 9 0 DB3] 0 D107 oooooooo D131J 0 I
:
[ 12 5 03 6 100 06 0 0 98 4 0 D108 OOOOOOOO 0132
0133|
1 0
l \
13
14
10
3
37
3B
100
2
D61
06 2
0 OB 5 1
DB O 1 0
0109
0110 0 0134 |
0
0 I
15 5 D3$ 20 D63 0 DB 7
I
0 Dill 0 0135| 0 :
I 16 D40 2 D64 0 DB8 j 0 D112 D136| 0

i
17 0 D4 1 0 06 5 0 D89 j 0 D113 0 D137 j 0
10 9 42 0 06 6 0 D90 j 0 D114 0 D13B 5 0
:: 19 2 94 3 3 2 D67 09 1| 11110001 D ll 5 0 0139 0 t
20 60 94 4 1 0 96 0 0 D92 j 00001111 0116 0 D140 j 0
21 6 94 5 I 10 0 06 9 D93 j OOOOOOOO 0117 0 0X41 : o
:
I I 22 0 94 6| 10 0 07 0 0 D94 | OOOOOOOO DU B 0 D142 j O .
1
Z3 D47 D7 l D9 5 j OOOOOOOO D119 0143 i
:
o
1 24 04 8|
10 0
0 D72
0
D96 - OOOOOOOO D120 0 0144] o
i
:
I
1
1
]
M , ;i»; i 3 : 5 3
i \j\j 5Q% sinr Omin WA
:ÿ
0*u*i/nin
\
i
3 OlH'7 LX H , FACE EIA/X30 so n SYSTEM V TV AM .me MACH me SOLID P tc MACH1HE
ID) 3 0 [£ J m Z.3MXtriX] [SU] ITC] TXM£ ISO] PARIIM- PAFAM. <
:
: t
>
w* m f mmmemmm ÿ. JMU.WJ
A'.'.';.VW/WWWWW
Operation Procedure : Display selector key --> PAPJy>vl POINT
195
iVi*yYAV»‘»‘>v‘.y»yr*
® s» •
:-.
fm . Vfafcri .C--:->V.-r
.
EA'asa: l J3ILE CSH. WKRP iXH> VEL. TDC cmcr- SMOTHER | SrjHOLE I B2KWER
f.
K1 0 K25 0 yX49 K73 00000111 y:)'.KSlÿ] £0 0 < > K121 0 i

I K2 500 K26 0 #: K50 0 I; K7 4 0 K9B *00< > K122 0 i
•- :
V
: 3 0 K27 o f; x 5 i 0 :: K75 0 K99 £4 2 K123 0
• '\K4 ; 9 K20 0 KS2 0 K76 O A K100 £5A<Z> K124 0 ;

f
i K5 4 K29 :• A K53 O K77 0 K101 *5B<X:> '><125 0 i
#
<
K6 80 K30 o ':y-k$4 O K7$ 0 IC102 Q 0 10 0000 0
K7 0 X S5 O K79 o icio3 ooooiooo ;KI27 0 i
*8 0 K32 0 X56 7;:. K80 0 K104 00 00 0 00 0 K128 o
: K9 0 -:K33.: 0 X5 7 o l- Kdi 0 KlOS 00000010 XI29 0 i
I
K10 0 ;'J :K34 j 0 $:;X58 0 K82 K106 10001000 K130 0
•:
ll 0 j;. ¥3 5 | 0 X59 0 83 0 K107 10100000 K131 0
> K12 0 , K36 | 0 X60 K84 0 K108 0 §• : K132 0
;
K13 30 K37 | 2000 K61 1 KB 5 0 K1Q9 0 X133 0
14 2000 K33 O K6 2 1 Kfi$ KUO 0 K134 0 S
K15 30 K39 O K6 3 K87 0 Kill 0 y X135 0 ;
s
i 2000 K4 0 K64 K08 0 k ii 2 0 K136 0 :
i
£
5
K1V
K18
19 1000
25
50
K43
K4 X
K42
12 0
12 0
12 0
-:ÿk66
K65
K67
j
j
1
i
1
:--m&
K8 9
K91
10 0
0
8ft
K115
0
0
K138
K139
0
0
20 1000 X44 12 0 X6B 00000000 K92 0 KllS 0 *140 0
:
-
21 10 0 X45 12 0 K6 9 00000001 K93 2 V/ K1.17 0 XI 41 0
22 1 ...;V-V46 0 K7 0 00000011 4*94 IOO< > V; K118 0 K142 0 v.y. V;
' ;
K2 3 1 K47 0 K ll 00000111 K95 10001000 K119 0 Cviu.43 0 :
0 K4 8 IC96 120 XI 4 4 0
\
.. . K24 0 K72 00000111 10000000 0
i
HVS 0 2005/11/01 13; 24 : 57

1'.
|/ W 100% i- ifr 7 SOinin’1 Qxn/min %s.3
-
.* • • * * > » .VA If k*-.'
- i
l
MKA50RC TABtE WACKO PECO xiWBV,-:. ANOTHER SÿXWOXE USER
[KJ [1ÿ1 m V£L. JH ) COHSXIMJ S\ m {SA1 i: . |BA] PAKAM. 2AKAI1-
I ;V ;;'iV
mm miiujjxiw V.VMV.VM’-'-VXV.WAV/.V.W//.',”
Operation Procedure : Display selector key --> PARAM -->

DLA. CHINE PARAM. IvIEASURE
196
:
I n?
V: \
J F.S
|
TXH s j KL KB
{
$ J
urn j 30 TXM25 0 TIM49 00 T1M73 50 TXM97 0 TXM121 0 TXM145 j 0

TIM?
TIM3
:
Ii
30
50
TIM26
TIM27
0
0
TIM50
TIM51
0
0
TIM74
TIM75
0
SO
TIM98
TIM99
0
0
TIM122
TIK123
0
0
TXM146
TIM147
J j 0
i
TXH4 j 20 TIM2B 0 TXX52 0 TIM76 50 TIM100 0 THH24 0 TIMldd o
TIMS | 20 TIM2J> 0 TIW53 0 TIM77 60 0 T1M10X 0 TIKI 2 5 0 TIM149
;
o
TIM6 i 20 0 TDflO 30 TIM54 0 TIM78 30 TIM102 0 TIM126 0 TH4150 0
TIM7 20 TIM31 30 TIMS 5 0 TIM79 60 TXM103 0 TIM127 0 TIMlSlj 0
TIM8 : 100 TIM32 30 TIM56 1 0 T2M80 0 TIM104 0 TXM12B 0 TJM152 o
:
TIW9 | 20 TIM33 30 TXH57 0 T3M81 P T1M105 0 TIM129 o rmx 53 o i
TJMlO j 30 0 TIM34 30 0 TIM50 10 TIM82 0 TIM106 0 TIM130 0 TIM154 0

TIMll j 15 0 TH<£35 3600 TTM59j 10 TIM83 0 TXM107 0 TIM131 0 TTM155 0 :
TXMl? } 30 0 T3M36 20 T3M60
1 10 T3M84 0 TXMlOB 0 TIH132 0 T1M156 0
: TXMI3 fJ 1.50 XIH37 600 TXM61 10 TDW05 0 TXM109 0 T3DMI33 o tmisi 0

TIM14 | 50 TIH30 10000 TIM62 70 TIM06 0 TIM110 0 TIM134 P TIM150 o
c
TIMlS 1000 T3M39 10 T3M63 1 10 THI87 0 TIM111 0 TIM135 0 TIM1S9 0
I i
TIMI6 0 TIM40 15 T3M64 0 TXW88 0 TIM112 0 TIM136 O TIM160 j
nmxi : 0 TXM41 10 TXM65 0 TIM89 0 TXM113 j 0 TXM137 0 TXM161 o
Tima i 1 TIM42 15 TIM66 0 TIM90 0 TIM114 0 TIM138 0 TJM162 0
i
TIM19 j 70 TIM43 600 TIM67 0 TIM91 0 TXM115 j 0 TIM139 0 TIM163 0
TIM20 100 TIM44 1800 T3M68 5 10 T3M92 0 TXMH6 j 0 TIM140 0 TIH164 I 0
I TTK141I
;
TIM21 4 TXH45 60 0 TXM69 10 TTM93 0 TTMIX7 | O O T1X165 0
:
TXM22 0 TIM46 3000 TIM70; 0 TXM94 0 TXM110 0 TIMll2 j 0 T1M166 0 •:
I
TIM23 0 TIM47 10 0 TIM71 0 TIM95 0 TIMll ) 0 TIMl43i 0 T 1X167 0
TIM24 3 T3M4B 50 TIM / 2 50 TIM96 0 TIM120 0 TIM144 j O TIM168 0 <
t
i :
i
gmspr 10 ; 1 5 ; 50 i•:
1 50% ljS3) drain* vwr~ Omro/saiit
:
SER MftCttlitE
TIM] IRS] [RX.J [«»]
:
Operation Procedure : Display selector ke y --> PARAM

PLC PARAMETER - > TIM
197
5 5
7. T
MS
fi* \f** VftVKkr, H*ÿ>
?
$
HC « DIRECTORY: »
i
ROGRAM
?i
r
I
PROGRAM
— m\ f
l
#| : Ji
*
| '
:
i
1 i :
i I
;
I ;
AVE 1 i
l \ 1 \
:
\
i I
i
V
i \
I
I
:
I I
9 1 Jfi l
§
T - OTHER DATA
>
I ] ?
l
T \
i :<
\
I I *.-ÿ•.*:• • \-L~ Jr-sr.ÿr* -T-J.
i
i
i
;200S/ja/15 jwYss *
I
1
IfPS-O 35
I
*
BB3SMB— /<M ioo%
i
i
ARD WM )
MSK
ii$fi FLOPPY TAPE CMT CA H DATA
swe
sI
5
---- —
5
.«• -»•ÿ-—
--- ----
--- - ------
»« •
--
’-»-—•
---
-ÿ -«» • - dJ 5
198
199
200
y.y;.\-.-.\ .. .vN>.; •ÿW S>>KSS>
POSITION PR2J H*
rite Ym* Settp Window Hefc
POSITION BUFFER NEXT COMMAND \
WHO , US
xi 0 . XI 0 . G ( ) < )
0. Y 0. M UNO, Qj *,
0 ~ 0
21 w4 . 5 21 0. T
0. B . COUNTER ot 0)
l . l 0. NEXT COMMAND LO W <MODAL IOW >
X2 13.30 2 6. G S 0 F 0* M 0
Z2 15.14567 Z2 0. M 0 G 18 G G 23 G 98 G 20 G 40
C2 0. C’2 0 , T G G 80 G G 65 3 5 . G 64
0. w 0. 68 G 67 G €9.56 97 6123 G
6123.16111 &5Q , 2 €1.13 613.1
MACHINE REMAIN OFFSET LOW i
Q xx . I 0, z 4, S . i
Q o. 0. C 0. ;
Q zi 0 . Zl 0. t*. SPDL 0 MXN’1 10 0 20 0

9 B 0. 0. 
.
0 FT /MIN M, iPDIi
o M o r 1 T.r SPDL Ij
0
0 cl 0. l 0. T SPBLl 0
Q X2 0 . X2 0. <1> 0 FT /MIN
9 22 0. 22 0. T, SPDL2 o Miir1 T *• BWBL 2\ 0
0 C2 , C2 0. <15 0 FT /MIN Xl-lixj 0
Q w 0. 0. YrUX | 0
EE D 0* IN /MIN 0
No , 1B - ->-> TNo . 0 MRGAZNPKHo. 12 0. Xftf/REY 8 -AX
( GENERAL OUT ) < ) ( 0* * /min
Cl-ftxj 0
LOW 10 8 Cl 0, *
/min
NIT : < C2 *
/min X2-AX 0
LOW 0. IN /MIN Z2-AX
0» IM/REV C2-AX| 0
w'tr
W-AX | 8
m\
E1 «El:Z006/12/13 69:44:27
m
:
\J o%
O.
prn iVWo.Ot
s
in /min • tvw W/A' y-yff * •/?,
POSITION SET UP PROGRAM TOOL C-COHD. PARAM DIAGNOS DATA TOOL DISPLAY
INFO, ATA I/O LAYOUT MAP
2
0
1
Select DIAGNOS
/• DIAGNOSiSjUSW) M Wm. FV
''
2 pile View Setup WirxizM Help

0
2 .
;aLWi W*iRM KISTOEOT i PLC SIGNAL
o, LARM MESSAGE HEAD DATE TIME TYPE
• V?
,I
/Yr 0% 0 rpm VV\A 0 , 00 in /min
ERSION LARM ALARM LC XIHHIHG GRAPHIC. DATA ACCCTMU ,
ISTORY IGNAL CHECK ONTROL MAINTE . ERASE TIME
Select VERSION
Jlmmmmm Wmlm P§|| l§ •<&£ m
Fie Winejgwi Help
VERSION ; DIAGNOSIS iJONITOR j OPTION j SERVO MONITOR | SPIKDLE MONITOR j KiRD-VOlKE WDHITGR
UNIT FCU7-MA513-22 SERIAL M73682107 61 MODEL FC&750RY-NQ3
j
ITEM VERS ION ITEM VERSION MOTOR MACHINE ITEM VERSION
MAIM -A 10O1WOO0-B4A SRV-Xl ( ) < ) J2CT-1
MAIN-B 1001W001-BO SRV-Y ( ) {
> J2CT-2
LG -ENG 1001W011-BO SRV-Zl < ) ( ) J2CT-3
LADDER-F 1001W37 4 - A1310 SRV-B < > ( > J2CT-4
—
LAD D£ R S 1001W37 4 - A1310 SRV-C1 ) < > J2CT-5
LGPENG I001W011- BRV-X2 ) < J2CT-6
37 4A1300 2 8RV-Z2 ( ( ) J2CT-7
SRV-C2 ( ) { > J2CT-8
SRV-W ( ) ( > J2CT-9
SRV-10 ) ( ) J2CT-10
SRV-11 ( ) ( ) J2CT-11
SRV-12 ( > ( } J2CT-12
SRV-13 < ) ( > J2CT-13
SRV-14 ) ( ) J2CT-14
SU V IS ) ( >
SRV-16 )
< >
SPN-1 < > { >
SPN-2 ) ( i
SPM-3 ) ( }
SPN-4 < ) ( )
SFN-5 ) < y
SPN-6 ) ( )
SPM-7 ) < >
: SPH-B ) < >
ll m TPS 0 2006/12/13 09:44:55

-i s
h •» i ID Or pm :\AM o . 00 in /min II
DIAGHOS V ERSIO N DIAGNOS PTION SERVO SPINDLE HARDWARE LADDER
2
0
3
Select DIAGNOS MONITOR
gggaa;
2 File Window Help

0
4 i VERSIQH MACHOS IS MBflTOft j OPTION SERVO MONITOR | SPTtffiLE MONITOR j HARDWARE ICOIIITGE.
MEMORY MONITOR 0ISP I/O MONITOR I) ISP t/ o nmttm n t s p

ADDRESS
76543210 HEX ADR35 FEDCEA98765432I0 HEX SHORT LONG xm%% wx SHORT WWG
1 KKOOOOOOOO oaoooooo 00 XGQ510 OOOOODOOOOODOOOO 0000 o TOO 11 0 aaloooolaloooaal 2 111 8513 8513
KKOOOGODD1 oooooooo 00 X00520 oooooooooooooooo 0000 TOO 120 OQDDOOOOODOOOQOD 0000 G
KHOOOOO0O2 csaoooooo DO X005 3O ocscicic>e‘DOOQec?CidJCj<3 BOQG TOO eoÿOOOO<MWob'OQ l»& 0000 Q -mzomsm
I KK00000003 00000000 00 XQ054Q 0 0 0 0 ODDOOO DDQOQO 0000 0 TQ0140 t l r n n t l & Q a o o m Q CF00 ~t 2W
DDRESS 76543210 HEX ARR33 FEDCBA96‘765432 10 HEX SHORT MJWG XWm T&VG$MSW?G5*$ZIQ MX SHORT to m
j KKOOOOOOOO OOODOOOO 00 XOOIQO oooo DO lo IO-OOOD 11 0283 43 43 TOO 3 40 oootsoo0OODOOoid<fO 0000 0 Q
j KHOOOOODOl OO&OOOOO 00 X00110 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 D000 T003SD OOOOOOOOOGOOCIOOO 0000 0
KKOOOQ00O2 g o o D D C i o o 00 X003.2Q ooooooooooftooood 0000 Q TOO 3 60 O«moOOOOMdO i»N»0 oooo Q 0
KKOOOO0GO3 00000000 00 XOO130 oooooooooooooooo 0000 0 TO O 3 70 OOOOOOCIOÿOOOOOOD 0005
DDRESS 76543210 HEX A D R 5 5 FEDCSA98765432I0 HEX SHORT L<MQ IB RSS F EDGE A98?6543310 HEX SHORT LONG
i
KKOOOOOOOO O Q O O O O O Q 00 X00140 oooooooooo-oooooo 0000 0 -2147463648 TOO0OO o c N ÿ o o o o o o l o o o l11 0047 71 71
j KHOOOOODOl oaoooooo DO XD0150 looooooooo oooooo 6000 -32768 T0001D OO*DOOOOOODOOQC)00 0000 0
I KKOOOOOGD2 00000000 oo XOO 1 6 D 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 DODO a o wmZQ OOOO u Q
KK00009003 oaoooooo 00 X 00170 oooo C'Oooooo:D oooo 0000 0 TOO 03 0 a o o o o o o o o - o o o o c i o o 0000 0
DDRESS 76543210 HEX ADRSS FEDCEA987654321D HEX SHORT L-mo kms% FEDCHA987654S21P HEX SHORT LW 3
| KKOOOOOOOO oaoooooo GO 3301040 0000000000000000 DOOO 0 ¥00530 aoooooooDoooQoao 0000 M 0
KHOOOaOOOl oaoooooo 00 HO 10 5 6 oooaaoooooaooooQ DODO a TOOB40 oaaoooooooooooao OOOO o
KH0QQ00D02 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 H01072 aoooaaooooaoooaa oooo o a ¥00650 0000000000000000 O O O O O 0
HHOOOO00O3 oaoooooo 00 330108© ooooaoooooaooooo OOOO 0 ¥00860 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 GOOD 9
f
; MEMORY MONITOR If RITE I/O MONITOR WRITE

AD D RESS 7 6 $4.3 2 10 HEX A D R3 8 F ED C BA987 65432 id HEX SHORT LONG
I KHOOOQOOOO oooooooo DO R02 100 oooaoooooaaooooo DOOO 0
P02101 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 OOOO Q
:
f
DB 1 W 0 2006/12/13 I
09:45:13
\f \ 0% ~sTT[o Or pm VV\A 0 . 00 lw /min I

IAGNG5 VERSION DIAGNOS OPT io n SERVO SPXHDLE HARDWARE LADDER
HO HIT OR MONITOR M ONITOR M ONITOR MONITOR

RWMMj
POSITION [TR2] WM
wswmttm vmm
fife Vew Setup Window Hep
OSITION BUFFER NEXT COMMAND i WMÿTM

xl 0 . XI 0. < ) < )
0. Y 0. M mro, 0 0 “ 0
21 -4.5 21 0, T
0, 8 0, COUNTER 0( 05
l . l 0. NEXT COMMAND LO W <MOOflX LOW >
X2 1 3 . 38 X2 0. S 0 F 0. H 0
22 15.14567 22 0. M : G 0 G 18 G G 23 G 98 G 20 G 40
:
C2 0. C2 0. T G 80 G G G 53 . 5 G 64
0. w 0. G 68 G 67 G 69.5G 97 G123 G
G123 . XG1X1 <350 .« 2 G113 G13.1
MACHINE REMAIN OFFSET LOW
0 xi . XI 0. z 4,5
® 1 0. 0, C 0,
Q Zl 0. Zl 0. , SPDL 0 MXN'1 0 10 0 200
? B 0. 0. <15 0 FT/MIN Mt RPDL 0
0 cl 0. Cl o. T, SPDLl 0 MXJT1
Tv SPDL Xi 0
0 X2 0. X2 0. <15 0 FT/MXH
T * SJPDL 2] 0
0 Z2 0, Z2 O r T . 8PDL2 0 MI N ”1
0
0 C2 , 2 0 V <15 0 FT /MIN
0 W O. 0, Y~*« 0
EE D 0, IM/MIN l- 0
TNo. IB - 0 >-> TNo, 0 MAGAZHPKHo* 12 O. IH/REY ~AX 0
(GENERAL OUT ) ( ) < ) * * /min
Cl-AX 0
LOT 10 8 o i ci 0* * /min
0
T
NIT ) C2 0. *
/min
LOW O. IN /MIN Z2-AX] 0
0» IN/REV C2 - 0
-AX 0
r
n il P *BS 0 2006/12/13 09; 44 : 27
D rpm vWo.ooin /min

POSITION SET UP PROGRAM TOOL C-COKD , PARAM D IAG NOS DATA TOOL DISPLAY
INFO. DATA I/O LAYOUT MAP
2
In the 1131 Mode
0
5
Select DIAGNOS
/' DIAGNQSISflJSER)
2 Bte View Setup Window Help
0
6 j iLfcUM :j ftLftRM KISIGHY j FLC SIGTOL j
NO. ALARM MESSAGE HEAD DATE TIME TYPE
&
’;
:
m TPS 0 2006/12/13 09:44:40
% MB rpm VV\A o . 00 in /min

i
ERSION ALARM ALARM PLC MAINTEN RUNNING GRAPHIC DATA ACCOMU *
HISTORY SIGNAL HECK CONTROL MAINTE . ERASE TIME
Select VERSION
mm
fi :fl<y
Rl? Window Hgfe?
I VERSION i DIAGNOSIS KOHITQP. OPTION i SERVO MONITOR f S yr WLE MONITOR I K&HDVaRE KQHITOR
:
‘
H IT fan -ms 13-22 ERIAL M73682I07 61 MODEL FC&7509Y~lf03
\
TEM VERS ION ITEM VERSION MOTOR MACHINE ITEM VERSION

MAIN- A 1OO1WOO0-B4A SRV-X1 < ) ) J2CT-1
MAIN-B 1001W001-B0 SRV-Y ) < > J2CT-2
LG -ENG 1Q01W0 11-BO SRV-Zl ( ) c J2CT-3
LABDER-F 10G1W37 4 - A131Q SRV-B > ( j J2CT-4
LADDER- B 10011937 4 - A1310 SRV-C1 > { > J2CT-5
LORE NO 001W011- SEV-X2 > i > J2CT-6
374A23QQ 2 8RV-ZZ C ) £ ) J2CT-7
Model 0373GM03300 SRV-C2 ( ) £ ) J2CT-8
S SRV-W ) £ > J2CT-9
;
SRV-10 ) £ > J2CT-10
SRV-11 ( ) < ) J2CTr-.ll
SRV-12 ) £ J2CT-12
;
SRV— 13 ) £ ) 4J2CT-13
8RV-14 ) £ > J2CT-14
SRV’-' IS ) £ )
SRV-16 ) £ )
SPN-1 ) ( )
SPN-2 > £ )
) £ >
SFtf-4 ) £ )
SEN- 5 < ) £ )
SRN~6 £ ) £ >
SPN-7 ) £ J
SPN-B ) £ )
m TPS 0 2006/12/13 0 9 : 4 5 : 55
\KJt 0% Tf(a Orpm V# 0 . 0 0 ill /min v :-S

J*
VERSION IAGN0S OPTION SERVO PINDLE HARDWARE LADDER VERSION
ONITOR ONITOR MONITOR MONITOR MONITOR
2
0
7
he other VERSION will no w appear ( one way yo u know yo u are IN t he 1 13 1 mode)
Select DIAGNOS MONITOR

-m*
/'DUMTO'UKff'' .... m
2 Fil- Window He|p
0
8 I VERSION M&SH0SIS MONITOR j OPTION I SERVO MHJITOR SPINDLE MHUTOR 1 KSRtrtraRE KOHITOR
’
HE KORY HON I TOR D1SP I/O KCNITOR DISF I/O HOWltOR PISF
ADDRESS 765432 10 HEX ADR3S FED€§A9876S4321C HEX' SHORT Larc APRS? FEW: W£*7$543210 HEX SHORT LCW
KHOOOOOOOO o a c o Q O Q Q 00 XOO-SIO ooaooooooooooooo 0000 0 0 TOO 10 ooloooololoooool 2111 8513 8513
:
HHD0000B01 O€5-000000 00 X0Q520 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0000 a TOO12 0 0 * 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 OD 000 0 D
| KHOOOQODP2 ao oooooo 00 XOQ530 oooaÿDpdOdOooao 0000 0 a TOO 13 0 3CKrooO$0$toQOOCM»i& 000P 0 -8220835i4
I HHQOO00OO3 oooooooo 00 HOO540 oa a a ©0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0000 0 100140 l l o o l U l a o o o o Q ÿ D CFO0. ?12544
ADDRESS 76543210 HEX ADR3S EEX'CE A98765432 10 HEX SHORT CWQ ma m TWQBtsmmwzm HEX SHORT mm
| KHOOOOOOOO o 3 o o o o o o 00 XOOlQO oooooo lo lo o ODD11 0283 643 643 YQ034Q OQ oooooQOooooGioo OOOO 0 0
j KHOOOOOQOl OOQOOOOO 00 X00110 oooooooooooooooo oooa 0 TOO 3 50 OODOOOOQOOOOOOOO 0000 0
j KKOOGGQOG2 00000000 00 3CQOUO ooQQ0>OQ0Od$$QO09 0000 Q a TQ03 §0 mmmamwomw QQQQ 0 0
} KHOQOO0QO3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 XOO 130 oooooooooooooooo 0000 0 TOO 3 70 OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOD 0000
ADDRESS 76543210 HEX AD PS 5 EEDCBA987 65432 10 HEX SHORT m w ADRSS F:EPCB&987&54'3 2 IP HEX SHORT mm
j KHOOOOOOOO Q O O O 0 0 O O 00 HO G 1 40 oooooooooooooooo 0000 0 -2147483648 TOODOO 000000000 00 01 1:1 0047 71 71
| KHOOOOOQOL oaoooooo 00 1500150- lo oo 0-00000 a 0 0 0 0 0 8000 -32768 TO0D.1O 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0000 0
| KHQOOQQQ02 o a & P o o d d 00 XD016O 000000000000000a 0000 0 0 Y 0 0 Q 2 0 0000000000000000 GOOD 0 0
I KHOOOOOOOO 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 XOG170 oooooooooooooooo 0000 0 TO0O9O 00 0 0 0 0 0 0 a 0 0 0 0 0 o o 0000
ADDRESS 765432 10 HEX APR3S FEPC8A987 65432 10 HEX SHORT mm AD ESS FEDCBASP76543210 HEX SHORT hO m
j KHOOOOOGQO 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 HO 10 40 oooooooooooooooo 0000 0 0 70083 0 00000000 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0000 0 0
| KHOOOOOQOl OOOOOOOO 00 HO 10 5 6 oooooooooooooooo 0000 a Y00840 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 * 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Oado 0
| KH000000D2 daooOoOO 00 HO IQ 7 2 0000 0000 a T0O850 OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO OQQO 0 0
I KH00QD00G3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 HO 108 8 oooooooooooooooo 0000 TQ086O oooooooooooooooo 0000 0
:
HE KORY KON I TOR WRITE I/O KONTTOR WRITE
ADDRESS 76543210 HEX ADRSS r£DCBA9876S43210 HEX SHORT LCN&
I KHOOOOOOOO 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 £02100 oooooooooooooooo 0000
R02 2Q1 OOOOÿOOOOOO-OOOOd 0000 Q
0
I
.. i'>/>W <»ÿ rf vW'
v 1 v> • »
•
V
*
flHk US 2006/12/13 109:46:52

i
I
H 1 i]D • Or pm :VW 0 , 0 Gin /min : •

I
r
DIAGHOS VERSION BIAGNQS OPTION SERVO SPINDLE HARDWARE LADDER WHITE:
MONITOR ONITOR M ONITO R M ONITOR M ON ITOR WRITE CANCEL
Now the I/O WRITE & W RIT E CANCEL appears

9 POSITION (TR1J
F?le View Setup- Window Help
POSITION BUFFER NEXT COMMAND WNo*

I 45.912 xi o. :
: < > 
X2 13.38 \ 0. G
1
X2 6 0 F 0. M 0
i
{
22 15 . 14567 \ 22 0, H GO G 18 G G 23 G 98 G 20 G 40
:
2 0. C2 * G G SO G G GS3.S 6 64
0. w 0. G 66 G 67 G 69 . 5G 97 G123 G
G123 . 1G11 1 G50*2 G113 G13 < 1
MACHINE MAIN OFFSET
g 21 o. 0, 4. S
1 0. 0. c 0.
s
Q 21 0. Zl 0, M* SPDL 0 MIN 1 10 0 200

« 1 B 0 , 0. Cl ) 0 FT /MIN M. PDL | o
id ci . Cl . T, SP'DLI 0 MIN1 T , SPDL 0
X2 0. X2 0. i C l) 0 FT /MIN
T , SPDL 2 1 0
Z2 0. Z2 0. T . SPDL2 0 MIN*1
m c2 0. C2 0. I
(1 ) 0 FT /MIN XL-AX] I o
0. w Y-AX | I 0
FEED 0. IN /MIN Zl-Axj
. I 0
TNO 16 - 0 ~>~> TN O 0 MAGftZNPKNo. 12 0. m/&m
(GENERAL OUT ) < > < > a 0. ° /min
i 1 I 0
i
LOW 10 9 0 Cl Q
*
9
/min ci-nxjj I o
NIT : < C2 0. 9
/min X2~AXl I 0
OW . IN/MIN Z2~K&| I 0
IN/REY 2~AX| Vm
-
1 0
— $0M
1
' : ».% ;;.v:v X v ÿ v . :y...
“
ir i
P1 ® 2006/11/30 j II I 01 : 29
10* SI [ 0 pm
i'
#A 0 . 98 in/min
POSITION SET UP PROGRAM TOOL' C-COND . P ARAM DIAGNOS DATA TOOL DISPLAY
INFO, DATA I/O LAYOUT MA P
2
0
9
Matrix no w goes 5 places right of the decimal.
(Important to remember when changing R parameters)
tlilArNnCN/MAVFD
(§AKEgj:: ;
......
-> ' v 3 '
¥1 1 pg
IB
2 I Fife Wm6:m
1
0
?
VEBSIQH DIJU2TOSIS MONITOR j OHIUH j SERVO MDKETOR | SMMDIJB BOOT TOR { HSSDMKE 1MHITOR
HEHQP-Y BGNI70F DI3P I/O WCNITQsR BWF i/ o ifjcwiTOE mm

ADDRESS 76543210 HEX ADRSS FE0CBA9876S43210 HEX SHORT LONG AMS* FEDCB A§B7 $S4 32 10 BEST SHOW LONG i
HHOOOODOOO GGOOQQOG 00 XQ0 170 OOOOGOOOPODOOCl-QO 0000 7274496 YOO1I0 O D O l G Q l O O 1.00000 % 12 41 4673 4673 I
W1:1000 000 Q1 oooooo oo 00 XO0 180 QO&OOOQgO 1101111 00 6 F mm # o m o m m t m m m m o QOQO 0
HHOOOOOOOa oooooo-oo 00 XO019O 00000000000000-00 0000 ; ¥0013 O 0- O G O O o D= c« ooa o -o ooo 0000 0 -e22083Se4
KH0OOOODQ3 OOOOOOOO QQ XQQ1A0 Q<WNSDOOO«K>OOQOCK> 0000 rm i4Q i ioo % i xioGQoaooQ CF OD ; -12S44
AH D RESS 76543210 HEX ADRSS FJE&C8*9e?6S43210 HEX SHORT ha m S FEDC-BASO?65432 .10 HEX SHORT hatm
HHOOOODDOO O O O O O Q O G 00 MO O IDO
QooooolQleooooli 0233 643 33555075 YOD34Q ©ODOGOOOOOOGOOOO GOOD 0
HHOOOOOQQl ODOOOODO DO X00110 oaÿooO loaooOoo#© 0200 512 Y003 50 OOOGGÿOOOOOOOGO 0000 0
MH00000002 oooooooo 00 X00120 oaooooocwjioooooioo 0000 0 0 TOD3 6.0 OOOOOOOQGOGOOOGO 0000 o 0
MHG00OOOO3 0000000=0 00 XO013D OO©OGOOO0OGOQ0€*G 0000 YD03 7d 0000000800000000 GOOD 0
:
ADDRESS 76543210 HEX ADRSS F E DC BAS 8 76343 2 1 0 HEX SHORT LOWS ADSSS FEDCBAWR? 6543210 HEX SHORT ha m
HHOOODOOOO GOOOOQOO 00 XO012D OOCHQOOOOOOOOOCKK3 0000 ODOOd = 0 = 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 QQ'OD o 0
MHQQOOOOQ 1 8 0 0 0 0 0 8 0 00 £00130 OOOO a OOQQQ f c O 0 o a ÿ & o O Q « r $ & O Q 0000 0
MH00O0OOO2 QoooooDD 00 £00140 000*0000000000000 OOOO 0 -2 147483 648 00000 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 = 0 0 0 0000 0 0
MHGQ0DOOQ3 0-0000000 00 XD015D 10=0=000000 000000=0 8QO0 -327 SB 0000.0 =000000=0=000000000 0000 0
ADDRESS 76543210 HEX ADRSS FEIKBA9S76S43210 HEX SHORT LOMO ADRSS FE&CBJM7 6543210 HEX SHORT W.
HHDOODDOOO OOOOOQOO >10011.0 oooooolooooooooo 0200 12 51.2 YDDDO0 0000000=001000111 0047 71 71
00
39H0OOOQOO1 0000000=0 XQ0120 oooooooo 0=0000000 OOOO 0 Y0OOIQ =0000000000000000 0000 0
HHOOOOOOG2 oooooooo 00 X0013O o0=0=0oo o oooooooo-o 0000 0 ¥00020 0 = 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0000 0
MHOO0DDOO3 0 0 0 0 0 0 = 0 0 00 XO014O 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 = 0 0 0 0 0 0 = 0 0000 ¥00030 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0000 0
tCEHORY MONITOR WRIT I/O BCWITOR WRITE

ADDRESS 76543210 HEX ADRSS FEDCEA937654321D HEX SHORT L e
HBOO OO0OO0 0OOOOO99 00 R02392 ooomool leoidlo 1CCA 7370
R0 2 3 93 ooaooooooo lo o lo=o 002 4 36
I
nw «X < t < uW »« A v A vh M v M « < v ÿi
jjMgtr
m •
•
TP S 0 2006/11/30 11:05:09
\/\/ 10% TIJi Orpm W\A .
0 98 il l /min
c *‘*iv I
<•• •»<>**ÿ
DIAGUGS VERSION DIAGNOS OPT I SERVO SPXKDLE HARD1 LADDER I/O WRITE
ONITOR MONITOR ONITOR MONITOR MONITOR WRITE amCEL
Stay out of here unless instructed to.
Monitor all addresses in this area. X,Y,M,D etc.

O AGNOSS (MAK£R|
1 F ie W nda w Help
I [
Mats™ MMKOSIS M 3 K H 0 R OfflOM j SEKVO HOHTTOR j SMHBUB MMHTOR j MKSDlfSEE KHUTOR|
KEHO£Y MONITOR DI3P I/O HONITOF D ISP I/O JJQNITOE MSP

ADDRESS 76S43210 HEX
oooooooo
ABRSS FEE>CBjL98?654321fli HE I SHORT LCM&- m SS FH>CBJ»8?6S432iO HEX
mo 110 ©OD lo o lead ioootscJt 12 41 '
SB« LC«0 :
j HHOOQ0DOOO 00 ZOO 0 0 0 8 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0001 7274497 4673' 4673
j J3H0QQQQQQ1 OOOOOOP'Q QO zooiio 0000000001loin i ooer TOOtZO' OOOO Q
| HHOOODOD02 00000000 00 ZOO 19 0 O Q O D O O O o a ooooo oo 0000; TOO 130 ooooo€iooodod©ooo . 'OG0B 0 . -#22083184 I
j HB000DD003 OOOOOOOO 00 ZOO 1AO aa & o o ooa O D o oa a o o 0000; O TOD 140 1lo o l l l l O O Q O d O O O CFDO -12544
ADDRESS 765432 1.0 HEX JLDRSS F E D CB MS 76$ 43 210 HEX SHORT LOMO M®m m i. SHOT*? tows'
I HHOOQOOOOO oooooooo 00 ZOO IDO 0 0 0 8 0 0 i Q l O O O O O l l 0283 43 33555075 700340 OBOOOCWksopOOODOO OOOO 0 0
I HHOOQQQOQl oooooooo QO ZOO 110 OO 0 0 0 0 lOOOOOOOOO 02 00 512 Y003 50 000o4«0ft60e«4000 Q0OQ 0
| HH00000002 00000000 00 ZOO120 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 OOOO 0 Q TO03 60 .00000000000000.00: O'QOO 0 0
I ZH00000003 OOOOOOOO 00 ZOO 130 oooooooooooooooo 0000 0 Y00370 0 0 0 0 0 0 : 0 0 0 0 0 0 ÿ 0 0 0 0 0000
ADDRESS 76543210 HE X 1DRSS F.E D CB A98 76543 2 1 0 HEX HORT L.om km%s T m c m m i 6 B 4 m i o HEX SHORT wm
:
HHOOQOOOOO oooooooo 00 TOQ120 oaooooooooooaooo 0000 o 00000 OO O Q O 0=0 0OO 0 0-00 O O 00:00 a o
HHOOO 00001 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 QO X0Q13Q Q0O0>PO0O0PQ0Qa00 QOQO 0 OOOQQ wQomÿQQommoQ '€>000 0
moomoooz 00000000 00 ZO O 140 ooooooooooooooao 0000 -214748364# 00000 OOO00CJ0Q0OQ00DQO 00:00 0 i
| HHQ0000003 oooooooo 00 ZOO ISO lo a DOO OO0OOOOO0O 8 0 0 0 ; ”32768 000.00 MDQQQ«0QQOQBO(3 OOOD 0
AX' D RESS 76543110 HEX AftftSS FE DCBA9878S43 210 HEX SHORT wm ..MMHSS FEDCB A9876S432 10 MX . ABORT hotm /•
HHOOOODOOO ODOOO0-&O 00 ZOO 110 QOOeODlQOOOOQOOO 0200; 12 • 5 12 YDOOOO 0D0O10'0001000111. 0547 ,'- m is
| HH0Q8QQ001 oooooooo 00 ZOO120 O P P d P d O d T O Q Q O d P d 0000 W Q Q m . m & a m m m m m m mo Q 0
Hfl00€GQ002 oooooooo 00 ZO O 130 o oo o oooa oo oooo o o 000# 0 0 TO002 0 000000000000ÿ000 0000 0 :ÿV:iQ.-:|
I HHOaOODOOQ oooooooo 00 TOO 14.0 0 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 QO 0 T0OO3O 0 8 0 Q 0 0;OO OOQ £S£i>0 Q O 0000 0
1
tCEHORY KGHITOR URITE I/O HONITOR WITH
ADDRESS 7654.3210 HEX JfcDRSS f EDCBA.9876543210 HEX SHORT ONG kt>m 3 FEDCB AR87 6S432 10 HEX
HHQOCJOODOO OOOOOOOO 00 £02392 00o.lt lOOtl00 Id 1-0 ICC A 7170 2$m$m Ig
£02393 oao&oooo&olooloo 0024 38 .
m P mu . 0 2006/11/30 1 1 : 0 6 : 5 6
0% B Or pm V# .
0 9Bin /Akin
jr
DIAGROS VERSION BIAGN05 OPTION SERVO SPXRDLE H. JWARE: LADDER /O irnmmSM

ONITOR ONITOR MOHITOR HbHIT OR MONITOR .WRITE CmCEL
m
Us e this area for forcing.
2
1 You may force up to 4 addresses.
1
XOO 170-1 forces on XOO170-0 forces off
Powering off the control cancels all forces. Use this button to remove forces. WRITE CANCEL then INPUT.
h A
r
mM
2 Fie Window Help
1
2
VERSION DIAGNOSIS MOUTIR | OP110*1 j SERVO MfMTTOR j SpntDUi MlMTfOR Hmmm Kfl&WTOJR |
MEMORY MONITOR MSP i/ o MONITOR \m ? i/ o MONITOR vm p
ADDRESS 76543210 HEX ADRSS F E DCBA98 76S43210 HEX SHORT Lorn ADRSS FEJ>CBA9e76S432iQ HEX SHORT LONG
HH0000000Q 8 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 200170 OGOQOQQOO OOOOO 00 0000: 7274496 YOD13LO coo 1 J j 1 c- o Lcocoo 1 1 2 4 1 4673 4673
00
HHQQO0DQQ1 9 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 200180 ogdopood d 11© 1 11 1 POST 11 1 YOG12 Q <3-6OOOO«QOOOQOC»OO 0000 0
HH00000002 oooooooo 00 K00190 0000000000000000 0000 0 YOG130 oooooooooooaoooo 0000 0 -822083564
MH00000D03 DOGGOOOO 00 2001 AO ClQ GO OOOOO DO OOOOO 0000 O TOO140 n o o l l l i o o Q O O D O O CFOO -12544
lt DRESS 76543210 HEX ADRSS FE DCBA9876543 2 10 HEX SHORT urn ADRSS FERCBM87 65432 10 HEX SHORT LONG
HHOQQOO0OO 0-0000000 00 2001 DO Q Q O O O O l O l O O O O O l l 0233 43 33555075 Y0D340 OOOGOOOOOOOOOGOO 0000 0 0
HHOOQOPOOl o-ooooooo 00 >700110 ooooooioaoooaaoo 02.00 12 YDQ35Q 0000000000000000 0000 0
HHOQOOGOQ2 OOOGOOGO 00 X00120 000000000.0000000 0000: 0 0 Y003 60 0OOOOOOOOOOODOOO 0000 0 0
>
H H O O O O O O O l oooooooo 00 200130 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 8 0 0 0 0 0 0 0000 0 Y00370 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Q0DO 0
DDRESS 76543210 HEX ADRSS FEDCBA9876543210 HEX SHORT LONG ADRSS FEDCBA9©? $543-210 HEX SHORT LONG
MHOQQOOOQQ GO OGOOGG 00 200120 OODGOOQOO-OOOOO'OO 0000 0 00000 0 0 0 0 0 0 - 0 0 0 0 0 0 = 0 0 0 0 0000 M. o
HHOOOOOOOl 00000000 OP 200130 OOOOPOQO&ODOOO&O 0000 0 ooooo m m o m m z Q Q m m & o oo&Q 0
HHQ0000002 oooooooo 00 200140 oooooooooÿoooooao 00 OO 0 -2147483648 00000 0 0 0 0 0 0 8 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0800 0 .
HHOOOOOOOl OOOOQOOO 00 200150 IGOQOOOCIQ ooooo oo 3000 -32768 OOOOO C0OOQ080OGGO00OO 0800 0
ADDRESS 76543 2 iO HEX ADRSS FEDCB A987 654321 0 HEX SHORT LONG ADRSS FEBCB A98? 6543 2 10 HEX SHORT LONG
BHOOQODOOa 0GGOGOOO 00 20011.0 OOOODGlOODDOGGOD 0208 512 512 YD 0000 0 0 0 0 0 0 8 0 0 lo o 0111 0047 71 71
HHOQPOOPPl 000000-00 00 200120 aooooaaoa-oooaooo 0008 Q TOGO IP aooaaoooooaaooeo 0000 0
HHOOOOOOOl OOOOQOOO 00 200130 O0OGOOOO0OOOOODO 0008 0 700020 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 8 0 0 0 0000 0 o
HHOOOOOOOl OOOOOOOG 00 200140 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 8 0 0 0 0 0 0 0008 D YD DO 30 8000008000008000 OGDD 0
MEMORY MONITOR HR2TE I/O MONITOR RRITE

. ADDRESS 765432 ID HEX ADRSS FEDCBA93765432 ID HEX SHORT LONG
HHQQOOOOQd 00 1 ICC A 7370
'h ooooooooo-olo o lo o 002:4 36
S3 H P flft, 0 2006/11/30 11:02:36

\J \J 10 k mi rpm VV'-A 0 . & Bln /mill
:<,:*•//// vpx . : x vy,
JX; ;; :v$ .<: :H:X -WVV*. •:
I?
'
D X Y F I* M iDRESS ADDRESS »>

4-
Us e this area fo r searching R parameters. Force under I/O Write. Us e this area for changing R parameters.
PIC PARAMETER (DATA TYPE)
ADDRESS
ON. Ml: NT STANDARD
M KM OK Y ACT J Vli
K 2350 H 2830
1
2 2
3
• \
• j
4 4
5 3
6 6
7 **«
i
8 8
9 y
Long type
R 2380 a 2880
I 1
2
3
4 •1
>•
5
b 6 ns m /
T O OL L EN G TH MEASURE SKIP SPEED 300
cn i n
8 8
TOOL LENGTH MEASURE RAPID TRAVERSE OVERPAID % 17
y
R 2390 R 2890
DISTANCE OF THE TOW SENSOR SKIP AND DEC. 25000
I I < )
> O
2 AXIS SKIP POSITION ni

3 3
4 4
1 AXIS START POSITION: Of TOOL LENGTH MEASURE m
5 o
6 6
V AXIS START POSITION OF T OO L L EN GT H MEASURE m
*7
(
2
1 8 8
3 X AXIS START POSITION Of TOOL LENGTH MEASURE m
9 y
R 3980
TOOL BREAK AGE ALARM LIMIT 20000
s. (7874)
1
2
1
4
Long type
PLC MIA dm TYPE) PARAMETER \ RS >
:o mm STANDARD RL OOMBHf mmm

ELUKE ATC BLOCK l AXIS POSITION of 1s t AXIS Si
>
HBO KB ATC BLOCK l AXIS POSITION of 2nd AXIS $2
s
BEFORE ATC BLOCK I AXIS POSITION of 3rd AXIS S3
BELL) V£ ATC BLOCK 1 AXIS POSITION of 1st AXIS 54
BELUKE AtC BLOCK 2 AXIS POSITION of 1s t AXIS 55
BELOKB ATC BLOCK 2 AXIS POSITION of 2nd AXIS m

BbLURb AtC BLOCK 2 AXIS POSITION of 3rd AXIS 61
i BBLOKB ATC BLOCK 1 AXIS POSITION of 1s t AXIS SB
BEL 0K B A 1C BLOCK 1 AXIS POSITION of 2nd AXIS 50
0 BE I '0Kb A TC B LO CK 1 AXIS POSITION of 3rd AXIS 60
i BEL UK B ATC BLOCK 2 AXIS POSITION of 1s t AXIS 61
2 BEL UKB: ATC BLOCK 2 AXIS POSITION of 2nd AXIS 62
3 BbLUKb AT C BLOCK 2 AXIS POSITION of 3rd AXIS 63
U 64
15
lb
17
Short type
KB No. BIT
FIX BIT PARAMETER <RB1
OMMENT
..... B8>
0 PLC DEVICE
i
0 0 mom
j
RI 1156 If 1001
. Ml 002
NABLE E NOR ILL TOOL MEASURE VALID INVALID 3 If 1003
4 TYPE OF X ABSOLUTE INCREMENTAL 4 Mi 004
TYPE OF FEEDBACK V BSOLUTE INCREMENTAL c
D SO 005
6 TYPE OF FEEDBACK 1 ABSOLUTE INCREMENTAL 10006
7 TYPE OF FEEDBACK 4 ABSOLUTE INCREMENTAL 7 Ml 007
i 0 8 10008
*}
MAGAZINE MAX TOOL NUMBER < NOTE 1 111009
Ml 010
Ml OH NG. MAGAZ INE TOOL DETECTOR D1SAVA I'LABLE A V A I TABLE B in oi i
4 c Ml 012
5 SELECT TEE T CODE *M06T** <N0TE2> B Mi 01 3
6 NO T *M06T**T*** E MIDI 4
7 AXIS MOVE AT ATC BY PLC ONLY PROGRAM BY PLC Ml 015
2 PALLET CHENG ER VALID INVALID 0 Ml 016
Rill 57 I Ml 017
n
2 M I018
3 3 Ml.019
*
OOLANT MENU AT POWER ON AUTO O N AUTO O FF 4 Ml 020
5 ON E CYCLE SW . OF PALLET CHANGER LH SAVA 1L ABLE AVAILABLE 5 Ml 021
G 6 MI 022
TOOL MES. EQUIPMENT AT AT C ARM FIX *T
> Ml 023
0 8 Ml 024
4 j
9 Ml 025
9
El A AT C METHOD T CODE MO 6 A Ml 026
MI 027
4 C Ml 028
—
D B1029
i: AXIS MOVE PATTERN AT AT C Z-XY XV z E Ml 030
XIS MOVE PATTERN AT PALL ETCH ANGE Y— X Z V F M 103 1
2
1
5
2
1
6
Short type
PLC-CMN PALAMETER TABLE

R El T COMMENT
I 0
MANUAL MEASURE VALID INVALID
2'M.10
TOOL 11) VALID INVALID
VARIABLE TIMER VALID INVALID
VI 00 ONLY VALID INVALID
4 Vi 00 ONLY VALID INVALID
Vi 00 ONLY VALID
;v m: CONTROL. VALID INVALID
FMS PA LLE T I D VALID INVALID
EM C CONTROL ID VALID INVALID
RS232C 1 PORT TYPE VALID INVALID
TOOL ID R RESISTOR LOAM- VALID INVALID
B THERMAL DISPLACEMENT OFF SET VALID INVALID
€ THERMAL DISPLACEMENT MACRO VARIABLE WRITE VALID INVALID
D VI 00 ONLY VALID INV LID
TOOL ID SERIAL TYPE VALID INVALID
F TOOL ID EUCHINER VALID INVALID
TOOL , ENGTK TO LIFE INDEX DISPLAY AT READ VALID INVALID
3301
. TOOL LENGTH TO LIFE INDEX DISPLAY AT READ ALID INVALID
TOOL LENGTH AT WRITE LIFE CONTROL TOOL DATA
OO L LENGTH TO LIFE INDEX DISPLAY AT READ OFF SET NO. COMPENSATION
TOOL LENGTH TO LIFE INDEX DISPLAY AT READ O FF SE T NO. COMPENSATION
TOOL DIAMETER AT WRITE LIFE CONTROL TOOL DATA
TIME TO LIFE INDEX DISPLAY AT READ VALID INVALID
LIFE AT WRITE LIFE CONTROL TOOL DATA
FLAG TO LIFE INDEX DISPLAY AT READ VALID INVALID
9 FLAG AT WRITE LIFE m T OO L T OO L DATA
ID NO . AT WRITE VALID INVALID
DATA AT MANUAL ONLY FLAG ALL DATA
PROTECT SPINDLE TOOL AND NEXT T OOL N O. OF MUTE VALID INVALID
) READ AN D WRITE TO LIFE CONTROL DISPLAY VALID INVALID
READ AN D WRITE TO ID NO. GROUP NO, VALID INVALID
OO L DIAMETER READ AND WRITE TOOL COM, TYPE A VALID INVALID
7
1
2
9 9LZ£~ 0009 OS T 00 2
W
ItfOHS
'
]
.
\> 0
I
/
s / /
\s
/ X •v
/ \ \
\
\
/ i
\
\
i’ i \
/ \
9ESS9 ItOICI m W I 88CKS 9iSm)I ISUCOI t’OCt’ilt’ 80988C8 9Uiii.9I CCM-SSCC f9880K9 SEitUni 9St’j£*893 I160L89CS t-C8If'iLC i.01 8t9(.8t.fi:
POOO oooo-oooooooooooo o>TOOX

DN01 J.80HS X2H
I Z t 8 91 Zt *9 8ZI 9$Z Z\S KOI St-QZ 960ÿ c6I8 t’8£9I Q9LZZ
o
0
9 9LZ£~ 0008 ooooooooooooocc ~
0
0000
0000
0000
......
o-ooooooooooooooo
os T 00 2
OH CO X
oooooooooooO'irevr'oc 1 002
0 - 0 0 0 0 0 0 O OOOO 0 0 CO OCT 002
S»1 i mu £ x JH o i O'$ 9 L 9 m s ;> 1 31 ?; <iY
218
219
220
sy
;]
K
if
rÿ_
-
J 5T?>
ja
JA
MR-JT-CT
SAVING PARAMETERS
2
2
1
2
2
2
MR-J2-CT DRIVES
Wm '
P
§
|MJUtCt
a1
III ;
#4 i
AI
IfiaSt
s
* »W. f
‘ft
m*
is
mlmM m I if
V-ÿ
*- ' •
BIS • MU
w KP S
.f t
Kl
X. Hv'ft
f
i
.. • ..
0 •
JNSH
iftÿce
iiaiisiP
feeMi
Cl
5'i
S
91 1
M il
A
:ÿÿÿ
1
‘
»SM ? & as
mmmmmmmMMMmMMMmmfmmMMmMMtlMM M
u*
c
\
xt
is-
PMSMMMMW
w ÿ y y ÿ > ÿ y ÿ:<ÿ w s y y y ÿ ÿ y y ÿ ÿ ÿ y y ÿ % y ÿ y > ÿ % y ÿ > w ÿ y ÿ y ÿ
MMMIMMMMM
a
iMMMiiMiiMM Xx?K-S wm t
Kg
ss
3 >
sm
i*:- 2fc X-.

5
* SSSB
I«1mMMfMWiWM M M W M 0 ÿ M l W ÿ M M M SS2 3KK iS

VJ
v -xc tÿSxS >*X\
MWW1MWWWWMWW1 K s?
/,TL >X'
sv 3 §5 ssSS
«X><J
*3
&
$3
r«im W
mSSS
>Xr
f:Fil
W' S mm 3? 3SKS&;
flfel m m
»-J53 fil
te# &*
l#L L% HD
M »M |jli 1
B V VÿiSlI IOTS
>y$ co
»»|SM
at *
-™-ÿr =?,0
MS
;n
* Slf£SM \
J&m
mmm.Itafe*
#»P?
• : Xx ?
rm /r
%
>>Xx- V»ÿ*A*T«J>--*.«*>
223
2
2
4
S
mmmmmmmmmrnmmmmm
SR 352
aK> K
ig
tgj
Desktop On-Call for Masak
Intel LÿN+Modem PC Card

mmmm MB m
2SJ
* s $1 Lg KEY HISTORY
MMMMI
»ÿ
:
K
ig Main
£ 1
i— /
g MAZATROL FUSION 64 0 ' ,«: «
Ml
P
§
IS MR-J2-CT-M6 Setup S_W ill ÿ: E
illtlieJ ÿ#
S| WinZip g NetOp Remote Control a
»/S*
f>.
» /«' ftp/
«
g
Programs
tfj Documents
'
Online Services
lg ORiWOCO
& Hi
E g
MS
i
/I
< g Printkejj
jS Settings
g Startup
Q Pin:
g
| Help
WinZip
Internet Explorer
• tills
E
iU Run...
| l|yil Shut Down...

-
CS
MS-DOS Prompt
Outlook Express
mi
Hltari (oQ Windows Explorer
_ _*i
|>r*M«Mtsp
Iff
I'FjFile (S.)S efcup lWlMonitor. lAJAIarm Qpiagncsis
B
;
:
A'-0~: <V, ' , •, •
.i‘,
i
'
•:-ÿ : I
cp l p p t CptT
elect rn A vie Tnh
SetUp-Axis 1 ab s'K
HHBBBHBMHi
UIIAlifUipSAI*ÿ
Siaiii*
:
;.* - ,
:ÿ.
2
2
5
iÿj'Aaa iÿAeUACTUvAy fvu,;:

IBIBiiS
2
2
MR-J2-CT Setup Softwaie (Foi MG)— MAGAZINE[Rotary Axis Spec.)
6
| (F)File (S)Setup (MlMonitor (A)Alarm (D)Diagnosis fPjF'arameter [T )T est-operation | (U)SetUp-Axis (H)Help
MAGAZINEQJ Axis Select(C)
Axis Spec.(S)
&
a*-
lisffiir HH
-
n Si
M U a
9
mm m m m
*
w
»
AMR.J2CT Setup Software 1st Axis* Liner Axis Spec.
(P)Fite ©Setup (ÿMonitor (A)Alartn (PPsgnoss (P)Paramefcer (T)T$$fc-operat:iof« OUjSettfe-Ms (HjHefci
'
L
'L.ijj
BB
l H
I
HHB
SMBS
I
w
Krh:
nil
n iH : W
ills
i
li t
2
2
7 SELECT PARAMETER
2
2
8
o' r. U TO , iPV’.Vd'WfcSf i ÿ t w : iÿÿX, sIHjHgsp
~
1
if
Rtename ; — r— llli As
...
_______
Paÿ.aUe
sr-ss: ~
TTr: trr ~*1
uirfee N-srmc i*ui 1 1 in# i s
*
SIS
SiSSSKSS®
——
s“ 1
'.m;:
»:>ÿ :“ ‘
:
::• .V >ÿ••: :siiPs/:sV::::;-S::::;;
: r
— S':
PARAMETERS ARE BROUGHT OUT ;EROM THE MR-12 DRIVE

___
_ ': '
:
_
S- S'
-
_-
''ISIS',; : SS'SS'Sÿ wmm
----
'
SS
'
i;
'ÿ
S: i:SS. .-ÿ . 'ÿÿS'. : ::
, Si
iMsm \
A i is:
—
r r~~~..... i
'
-
iss M I >*< 0> < 'M '*ÿ
, < < h-
SSiSSsii:' SSliS li M NM i
/f kEfat) . Compareÿl l read© wv*$m. Chants fed lÿialSeifl
.
«'ÿ
etailed): DS Poi Erd&l
Press All read
Po p up window will appear....maintenance; All parameters will be read. Is it O.K.?
Press O.K.
Parameters are brought out from the MR-J2 Drive

. ~ .. ..* - . I' l M ni.
i : TTY
aasa
(P)Fite ©Setup ('ÿMonitor fAjAlarm (Diagnosis (Pparm&ter (TiTest-operation (UJSetiÿWs (HjHete
,.
rnmm
sH
ap
WtfM s
•• •'»-
in f
Parameter table- •
File name:
t
[
j Nurrfce ame Set value
'ÿ
U rd Setting rang©
ll
™n 1
'
-J
I 111:
1
\
Yvi
. . ...
1
i
—
»/ÿ | .?
i iTCTl :D:i:?5K:::S::::::sS;-S:::::i:s
:ÿ
il l 3
1 T%*i\ I:
t\
I ’V
Please turn eft the servo ampfe after seating the parameter vath the 8,t-“ tg a '
r iiilili111
f I 1 '
WrrtelWf Ccrrc‘afe.10 AJl read© ll wrlÿJ Change kill] Mial Sei||]

I
—
\\
Detail Inf (I) End©)
iP
I
.
1, - I .
-
T
: '.ÿ
SELECT File
2
SELECT Save
2
9
2
3
0 Save in-
My Accent
1
pÿINGSTONfEl
:Zd LADDER
zi *> —
m mam
is O’ in*
mi
m\
_
Docurnesnte
s**™* N
j
'
Desktop »j i
:
3
~~
Z 1 ~
. \
1
My Documents I
__
9>
My Computer
_ .
1 : zJI
«3
y Nelwoik
ife HiSfn«:
ave as (ypts *pfl* *

$vto
Cancel
Races
i
_
s
'
•. . ; '
- ••
rsteMI Competed All >e4*® AJ\ffltfQ chaw lastly hfcidSeS

Drtrfw..m
-ÿJ .
ii«a|fl*(
U:;
MSi
i
Save in (Where yo u want to save) C: or E: etc.
File name (A name yo u will remember)
Press Save
Parameters should no w be saved.
Use Windows Explorer to verify.

• ' 'Si
• 5r
A ;»
Swi
- , '• ;
wis*>
v
§2S a'H
Cra
V*
1I’
I$
MR-J2-CT
UPLOADING PARAMETERS
2
3
1
2
MR-J2-CT Setup Software [For MGJ— MAGA ZIHEfRotary Axis Spec.} - [Parameter list} liiaiPi
3
(AjAlarm [DJDiagnosis IPjF’arameter il)T est-operatiori - It?
'
2 (FJFile (S)Setup iMJMonitor (J ]S etU p-Axis , [H)H elp

-j:
i M l l t Sm *1
''A''
4.
u. HE
ave[S] W
mmm
vOi
ir table File name : \<* s.i
t
intfP) vj • v
/• ,; r«
nd(Q] S et v alu e Unit S e t t i n g range
.............
..........
IS
...........
;
II
......“ ......
Select Open on File
------
— Fab . . I
%
;•
m
m
I
1 T
I
Iill
I
I
4- 4-
i t, tfi
\ i
\ 1 I
I I
I
|1 >
M
m
&
mmmmmmsmm
/;Y;’
. s • /
- M
i&n V
Please turn o ff th e servo a i r o l i f i e r a f t e r.. setting th e. parameter.. w i t h th e sign.

. . • : p pp • 'v: >::pp
II Hi
V V-V- ‘.‘.-i :<• W . >)» V/iM.
•>)
I/-1 < 'ii;
i, ;<.rj
V,
Parameter v a l u e
Ev . m: X;
:•
:iV /y Ay k d;
I read.P):| all list,L)g

:
*V
rite <W ) Compare (C ) ;Ml writ>I;tKj |Change I
Initial Se t (E ) rr
e t a i l In f . (I) AB S Pos. R e p a i r (A )
taissi 1 8 r p $$ -1I Ip pi : i|
*
/k) %
1
*
M
-
,
End(Q.) m
1#
S:
: V vl
Vs'l.f
'
1
i
: ;
. . -M
.
'
..
v ; iSlssSi-ii
(F)Fite (S)Setup
T
tMQMonibor
i
.’Lr''.
IA)Alarrn
’ I. ' .
|pfgy
S;.
.....
......
(OSQÿnosis
. S.F . .1 £..
w _„
<* - ~> C
(P)Parafiteter (T)Te§t-operaUiÿ (ytSeitÿ-A>S (H)Heb
\* t * S/ ;w >.
v *
j / , aaa
dBBhiwm.. wsm BL
_
. . . . ...
i
: Parameter table Fib name : .
Mi pÿl »??F:ci I i
'
'* '
' j 1
tÿSSSf * S
'
i
urrtbe am©
_ et value Unit S etting range [*
I
iu
_ '
ÿ .;ÿ: i
M
WW
'
- .: :
I •
I
Mm
'
mm:
1
_ _ _ ':'WM
- .....
l
----
—------ — —- —bdl H
• , i
S
Fie** turn ©fc the servo «**« mm
.......-
.. . .-
. lil
.......... the sm
*? *—
& Parameter
r- r~ mmmm rWÿSKKHHSfSBSm
. . ....... . . . .. .
I •: •ÿ•
liigliiM lililiiliililllPÿ 4-Si§t

M il
iimao Compare© AJI read© All vwtdUS) Change Mi) initial $e® II
Detail W.flJ <ÿ*

I MMi :
.; ~ :
End®)
* S
:
M— : ': :
S I:: - :
s l:>
mm
MM.
m .;
jil
'
,
:
SELECT Open on the File Tab
2
3
3
2
3
4
p.-n
ocfc in' '*& KINGSTON |£ | Jli ** ia tit M*

SB I —1
JjLADWA
3 - mM n lH i
MyRflccrt
Documents;
> i
D GSkkp
:
SeÿlirpgT iwiÿa
:
3
“Hj
Q -
My
OP m
Dcewients
& Computer
il i
Mjp Network ite name; Opsn

Races
ites oHype: jfcprm Cancel
TOelST TSPSTS' it&m mm m banpe I Intel Ss1(£(
<W Inf (il

.. i irnm
mm
j
';S
WM1
HI
saasifflis mmmm
Look in (Where yo u saved it to) C: or E: etc
File name (the name yo u would remember)
Press Open
5>* MR-J2-CT Setup Software (For M S) - MAGAZINE (Rotary AKIS Spec.) - [Parameter list]
11 f£)File (S)Setup (M)Monitor (A'jAIarm

[jyDiagimg (I)Test-operation (U]SetUp-Axi$ [H]Help
~ - lr?( Xj
Magazine Selectede? Q
Parameter t a b l e E i l e name : ft : \INDEX. PRM
IndexJPRM
Numbe Name 'a t Ifni S e t t i n g range
m
#001 |*MSR : Motor series E 0000-FEEFh
I
#002 *RTY : Regenerative 0000-FFEFh
1
f
#003 *PC1 : Motor gear ra 1-32767
H
I
I
#004 *PC2 : Machine g e a r : 1 1-32767 1
I
#005 *PIT :Feed pitch 1 f 36. 1-32767 i
I
#006
#007
INP
ftTTf
:In-position
: ftuto t u n i n g
Verify - e n o i a deg 1-32767
0000-EFEFh
I
g
ii
#008
#009
PG 1 Position lo
& #007 #008 #01 9 #020 #021 #022 C 4-1000 I
m
\
0-20000
#010 EMG EMG-decel t

K
1 ShQvhidPjffeijyices
0-32767 3
l e a s e turn o ff th e servo ai%
001 MS R : Motor series
|A ll
0000
©
rite <W ) Conpare<C) ftll r e a d < P ) write <K) I Change list (L ) I I n i t i a l S e t ( E )
2
3
e t a i l In f . < I)
I is . R e p a i r (ft) End<H)
0 Press Compare
5
mm
236
Go to SetUp-Axis and change Drive
Select Compare Again
2
3
7
2
1* MR-J2-CT Selup SoHwaie (For M6] - IMDEX TABLE(Rolary Axis Spec ) - [Patamelei fell HM.igixi
3
8 it1* If] File [SjSetup [M )M onitor (A'lAlarm '
[D]Diaqnosis |'R]Parameter ;jT)Test-operation:;t;|tJjSetli)pÿAxis::::''
m '(H)Help
JffJ
'
> ,
|IS
/V ,;v :; -:; v;,,,. vV;
MM
'
arameter table Bile name Mm ‘
Wmm,
umbe Name S et value ¥nit S e t t i n g range ;w i;
#001 *MSR :Motor series 0000 0000-EEEEh &

ft
#002 -RTY e g e n e r a t i v e o p t i o n type 0000 jOOOO-EFEEh §mm ;
#003 *PC1 : Motor g e a r ratio 1 i 1-32767

&111 -
1* if i
A::
l 4- ;
#004 *PC2 : Machine g e a r ratio 1 ; 1-32767

a I
#005 *PIT d e e d pitch
sWI >.
360
w . r w i iv* vw
d eg
*17
1-32767
$
|
a
sSSSSe
t m I
#006 INP : In-position det< Parameter-maintenance m flOOOdeg 1-32767 «
I
§>
#007 :i
AT ¥ :Auto t u n i n g
SMMMN 0000-EEEEh
m II
%m
#008 PG1 : P o s i t i o n l o o p gi i f 3
m t 3ud /sec 4-1000
....
S
‘• /erifiJ was completed.
#009 -20000 I i
#010 EMG EMG-decel time (
__
' ;|
ec 0-32767
— ai
„
,
\ il |§3 m m i
’A
aft 1 1 |
~
P l e a s e turn o ff th e servo a u p l i f :*
-WMfssOK JJ4iV
• .Vrf.r'* I’W' Vt -
'
&i i
&M A
001 M SR : Motor series 0000 m WM || |
> •ÿ
A
WMim m
I
:v.-;s
rite <W ) oirpar e < A ll r e a d ( P ) M l w r i t e <K) 1 Change list (L ) I Initial S e t < E )

A
j? A-A :
e tail In f . (I) hBS Pos . R e p a i r (B.) Endra) H'
V-
Press ALL Write
|||MFN2-CT Setup Software (For MGJ— IHDEX TABLE [Rolary Axis Spec.)*' - list]
k.V EJFile [S'jSetup [M)Monitor (AjAlarm (D)Diagnosis i'PIParanieter OTTest-operation fiJISetUp-Axis [HlHelp -Ifll'/
*1
m
$3
ararneter t a b l e File narK : A:\iNBEX.PKM t,
Ax,
X X M
<
Nunbe Najre Se t value Unit , J
m
m
§3
#001 *MSR :Motor series 0000 0000-EEFEh c
mm I
00 2 *RTY : Regenerative option type : 0000 0000-EFEEh I II
I I
t«
#003 *PC1 : Motor gear ratio 1 1-32767 I
#004 *PC2 : Machine g e a r ratio l _ 1-32767
I
1 i it
>
I
#005 *PIT : Feed pit ch. 60 ideg 1 1-32767 gj Cl
#006 INP : In-positio:

«A»fr/ r ' / , A \ v V A W V A V \ V MVCIM bi\4:r*'3 tl\t 9 JLV/M
g
J arameter-maintenance 1 Le g 1-32767
.
#007 AT U : Auto tunin : 0000-FFEFh I I Ill
•t
m
#008
#009
PC I : P o s i t io n 1
& All parameters will be written. I sit OK?
fflrag V
4-1000
0-20000
t t& X
I
- iS i
m
•ÿXI
mi k im * * }?'/$<
#010 EMC : EMG-decel v 0-32767
1 $$/ii
iim
N;.. it n i t * lliiif|
.AY- V:
WiiMmiMi - wm x
If m
.X-
Please turn o ff th e servo a* ÿ

#
T; m iYi Wm:& §§§§ th e g || sign..
i/:: VIA;
001 MS R Motor s e r i e s 0000 mS s /> m gx it

A
«'Su. ini :M
Write <W ) ] Compare (C ) f i l l read CP, )

I iSlsll*Wa 'iWBIliM
1* 1
§
A
$1
• &2
D e t a i l Inf. (I) S Pos. Repair m¥i:
2
3
9
iilill*
2
MR-J2-CT Setup Software (For M6)-~ INDEX TABLE[Rot3i)i Axis Spec )“ (Parametei list - .lelxl
0
4
fFjFile (SISelup- (M )M onitor (A'lAlarm |U)Diaqnosis .fPJF'arameter ©Test-operation (UlSetUp-Axis [H )H elp
-
Iffl
;:v- / -; :. :
:
Parameter table •
v ;ÿ Tile-;\::jiame >:
- • • •
u»,v.-' :.y ;; r.t T»Ny e.y
t (.\ u «• v i? v .»/. * )>$
v/ • ’ « • • £ : . » ; &* Ai Vvf/fcv-.i 'x 'Jci /; yw «• :d*»« tl
• ? say* <<c>.*> v/,< -/: CCA •? > y/? vyr.v.;*iV>*vi*/y;
$
.* • i
Numbe Name Se t v a l u e I Unit I S e t t in g range

111n
#001 *MSR Motor s e r i e s 0000 0000-EEEEh ill
il
8
00 2 type i 000 i
*RTY Regenerative o p t i o n i
0000-EFEEh 5
EH i i
3
#003 *PC1 : Motor g e a r ratio 11-32767
#004 *PC2 : Machine g e a r ratio 1 11-32767 ,:
mM 11 .
Mm :: fc
#005 *PIT :Feed pitch 36 0 ideg 1-32767 1
II
n
V’Z X t* W&.1 *• Ml i
#006 INP : In-position det r1000deg 1-32767 I H;

arameter-maintenance il ?ÿ:
m Ii
m
#007 MU : Auto t u n i n g 0000-EEEEh I • ft
rJHWtt9L id/sec IS s8m

:
i
#008 PG1 : Position loop g F„ 4-1000
vVriting:was-.c.orupleted. t ;5
#009 0\i\
0- 20 0 0 0 BI i
SJ
I
I
#010 EMG : EMG-decel tine -=-, uc 0-32767
w-vyy:ÿ *.V: :ÿ••’ÿ
1
S. ....... il 'it- S a*IIiifiBi
v2ÿi\>.'c.i i-i'Jc-C' ',
l e a s e turn of f th e servo a i r p l i t inlet e r I 11''sigh . miisssf
—
• ' • > , • . ÿ ('/;ÿ. .\V> J’wVOÿ.v/.'r.t /-v-.-r i',: • W'l.‘*V.W Ol‘
#001 M SR Motor series

Kv
0000
HHHM|
— ll
_
..
I _ .
_ . , _,
VTrite (W) Goirpare(G) M l read | n . , . i
D e t a i l Inf. (I) UB S P o s . R e p a i r ( Bl) i i

PressOK
;';v
Sc
v>;
I®
MR-J2-CT
SETTING ABSOLUTE HOME
2
4
1
I
2
# MR-J2-CT Setup Software (For MGJ— MAGAZINEfRotary AKIS Spec.)
' ' '
BBliil
4
2 IFjFile ISJSetup (M)Monitor. lAWaim (DjDiagriosis (R]Parameter ITJTest-operation (U)SetUp-Axis (HJHelp/ r
\MAG.AZINEil] Axis Select(C)

NDEX TABLE(2) , HI- r Spec 13 J
WSmmEBB
m
m
M
1
1SI111III
j§R§ jj
Si i
I • r i; 1
I msP 3
4
2
i
mm
m
m
i|
IS i4«»0Sia
i -
m mmmi %
15 1
m mm mm.
Ills :;V.V,
ISIS
'
•
ais
i
i:
sHSSi«J
i
H
mm SSlisiililS
m
HIS
mm iS iM mmm
m VV::
ffii
I r >
|pf
1 m
ujjeiÿV.I Joiiuow(w) dnjasts) s| d(dJ
» -v'&'r
1
MSM-
1
WM i
3 is
CL
1
Pit
3
»
X
v<;V.
A;:
S*-
ui
§mm
wm
tpcjl
-rV-1W*v
| '
l
p. liSl* H ilfl isp-
| lilli
111 f® I*
t
1
Sill* I£f
Jfl 1 I* ii
M. Mv-S
«
s
* •
g BH
w $*®m
mm
igjU mm
s
'
®
wAQffi * i *;
S*w
• *: gill* win? Hi S
ifeP®
I® PStH p i
• -; o tessiS 8 1
& :s .
ill **
: i;; rmÿm
%
•
c piaS .Kv£
o
*' ”
,
**J3. Mr si'
i i
-*
j
2
JD :
*S** ££ s mm Si :P4 m
4
to
i-'io- % o Vpjilj::/-;;
mvm.
§gp
:m sss
'
OJ
> JS ... Vfe=
m
H IIS® % c IS
4
Ir?1
: >-V*.T'0,
0M i
m
” ms,
;• . I? S I §i£
~n • '* S / ;;V-:* Vi & ;S
'__v
***
.
? \
3-,.. ,
ro 0>
siss
.o • u. ft
QC ;-:i »D
0
DL c -p
LU •D
m
-I
fe
a
CD
.22
*»
00t
m
o
• H o
o
-p
m
Q *- OJ
< -
CJl
H
. 2 $80 L-l
g .O i§Sm
Ilf o iU LJI -._y * w
to
3E
Q)
1 o
g 2
o>
ID
CL CL
S5
w
o
ft
fflSjH
O it to
CD
O O
ai
cu
W
msm
u. A «ll Q.
.« <J
vm
m£
if tr>
•u
'U
-i.
to
OJ
Tl
P
H
H i
iWiis
5
,o; ’c
is P. • H
O
cm P 01
:il
>
o
m
• fa WM «
m >i
ul
*4
I*TI
mi
cm CL
*§I \
0.1
4J
ai
01
4-*»
i<0* J-l
3. I H1 *iH
fPS
CJ O
D ISS
la
p»
111
' *— I O
-.I :.•- iH J •H o 0J P-,
r?
M ÿ2)
SI i— I
P
sz;
s ;Z3 01
i i
TH
P O
C
'
(D
11 01 > l
as
• i— I M
—
iij 111
m
u
H H PH L. 1 I M
s«fc
b.1 Ml
244
$$MR-J2-CT Setup Software (For M6)- INDEX TABLE (Rotary Axis Spec.) - [Test operation] Baa
[pit; IMNcriilO; MIIIBSJ '0
wm
i;
- H JX
i.
de-grfes
ypsx a t, it o. J'J
Jo g
/t
1 J
M
i: z l • : iia*.' i. fi L . Cii.‘ jlip
S
::'v
'cunetei: group 1 :ÿbc i V Vf ;
:
......
_
1 I
rit
—
I i'Lbboiuuo p h s i t tori i n i t ' i a i se t tl).
'
'
St II ivV/,
s;
i
Completion
...J
mu’ll
.....
:
• >: : Isct. lifee
-**S|
*- 'iVf.r.ÿP. P 's s
'
;; CP
I .O
I tie g re &
-- flPliStf
It 23 to
•
2
4
5
iSHST *
2
MR-J2-CT Setup Software [For M6J— INDEX TABLE (Rotary Axis Spec.) - [Test operation] IIH
4
6 tV (F)File (SjSetup. fM)M onifcor [AjlAlarm iPjF'arameter
osition Operation
-J
59.648 egree Step
Ref . return
73| auuui
Parameter group Jo g W?
m
P a r am e t e r g r o u p
Step
-: : : ij§
...... . .
Hanua r
7 j
kut/ 4 Reverse R°t.(R)J
~ Absolute position in i tit nr i'
O r i g i n - Se t (S )|
:ÿgmm i 1
rnmm
.
stOB<0)
nitial set Initial s e t
O r i g i n S et Completion :
MMH
Zero P o i n t (B) Machine edge .
Plÿ—
iPM
f ?
sanatiÿM
0 . 000 degree 192.744
.. Ufcv.•
a-—
I
The t e s t o p e r a t i o n n o d e is s e l e c t e d .
mBM
I:::-.;--'.
'
'
# MR-J2-CT Setup Software (For M6)—
tV (E)File
Position
(S (Setup
59 648
(M (Monitor
degree
[A}dlarm
i..........
.........
Operation
Step
INDEX TABLE (Rotary Axis Spec.) - [Test operation]
(D (Diagnosis fPParameter
—
Sl&ill
><v
m
Mm
MHi
K-xy
[THest-operation.; fU’lSetUp-Axis
ÿ g m~
m
vv-
.1
; /V.‘:'
*
era $
v*v
P.v;<;'
'
iiV
I'HlHelp
P5wi
t®
.1*1x1
S® C
-Iff
..
•Vt:
<0
2<J
.
<-
arameter group : Step 2Eiocle:l/f ee(a||l(

-T-ÿ
#NfBS|Ri|L» '•-••- W
£?Si
.-. mg
s
51i| 1 1 .;- /dif

• ÿÿ
arameter group degree rt
1/ 1000 degree : DS / B
:•
«
Absolute p o s i t i o n ini.fc 1/100
degree S® : :
I
1/10 degree -Set S
M l P) l i
< J
m
181111111
1 degree
lliili v;r I
yv ).v,
4 1ÿ*™
;
nitial . s e t Iiid> a l set i.
);
O r i g i n S et Piet io n Sill _d _mBm

WMM%
Zero Point (B) .
Machine
. • • • • v.
, d;‘: :. • V • '
edge
'
• ”. .• /i-'.--;/ .M.'...: i;:v:-/
it
-rivd
mi
'Mr#
ta
«flE MHnHiR
f
aMtfÿlwwwM8ir
5) v
V\ j-
/ÿ' is
i
* ' •: • » •
0 . 000 RJgfippiI •n• p

d • •
L
egree 192 . 744 degree;-, mip® P-.
• . < ÿ ÿ • • . * . iVU'i l.V failliti

d jg
v. v A0;:- 1
ft /; «ÿ
Th e moving d e s t i n a t i o n station number in automatic o p e r a t i o n is s e l e c t e d . ?<

m $& m d:
I f 0 is s e t . It is a s p e c i a l instruction a s on e station rotation.

/
•I
yi
*'A .V ••
MX
ft r ii
2
4
mm
7 • • ‘.V/At/ 1 Wm &
, || v ;:mL HR
;-•
mm: &
• \;
vu livUi WSkw Hr IffllSwiWM)

$$ MR-J2-CT Setup Software (For M6]— INDEX TABLE[Rotaiy Axis Spec.) [Test operation]
2
4
I'FjFile (S)Setup (M)Monitor (AJAIerm [ÿDiagnosis [ÿParameter [DTest-operation flJISetUp-Axis iHIHelp
- ( fij
11 wM p
8
*
o s i t io n Operation
;iil I .
6 . 648 degree Step

iNormal R o t . (G )
: rm0&
arameter group Step inode feed : .
1 ar am e t e r g r o up 1 1 degree j::l ?; . •;
a i 2
IPtFerse Ro t . <R > I 2
& 1 t
” Absolute position initial s e t (A) v-‘‘R
<S)
_ jsj I
IS'M JlfiSSiS
nitial s e t nitial s e t
lili stop<0>
|«
•: V;
m ar
'
.
r i g i n S et ompletion 1
ero P o i n t (B) Machine e d g e

i.
0 . 00 0 egree 192 . 74 4 degree
—
;
J
;
It is p o s s i b l e to stop xiith th e SHIFT k e y .

y >
: A : -i ,
lllillilllillll
:ui>y
/ÿ
' -:V
-V;.
pti
S'* MR-JZ-CT Setup Software (Foi M6J— INDEX TABLEfRotaiy Axis Spec.] - [T est opeiation]
kV (F)File (S]Setup (M)Monitor (AJAIarm (D)Diagnosis fPjP.arameter fTITest-operatiori fU IS etU p-Axis 'H 1H elp
— It? I
Position Operation
6 . 64ci degree : Step .l] 1

rnmmmM
n , I I |
,
8iaag»»il»laaiÿ{iii«aaii
-**-£
arameter group Step
,
ar am e ter g r o up 1zl 1 degree
—3
. B e v ™ . Eo t <»l
1
Absolute position initial s e t (A) rm Sr t/VtviCtv:-
•
O r i g i n - S e t <S ) ::
a i.§-
'
-OOP
nitial set. nitial s e t lilffpjlMI I /ÿtop<0,

tei tfjSpgi
r i g i n S et ompletion
m
m
___ ___
_ __A_ .0,V:' i MMi
|i
ero P o i n t -(B) Machine: edge OdlPiApP
Ena(S)
- •
„ Tp:;' m 1
0 . 000 egree 192 .744 ililllll flHMSRRMKM
,, <• - ; ;
ffi7 n; Vi.
tv
It is p o s s i b l e to s t o p w i t h th e SHUT k e y .
‘?Jy
m i
;
2
4
9
i
2
5
0
ftf?MR-J2-CT Setup Software [For M6)—
I.
iFFlis
• . -..•
(S)S*4> up ; (MIMqpifcir ; (AiAlasra
.i.. l_i (
Pter£KS;t;e:feu'gro'up
•’.
degree
.
1
INDEX TABLEjRotagy Axis Spec.)
Ijipagnodf
Up £• 1C Sr t- l u ll
.J o g
Ref o return
'
=.
SWSliiia* illllllÿÿ
.... - [T est operation] Bgia
a ;:arr \ e t e r g r o u p 1 >4‘
SelectJoa
_ A; 4
.......
1113 i
I
v a:
Click n Box dr let r ft .: ,?Sty,

.
v'e:
ji ..; V. 11 . V'
;3 0 f r , : Udldd
m m m v ÿ tm k<-
omp let: ic e m ;.
&§g .......-
, in :;1-V..
is to •
Point ilsohine
I
.
92 74 4 degree ;ÿ
.
----..
'*
......
vfKCT
.... -
I'l'li.a b e s t o p e r a t i o n made is s e l e c t e d .
a,
s*ai
r t ,
<$M<W
IFmm
mggmm fil
>
.' t-'crtc |
it® >'? s *»• 'Cs'J

'
1
?$MR-J2-CT Setup Software [Foi MG]— INDEX TABLEfRotary Axis Spec.) - [Test operation] ||||||||j ;p|
• 4 it '
>• S-'iSÿtup.. i3bl]Hprtitor;-;-:(&jÿiscÿ/v UrJk* iayi, ;o :si* [Pÿracsigeÿ
.
. '•*'• . .. - .J
’
'•.ÿ•E-: : .•'-* V . • * . . ' • t 1 - . \ j\ .’v -’ • ’?.- '« .,*.-• • - , •
.> • i
i. If lift i
__
.......
'- “
i f ff , i _J
.....
r ai : mm t e. r gr o-up.‘ • v./: :=;
s-i *iC: u
• e r gr o up 1 up
ii
- ; ; *
/«' .....
...>.,ÿ ......
L ....
.....
.-.N ;ÿ
Fftt?oKl7''pc=iSn SSSEtS U£r ; '-

,
.
X will a ppear insi.U-Bm-1

:
-—
i-.,,,,,,..mm? «ÿ»
Zejro Po:i
•I,.*
nMMMpfc
_ j
IfeOlmne ’'ecig;s
Origin s e t
egree '1 19 2 . 74 4 - /*
.: '•
alii
'
I 0 - -V::
'
\rSh.e
[machine .
is snanred in J o g o r Step mode a.nd match to a sero p o i n t of th e
riapHHi
L
jSisase p u s h <Origin S at < S ? > button,
MHtttai
2a
2
5
1
2
$ÿMR-J2-CT Setup Software (Foi M6)--- INDEX TABLE(Rotaiy AK'IS Spec.) - [Test operation] sin a
mmm
r*i 5 c.
5
2 U l„': £2 Lip-Op iM.jMo.4or l 'DLiÿno-r-; •
}T l . ÿ ÿ t n ÿ i : : ;.\;Lb
«:;,;
i t ion
4 r«u n
F a c sm e t e.v grp
Pÿi— 1?
-......
n
&
F ar nme r. e r g r o up 1 : :y. i
Depress Origin-Set
.....
I ~ y •>/ÿ v V- 1
* - <
‘
•*
>•«.<
| <v F.b s Q 1 u :: e ;po s i *.> *1 n ;.ina i

• • >» in • • I
-2? r
;
i sat, r~447~i'-
'
Origin s
'i : ii,
iv: -;
Oar.t r i n e edga
MM&MNi
niaÿpaSji v\m.
itSSlilf $0£
a>d.& is moved in
Imscft:i :ae ,
o r Step a nd m atc h to
.•
-zero p o i n t of th e
• • • .'ÿ..
1S1SII
J Q r i g i n Se t < S ) > b u t t o n .
O p*
mmmm
please p u s h
ivi
“ =J.
:' :
r
:* v’
MR-J2-CT Setup Software
tV iDFile gjSetup
osition
30 .051
Parameter -group
P ar aicie t
[M )M onitor
e r g r o up
>zi
egree
MS)— INDEX TABLE[Rotary Axis Spec.)
(A'jAiarm
Operation-
Jo g
BP~
OM I
;f
i:/k
1
zJ
.
— ;
Depress Norma Rot.
-..oogpi
m
.
m
.
- [T est operation]
mm
I jNownal
i
y
:
“s*“
>-ÿ ;
Ml
(G)J
.
“*
_
..
Jfllxl
-“i
IK Absolute p o s i t i o n initial s e t (A)

—— I (Si 'ÿ
O r i g a n - S'et
•
V 1 >•
-• *•’ÿ• » V - .' \ygm gVl
< S)
j• ilf L
• “
$
nitial s e t nitial s a t 11 m f®
O r i g i n Set- Origin set
Zero Point. (B) Machine edge <

End(a)
I
0 . 000 egree 192.744 degree
>0 ; ;.lv-
-
The a x i s is moved in Jo g o r Step mode an d m atc h to a zero p o i n t of th e

machine ,
2
P l e a s e p u s h <0r±g±n S e t < S ) > b u t t o n .
_ lpll««p»
5
3
i
2
5
4
Axis will Rotate

Will Stop at Z Phase
ThisAt K is1 not
_kse ,1 c r
new Home
66’ '// /'tÿ
Cycle Power on Machine

P
US wmM iiiiSi
I [
fKfflSK
iim ttiist
mmm WiUfSMSSiSiit
MillMI
MiMiSMM
m , NN
:<sg?
=li
A
ÿ
%
M£i W&m m iiiiiii

tar
ÿST/ i=‘ÿ'JS%
»ssg
fyA
s* >A
a
V'*' f A .M % r« s
;1:
m,
<5
•4
g? H
iifiiiiii
mimmm IIIIISI
Bill g§
Sggg
2*
50
Si
l
tMimMM
IS8ii ..... SIBII*
mmmmm
<3 . . . .- . .
y. . -. ” '' /. .
m
. •.
•
A w is
<3
i w ft
• X--N> ,9 Xs\': &
iÿB Start
2
5
5
2
5
6
w% m %
g Accessories
fg
;<ÿ
* a
':c »
g Desktop On-Call for Mazak S'
£4* jjj
g
Spls
&
g
Intel LA, N+Modem
KEY HISTORY
PC Card §1§|
v'.sYV/-.•
vm .
* % ÿ ./ /i ‘A'A'y
liitili
3»
HH SwT1 ri™’?
Ig
g
Main
MAZATROL FUSION 640
_
HI Is MR-J2-CT-M6 Setup S_W I MR-J2-CT-M6 Setup S_W
g
I
I'J WiriZip
lÿj Programs
g
NetOp Remote Control
Online Services §3
mmm MMM
. g ORiNOCO
Documents
g F'rintkey
© Settings
€• «
m.
g StartUp •
V -
*
| ,:3 Find
g WinZip
* 0 Help
. Internet Explorer
Run...
— MS-DOS Prompt
| IÿJ Shut Down... C3 Outlook Express
•<;*ÿ
1113 HI
;r
l§ ) Windows Explorer
K.
4-. ,»’ÿÿ f ,
3je SP
:: 7
5
2
•:
*ÿ
.....
.....
.......
..........
......
.....
iliilÿdnps
Jb •> : . sjsj
®£S® 'SJJ®:®®
S; j .' hi §V ' b-
->n
«nfe: ;
Pÿs
;
'; ?.
.
i
gffttfHHl :' ;
'*,'\ i- i < i. .'**'' v. ;<-bV-\~bi:r'i:>

*;®i|lil V-v
I i
i
IS M
IF '
.
mt jiii >M
** MR-J2-CT Setup Software (Foi M6]-,'MAGAZINE(Rotary Axis Spec.) mum
_
2
5
8 I'FjFi'e (S;Setup (M)Monitof (AjA'arm .
(D)Diagnosis (P)Parameter (IJTest-operation I U)SetUp-Axis [ iHIHelp, ;
||||M MAGAZINE II) I Axis Select(C)
JEB3E3BHII Axis Spec. (5)
m
SgfAg'S# m
a
t.
s mm wgggsis
T;.;a
I ' ' '
I
. H
-J
. |ag«
iwi .
1 . & r, i
; V, v s'rk* ’ r j
#Sn • Vi
.....
.. ..
.ÿ
*
'rS- Ji-V.* i ',M5 Aa

i A ;
1’FJFile (SJSetup [M]Monitqr I'Aÿ.larm fPJPararoeÿrF.r.QÿlTsM'ÿPÿtstipiiÿAlM-lS'e’tid'pjÿKi'C'AFfHOHelp.
;;5?
2
5
9 »wW1
Si
>< ij
gfiSiarc
•
.v.v
##<'
'/ÿÿ F A
PWR l2£r situp Software (FoijM6)i”MAGÿNElBotary Axis Spec r
'1
a
2
6
0 j CEFile [S)Setup (M)Monitor lAftlarm [D)Diagnosis PjPararneter '., .lljTest-operatÿ WW#
r-r
'i
»Tÿflp«a,rph 3£* : :; *;ÿ
I .' ;
vtf. .•ÿSX*J
sa
v1
ÿ:ÿ Position Operation . i l • ... •'
/
i
I Vjiv.V :
—d
ftjjv
egree Jo g
1
J
i
i > ta-
> Normal Ro t . < G ) 1
W> '• > '
I Parameter group . ..,. . * p MUMP

-
;Vr
p
18
i
1 .. 8I
*.pi,,
d
—
2
I Pa r sane te r group 1 .
I mw
m %
1 t ;
E)
:v Re1verse
$ P r I - 81 :vi | ;
s
3
P Absolute posi ®€®

I
est-operation
WY3jn
H ft
I
I
Initial s e t
Operation by the external input signal becomes invalid in the,test
operation. Is it UK ?
. _ f .
,1 1 »ft fiw:;:
'
H
i as
OK ',$ Cancel _1
B1 11
mmgmmmsmm
Zero Point (B)
MS
•t
Pi sm m
P
:,;.y;:-.
I£1 prltAft#;
a degree degree
i: j'jt-t Y-iV*-
•>
Julia ‘r
i P-tv'
1 fcV** ': PS .’.,

It is o s s i b l e i to st
Mi
b
I vv. aj
I V;
isppfr
I :llv;'Vvv. .:V vV %i
l.gulu*' •A - vf 1
s
’/
prrS.iv •>>> .- ;
;<-f
i 1 ; • P b,
I
1
1
».
J
iai8Ills®;i« ;£ÿ
)
'lllil
$$MR-J2-CT Setup Software (For MB]-MINDEX TABLE (Rotary Axis Spec.) iia
©File |S)5etup [MjMoriitor [Aÿlarrn [D'lDiagnosis (P)Parameter iTJTett-operation IJJ jS etU p-Axis lHjHelp \|
est operation Im x
osition Operation . s jp ?:
mm
A ‘ : .ÿ
i EC mm A
8 . 689 degree Ref. return Ti

n; %
Normal **.<£>
Refÿ return
f* # m'M Wf$M
{Parameter group
. . ...... dis®
’?>V
a ra tie te r group 1
TMial
£\\
, 1
«I18
r xi l
se JUjt;v<E)$
fiuitornat ic
.
& 81
r~
r Absolute p o s i t i o n initial s e t (A )
rigin-Set S) < mm siistsis
jm mmmmmmmmmmMl,y
lii 8®
o \<
»
_
'VVM >ÿ
Initial set Initial s e t foXsV
i
: v Vi,/' ..;.; v,V
rigin S et Completion
$
mi'.
v
W-
y:
I *111
Ov
Zero Point (B) laohine e d g e M if.

I
1 . ft End(]l)
:
0 . 000 egree 68 . 95 0 egree
SS
__
.
llwpl®
Th e t e s t o p e r a t i o n mode is s e l e c t e d .
m m
H
2
6
M
i
1
s
I
1|§fl
ri.;.'......:nÿ;,:,;:ÿ;;2: IVAA voo
2
6
2
Axis will home to new position

263
264
Servo Drives
• MDS DH
• Black in color
• 400 volt
• Quick disconnect of motor wiring
• Has a replaceable fuse for control line
voltage.
• New generation power module
• Fiber optic linked.
2
6
5
___
2
6
6
Comparison DH to CH
• r*'
_____
iWWjjffB#lTi4-iilli. J*— mrHmms
Interface FiberOptic Eectnca |
V.-
- I y . .
Motor temperature
measurement
Thermistor sensor Thermal swiÿgpl
Spindle Motor
—I
cv
Encoder( PL G )
Serial Interface
1
Anal°g sl° al
yz-?:
mm
HF/HP motor * HC motor
Servo Motor W M; 41
(4.000rpm) : (3,QOOrpm) i
SisIHisalii asm
g -i
§§
Encoder pulse/rev 16 million p/r _ m
ii
yj_
m
ui
. ; :
• i
Features and Enhancements

mmmm iw
iTi i feTiS *3|1 1wii* r«

ML l
m
High i iffifftlwl*fiflf *mW&.
::•
T-V
w&w.
?vÿSi
M New CPC CNC unit an d 1 6 million pulse encoder ensure high speed,
•;
high precision operation in sub- micron control, A':-

:»V;
X,
B New servo system and 16 million pulse encoder with smooth interpolation'
AS,:
improves roundness by 38 %. (VARS,AXfS“500.,R25rnm.F1000mrn/mtn)

H New offset method ha s been developed to control stick-slip and spikes at quadrant
changes in circular interpolation.
}f ; •• ;
fSW
.
iw srit f
li m 2 1 m MISS r arid Ihign Speed Current'Control
fi High efficiency spindle motor and 5 times higher frequency current control, amplifier
reduce motor heat generation by 12 % .( high speed , no- load operation)
S;
2
w
...... ;
6
7
2
6
8
Mr-J2sB-CT4
• 400 volts available
• Enhanced and new parameters for better
performance
• Auto-Tuning is enhanced.
• New alarms, including overheat.
• Capabilility to upgrade the software of
drive.
• Easy disconnect instead of terminal blocks
A
MDS-DH
£lgÿ
If
mm
:..r
JÿmLJwSisl MM
‘• i
U‘.
Ti '
m .vÿy
if 1
K*
fill
mm H
issif
11
IIS
iw
:
•••; Mil : <

ill t$&W
V Jlffl & ;i
1 I K-VT,: ij J
jl :
il A
ES I Mp J
illa >
ill
111 33S
iJ?'--
.
• • J .: '
-;
-'•ÿ'ÿÿ>
I
tea
asm
..'.vfr'fr
V:'
s
£j i¥ f
« v:f-‘
111 :|
*
gS
: .f* p
t
B
Wz/ÿ |fljjf§ f L/U
f f;®
I
'f-« Quick
5
w m >
Disconnect
Motor
2
6
9 Leads
2
7
0
Top of_Drives_
Fiber optic connection
IB aaaauSSg
mam
.'-rb-*...
|gg3ÿg- 1 I
IB
R| $JL
I ir
. - .• • y ' Mv . i
.41
e 4: i
I JiA
mem i ft
:r »*i<y--ÿ. '>../&.,
IPIifcSSJ: - :::; rit

w.;ÿ.
iB *1 . j,
y i
s
'}
£
illil r
W4
i i .'
‘jSsi;
w
«ÿ - -i
: ÿ: H; IfffiSS
l'. .
£F I ui
I ¥:i|
•:ÿ-
ll gggÿ I?
V ;i p, <
mmI
'ÿÿÿ
t ****• ;
i-as :,;
>y
5?
Mm TP
•
i ;
n IP'vvM
g? i
S
i
/ sllimKKS
l*jilr JI? £
It •r :• :;.'l$*.,(Ai.
S'J iyg
|i
I gg m m BoK*M»' ga «3 '
liiHi M m 'ÿfrcf
lfazj
$.;4
m um
u;
n
;.V:-.*F .:•:
I
•
-£ m *: ;
>i~
'
m L
rtÿ LV .
If*
#la INIMi |H; ..« ; |l -4:
•]
p-~i -- ta |
r v.. a •
UPSi .
X: sc
gywjwn
Jpg st e
• v;
c; I~ T£ V > li i
J-I ;
f ip Sr j
i ;J
m
•v smSSBi io ri i
J
i;i,
ot
can be in out of drive.
Battery for Absolute,
1
7
ik¥b4
t: -• TS *yj( 2
ÿ
mS-SSS-l / •
5-tf
i®
S§«
£r~ &«gf
WSBBM -.a
Mm
P*j &j£
-ÿ. „-« ;•
*3
w
A
ip
,S
O il
PR I*
1
iill
i :i
M i
i
f.
i
ill
w & r.
n 1
m 4
t> .
f; j
—jjLjW;
3?
rrr
«ÿ*«
._ _ I
; guLZEÿ
gflflsl
*f|
MU* '-w|
v
m
i mm kfc
»: *M A
m ||feÿ J
ws**Wss'3c
• TO
j
I
s Mi i
1
ppppl
KÿiMaBs»ra »
i
JilSTjf,
SSMSSMI li
i
I
22MfflniH?Lt a s t
8 ITH
gs®
w
h 9H rSva
- • :i 0 sgffli
i
pHawi
1
iiii
uoipeuuoo AO 0} OAjes
UM
;;
I SI
-pam
:-
'
’;W~~ \
WMm
M f , ,
•
it SUffil
i-U
WÿBI§?V,TH :4Wli9| P
Mi
1111 aaa«
*£>•'*.>
IfeiaiaPa;. HR iii
Mi —“ BE
o
.ÿ • :.Yv:'>
:V «
8®®i
'
LÿJ Bltlgs
;g2i
x
,
«ÿ“**
rr
;ÿÿ• “ •’
»H 1
®
11 £$l*5
i
M §«.
B? r i ps M
su.P*
*;
• Iv
a*:ÿS’f.'>'-:. is s ' ;; v
fÿSm
IC2
2
i ; 1 5
'1 i§l;
« $*
'• ÿ
r‘
IS
g\
o
f si
4 1 rj
« • €’
i«:,- , . .;..ÿ8S .;:
fm S\S
.-j
fix'
• ;:
ptefeaÿ. :ÿN' V ./; \ >r Xs Vrv m

X-i
33 1 8 IE
I ft 4|l’«tli
- 31 .-; *V:
Ht
v-ÿ 1 &n 1j
S
'
ilp.-f lifis
'Hri
: ÿ$ÿÿ’
-v*
v.
-*•»ÿ• , *
cn
- w* . * '. • . • - *. .*.• -
-
i* r* • *
»I
* * • . - , :V.
i •
M®*K J • *• • -d
ft
-' :.: ;. 'r.
x: ,i; f si?[
o
*; ;\ '
-H-l- » v ;J<'X
si IS - -
—
;X’.-<V' -• • «''- i' • •-ÿ
<.a&
:v IS '
as ':ÿ
~ -
.:;-'ÿVX;Vr
MS • y.
gigs
••: :e- T*'ÿ Wi *y.;Vv
OI ...:'
.v <?
- |- s’.j- a //..;.ÿÿ
O g- il 1 •
:'i
-
</; . ' •
till
•
x
CM lilSL.
(Xy.v>
a '.
[ V;
ÿ.- > -• '
&§ÿ>
•. »
&ÿ.
IIII3‘:>vv V
I ci.VXS
• X*
% BB
(/) |itx|i;||>|f |v g
X:>- [K
III ...|I| ;
CM p»- p I ll|i xi11|Iff xf 11 1

jiXrXM
feiX
• - gr.wr»w» . ...-
—— r.ÿ; .'ÿ
:
:
<•
v-‘
.....
I tX-'X : - :. .
•
'A'*:.'
ÿ•
Qdii®-
1MBHiiiffl w&sfesaeD -
1
‘laÿga
M K wm
l
* SA-yuro y yy:-:y yyyyÿ-s

ai: _-
{ÿ• ÿa rr*U. :ÿal j--..ÿ | I iniiiiiM
;lj $
C ii
- wm h pi
v f f I#. : JZ Z S S?
Qi'lÿ
•
'i '1' v *
-
'X*S Tf. •
> yv ::S'V
272
-9
'
;|
f:.
f.\
MR-J2S-200CT4 ,'v
SM -J-Vtÿ:
111
: 1;
i.
• „'ÿ? -i'l. ;’;•.
J*I
400 volts j;
;i-
-
CV'.-tt Jfe “31.
IIS
i: :V
Larger than the equivalent MR-J2 wim

Uses 24 Volt for Control voltage (MCC) ?: ; i j Si
11
.
/
&
Has Quick Disconnects
i
11
•I f 0
'Kith
«•: »wiS :-
% % _ s 1'V
:
0
*_
rf ii .
'
Quick Disconnects la
-T4- i {•
’]
l L
I;
i :
ih? ill
t :
L
: 5 .
rfC*
v.
'1 -Li
m,
i; r
& 0 ;
Si: -':
:i
W if
@1
f
sa
I ; libs tiamaflirf 4
1 y
2
7
3
r i«ipi
j. - - is
' •
—
fJVinsUBSSHI
2
7 • *10.a Vci<<&::
4
wBaB
A A' ''
Mr-J2S-350-CT4
V* ' v ’ v
M
w%m A
400 volts /V''MBiiU|m IS

¥S® ffisg
Terminal Strip SB*
if ,-&iu£
ii
24 volt Control 1I
n i if A
.
,,:A-
iih
? I
IE
a ri p r> s
|
:
A B ft 5?~S
v («»
%
s I
*
• AA
A
E.
PPL
A
<l. 5*y #A I
|A i
;
IS
rm HI
P I :
a- i
• • • ' ÿ' -
iy A
fPU
,
E*
V
vy '
'v
if®*.
.
'
‘g
E :Iil
EE tE ÿu I
........
WV A {• ;
ftm
l; v '
ET
u
...
E
t
g3»g«;en« HMW «** I. E
m
aatag - ' liÿPsT m
jfe
: .
'IwKatesgigBga
- fiK1,-'
: EE’
'A:
m
i
A':
WMMM
aA
m
*
1
tiiifiiiafc2
?,M'r>..mJ» 1111
;;
m HJHI
iS-ÿlS EE..
L
- -- J
I BKSSBSBBm
<6
A / Jill
K<m A. 9, . 4A.;:w 3SStfSf*K
’
H BB rawiifcM
JsÿM UN
& 5
JP*
7
*• IKraggjg* 2
si
-*
$£
JE
n
3 KM
;* i ./ K.-;:,v'
S||5 i p-
jf
y-. f§
i
-:v
;ÿ*
jfV| PSi
I K,.-' r
;- ..ÿ5 m
sum
Im
n
mil
v;;::.-g:V:
am 9
a
BB
j '
a
• ' ÿ*’
'» ' • 'ÿ'» „• ÿ' -v . ,..- - -1® BiSSis
I
- m
Si
‘
'I' ?:• • ÿ ;. V
. ' * » ,J 1
*
SiSllilSIgiil Kill
H-dH
L1
2
7
6
Spindle PLG
• Spindle Pig TS5690 is a serial type and is used
by Mazak. Every machine but Integrex
• Consists of a pig pickup and connects directly to
the spindle amplifier. (No PreAmp).
• Waveform adjustment is not needed. Only need
to set the gap distance of .3mm
» Cannot view waveform, so Mitsubishi is
preparing a diagnostic function in future to

determine whicn pig or drive.
Checks position and speed.
Spindle Pig cont.
• Used on Igx200 to 400 series ERM289 plus APE391 H
(H/H) Heidenhiem
• Reason that we use is that Heidenhiem can get to
higher resolution than can be obtained from the regular
pig unit.
• Phase A rides 2.5 v with peak to peak of 1 .0

volt. Turn dial on pre-amp, one is for volume, other is for
phase-shiÿ.T
• Phase B has same adjustment.
• Adjust phase Z so that is 60 percent of Phase A.
2
7
7
2
7
8
Spindle Pig cont.

• Spindle Pig TS5691 is also a serial type
and is used by Mazak only on Mpx or Igx
machine for lower milling turret. Gap is
MDS-D/DH-SP series
The adjustment manual for the spindle PLG
TS5691 (Spindle serial detector)
Tentative version
* The adjustment manual contents of the serial detector TS5691 series *
1 .Application P2
2.Type name
--
P2
.Serial detector TS5691 composition 2
.Adjustment procedure flow P3
5.Adjustmet method P4-P8
279
1. Application
This book applies the adjustment points of cereal detector TS5691 series (MDS-D/DH exclusive use).
2.Type name
TS5691 series
3. Serial detector TS5691 composition

(1) The serial detector TS5691 is composed of the sensor, the preamp, and the detection gear. The entire composition and the
closeup of PC B are shown in Figure 1, and the function of each volume is shown in Table 1 and the function of each check
pin is shown in Table 2.
M Whole composition chart

Sensor part
PC B ( refer to Figure ) Closeup

Preamp
Sensor holder
m9 1H3
i
__
Preamp connector
(White) ,
e
Sensor connector (white)
J Detection gear
Check pin (PO)

|p)inted wiring board closeup iigurq
Check pin (PA.PB,PZ.PC)
PA PZ PO
15 5 r jT n
o I
PB PC • VR2 : VR 4
T
[©] I.
it
i
ilÿVRI L
VR 3
VR 5
'////
-J
Figure 1 . Closeup of PC B and the composition of the entire detector
Table I. Function of volume Fable 2. Function of check pin

olume Function l%i name Function Pin name Function
Rl A phase ofTset adjustment A A phase signal PB B phase signal
R2 A phase gain adjustment PZ Z phase signal PC Middle point Voltage
VR 3 B phase offset adjustment PO Ground (0v)
VR4 B phase gain adjustment
VR 5 (Z phase width adjustment) <ÿ Basically, It is not necessary.
(2) In this detector, A phase, B phase, and Z phase are output from the sensor to the preamp as the analogue signal.
It is output from the preamp to control amplifier (MDS-D/DPFSP) as the serial signal.
(3) Please use the sensor and the preamp by the same serial number’s combination.
(4) Please note handling enough so as not to apply the scar to each part.
280
4.Adjustment procedure flow
The confirmation and the adjustment of the output signal of TS5691 are done according
to the following flow.
Start
V
(Step.1) Install th e sensor holder on the motor.
Sensor holder installation (Gap adjustment) The gap is 0.1 5m between the sensor and detect gear.
X
(Step.2)
Preamp PC B Installation
v
(Step.3)
Connection of cables
V
(Step .4) Adjust the output amplitude of each A/B phase signals
Adjustment of A/B phase signal by using the volume to 2000mV ± 10mV.
V
(Step.4)
It is not necessary to adjust it basically only
Check Z phase signal by a wavy confirmation.
V
END
281
5. Adjustment method
« Step 1 » Sensor holder installation (Gap adjustment)
M5 screw
Sensor holder
Sensor
Installation surface
Detect gear
Figure 2. Installation of the sensor holder
c
O
ensor holder S
_ _j
n
Sensor
Gap=0.15+0.01 mm
&
Detect surface /-\r}
Outer of detect gear
Detect gear
Figure 3. Adjustment of the g ap
282
« Step 2 » Installation of Preamp PC B
Screw Protection cover
\
Preamp PCB
Don’t insert the insulation washer ]

into these spaces Stud
Y Y
Figure 4. Installation of preamp on stud
« Step 3 » Connection of cables
(1)Connect the sensor cable and Preamp connector
I [TCD
I
1
[©] [©]
i To the spindle unite
L
I H EK BB S a
T
Preamp connector
ISensor cable connector(White)
To the Sensor
Figure 5. Connection of Preamp and Sensor connector
283
(2)Connect the preamp cable to PL G F/B cable (CNPE1 ).
Preamp
a <
/
„
Connect to CN2A E
§
PI
J) I
I PLG cable (CNPE1)|
I'O)
[Preamp connector
iH
IP‘»n»v*H
Spindle unit
Figure 6. Connection of PL G cable
(3 ) The chart of PLG cable connecting wires Amplifier side connector (Japanese Molex Inc.)
54593-1 01 1(connector housing)
Detector side connector 54594-1 01 5(plug cover A)
Pin: 1 70363-4(AMP) 54595-1 005(plug cover B)
Housing: 172 169- 1 (AMP) 58935-1 000(shell cover)
PLG cable (CNPE1) 58934-1 000(shell body)
58937-0000(cable clamping)
Signal name
0.2mm2 ;
7 SD
X X 8 SD *
0.2mm2
3 RQ
X RQ *
0.2mm2
-H MTl
>o< 6
5
MT 2
xzzx
0.5mm2
7
+5.0V
0.2 mm2
0.5mm2
+ 2
X X 5G
0.2mm2
9 FG
Figure 7. Chart of PL G cable connecting wires
• Recommended electric wire:

Made of Bandoudensen BD20288 (The shield cable of compound six pairs specification No. -17145)
284
« Step 4 » Adjustment of A/B p h a s e signal
(1) Setting of the open loop control

*1) In case of IM motor (SP017=0xxx or 2xxx), Set bit1=1 ofSP018 parameter, then turn off/on the power line once.
*2) In case of IPM motor (SP01 7= 1 xxx or 3xxx), Set bit1=1 of SP018 parameter, and set SP1 13=10 (speed setting
for open loop control), then turn off/on the power line once.
(2) Turn on the spindle unit an d NC , rotate the spindle head to CC W direction by the standard rotation speed.
arameter SP020 PLG gear type (p/ rev) Standard rotation speed (r/m in)
8000 12 100
6000 384 140
4000 25 6 200
2000 128 40 0
* The calculation formula for the standard rotation speed.

The standard rotation speed(r/min)=200(r/min)x(256/PLG gear teeth number)
< Example > In case of PLG gear teeth number is 1 28 p/rev,
28=400r/min.
(3) Adjust A/B phase signals by using the volume to2000mV±10mV.
V(TP 1000mV±5mV
B phase signal
A phase signal
Vd c 0±10mV
VP.p 2000mV±10mV
285
« Step 5 » Check Z phase signal
(1 ) Confirm whether the Z phase width is 60%±5 of A phase signal at on e cycle.
A phase
ÿ 100%
1
Z phase
60 ±5%
Z phase width becomes about 0.7ms at the standard rotation speed
When the adjustment ends, stop the motor rotation , and press the emergency stop button.
An d return “0 to“1” of bit 1 of SP018 (SP113 is returned to 0 for IPM). Finally, turn off the power supply
of NC and the spindle unit ,and turn on it .
286
782
rt£M
bO
f-T
C\
-JCt
> *v >
<c ;? P : a>; |
a
i
nI Q. t,
r
I &
.y.--
Y1 '
r S-o ©i
•
f K Q IK\ H
’Vp- -ÿ 3
©ÿ
CO
1 .'
/
©
© <0
-
L \
i
5
i *
?
CJl
r
r V ©
Up \
i-I <J)
:
<& \ I
< *
\1 CO
I
i
wt
?•
©s| 1
~ I
— n ;
•
m
I CL
>
%l y
|
;°
—
*
r
**
a
I-
I i* |g — rsÿias
jÿ. jg
5
g |§ Zg. -
••
-~m
9
’
CO
[
m
JSHHÿP,
B i
£-Sr
m
i I 3
mm 0
sJIXI
m ® ll I
I y ;S'V©':| NJ m
gw l r i
sa
;
1
IS 0
i I
I
m
-' . * < ,U f’ |_X
-i .
: •
V.
S f
1 Si
StSPiiil 1
WffsÿpXSSffS? • r—
—
-~ .x©’.
MB
'
: .
.
m © 8S8®i ii
‘
X .
a §© .
-
si*
:/i : Cjsi
yyxm m
- i , m & SSiiSSSS . .Ifc;
X‘ v‘X *
2
8
8
Spindle Open Loop/Orient

• To place spindle in open loop, set SP018 bit 1 to on.
Parameters are different.
• This is now a servo type spindle, so parameters are greatly
different.
• Switches back and forth from speed command to position
command on CH, however on DH, will be automatic.
Spindle control signal for diagnostic display. See page 5-
25,26,27,28,29.
• Spindle Orient Shift is parameter SA96.
• If trouble with sync. Tapping, change SP 8, 9, and 1 0.
• NoAutoTune
Non-Interpolation. Interpolation mode. Same as Synchronization
Spindle mode- CH C-axis mode. Contains C- Ne w for DH
Speed & Orient axis an d Synchronous Tap.
mode
os. Gain P001 (new for SP002 SP003
DH )
peed Gain P5.SP6.SP7 P8.SP9.SP10 SP5.SP6.SP7
i
1«
.
1 m
fr
9
fHif
IP=
8
2
& gglU*
Wmb>J '
4 “y- mm &
4;' i..*>
f
I i] ?pr
'
->ÿ«
*
a
f>
1
U 1tetcv n” IbL
-: lii Hl
4
Ills * -
R«ÿ- :* •
Jp %\ l
',- 4
fsw%S
ma. r: TL£ 8HS5B1
m.
*• *
V
44 • *..;-» ÿ4%%
JHfLd — .- vn
>&•
a
i® II (ÿ
f; V -.-' • • • •• * •• ; • / • • :.* . TZ***
wm ns sa jr
V,
*1£ ..
.
-•ir
*r tts 8k *
IT
.f *#11 jpa%ggg
It |
(€g) -7:i
X '%ViX
«if > ;i I© t
\
eÿfcsi V>
3 j|p a* s$. I If ;
'•r-i
«&«>«««*£
'
>••'
'- : -JW
Fit
4:;:-“
HEP* fi
aB \ \V
X.
fi i3
Jns,
m V
%
|§l
IS:’ . t:: 44
<4
V
\ til
•
'••••. • • -4fl J
fi I
M- • ' 4 X'
1
''Tj
a KS
K
ta p
'
[/ ;4
Hggi >iV4: '
P8HP*
fWS
li*l 8 J 5S8 h
mm • :
Ift—
-i
:ÿ
€5M '-
't
srM ..jm (if.

KA
r;:» i’.fM
m • • >«
X
SÿS m TJm If ’mlS
i C-lVt;
ÿ':' .
fs5V;;m
jH‘ ;/ £ .
H HII ffli •• ;
• a -- . M
:- J
$m m
ainpid 6|d 1-96SS1

F-
k
290
Technical Notification
25. Sep, 2006
$ Model
H
Unit
7)
m Magnetic pole positioning of 1PM spindle motor with MDS-DH spindle drive unit
1. Outline
When the current model, MDS-C1/CH spindle unit, is equipped to a machine with an IPM motor, magnetic pole
positioning is necessary during machine's setup* (Automatic phase Z tuning). In the automatic phase Z tuning function, the
mi? tuning result (magnetic pole shift amount) will be written in the spindle drive unit's memory at the completion of tuning, and
thereafter, the result in the memory will be used. Thus, when replacing the spindle d riv e u ni t whose automatic tuning is
complete, it is necessary to perform automatic tuning again fo r the new drive unit in order to write the tuning result in the
memory.
However, in the case of MDS-DH spindle drive unit, the tuning result mentioned above can be set in a parameter, so it is
unnecessary to perform magnetic pole positioning again at replacing drive units.
In addition, please refer to below differences between MDS-DH and current MDS-C1/CH in magnetic pole positioning
due to th e change above.
’Magnetic pole positioning is to memorize the relative position of the detector's phase Z and motor’s magnetic pole position. As IPM spindle
motor is permanent magnet motor, it is necessary to constantly grasp the motor's magnetic pole position. Owing to magnetic pole
positioning, it is possible to grasp the accurate magnetic position by referring to the memorized magnetic pole at delecting the
detector's phase Z.
2 .Difference From Current Model Regarding Magnetic Pole Positioning 0
The following table compares DH and C1/CH regarding the major items in magnetic pole positioning
What is different from the
Current MDS-C1/CH MDS-DH spindle drive unit
current model
-Machine setup
When to -Machine setup
-Motor exchange (Including No t necessary in replacing
perform the -Motor exchange (Including detection
detection gears) drive units.
positioning gears)
-Drive unit exchange_ _
q (1) Set the spindle parameter (1) Le t the motor detector's phase Z Even though the procedure
1
o
SP205=0->1, and turn the
spindle ON .
pass.
(2) Set spindle parameter SP225/bit4
steps increase, necessary time
will be reduced.
Procedure (2) Positioning complete in up to 1, and turn the spindle ON .
and to 90 seconds. (3) After 10s. write down the value on
necessary (3) Turn the NC ON again. the spindle monitor screen.
time (4) Turn OF F the spindle , and set the
value in (3) in the spindle parameter
SP118
(5) Turn the NC ON again
The magnetic pole shift a mo un t c an
Result of positioning
(magnetic pole shift amount)
be checked on the spindle monitor Magnetic pole position result
thers
cannot be checked. screen or by the setting value of the can be checked.
parameter SP118.
3. Details of Magnetic Pole Positioning with MDS-DH Spindle Drive Unit
To this document, procedure of magnetic pole positioning (magnetic pole shift measurement) is attached. When MDS-DH
spindle drive unit is connected to a machine with an IPM spindle motor, please perform magnetic pole positioning following this
procedure.
[Machines to perform the positioning (Mx)l :
0
INTE200/300I II upper milling spindle. MPT/INTE low er milling sp i n d I e,
QTN250MS (Y) sub spindle
4. When the Change Starts to Apply
Magnetic pole positioning (magnetic shift amount measurement) by MDS-DH drive unit is supported from the software version
0
A4 (high-speed synchronous tapping will be supported from A4E).
As the version A3 and before doesn’t suppon magnetic pole positioning, there will be 5 seconds of display time at the initial
start of the spindle every time the power is turned ON . This ca n be solved by upgrading the software to A4 and after, and
performing magnetic pole positioning.
-Added magnetic pole Issued by Authorized by Sales Dept.
posilioning lo Outline 066-A Drive System Fundamental Development
1 0, Aug. 2005
Sec., Drive System Dept., Nagoya
0 Added models to which the Sawaki Sano Tsutsui
ft)
change applies
Works, Mitsubishi Electric Corp.
-Changed the supported 5-1-14, Yadaminami, Higashi-ku,
O software version 25.S(*j>. 25 Sep 25. Sep
-Added cautions to procedure Nagoya461-8670 JAPAN
of magnetic pole shift amount
2006 2006 2006
TEL +81 52 712 2298
measuring 066-B
31.Oct 2005 # BNP-B8959- 240-*(BNP-B8959-066-B) FAX + 81 52 712 3960
291
[Procedure of magnetic pole shift amount measurement w it h M D S- DH drive unit]
hen SP142=0, set as follows, an d turn the NC ON again. 0

INTE200/300 III upper milling spindle: SP 142=1333
MPT/INTE lower milling spindle SP142=U1
QTN250MS (Y) sub spindle SPI42-1 n
tart (Note 1)
Se t all SP125. 126 and 127. Normally, set

all to 0.
1. Setup for magnetic
SP226/bit5=1
pole shift amount
(Pulse application magnetic pole estimation valid)
1
Spindle forward rotation
(About S60)
< “CYC CNT on spindle

monitor is not 0
N J 2. Check if phase Z is
passed
Y
Spindle stop (Servo OFF)
SP225/bit4=1
.(DC excitation mode start)
I
Spindle forward rotation
(Arbitrary S setting)
3. Measure magnetic
<
Weak excitation lime passed. N
Normally. 10s pole shift amount
Y
Write down the value of 'AFLTdB on
spindle monitor
I Spindle stop (Servo OFF)
I Magnetic pole shift amount SP118=Value

that was written down
I
SP225/bit4=0
(DC excitation mode stop) (Note 2) V 4 Set magnetic pole
shift amount
r Turn the NC ON again
m Finish
[Notes]
1 Perform magnetic pole shift amount measurement without workpieces and tools With workpiece and tool, the measurement
result may be incorrect.
2. When the measurement is complete, make sure to perform DC excitation mode stop (SP225/bit4=0). Otherwise, after turning
the NC ON again, the initial parameter error alarm 37 will occur
3. Magnetic pole shift amount is different depending on each machine. When importing the parameter from another machine
(SRAM data), make sure to change the SP118 value to the on e suitable for the machine
292
T' l
) • [Related parameters]
Parameters with an asterisk *
in the abbreviation are validated with the NC power turned ON again.
• r e¬ setting range
Name Abrv, Description Details
• i i; (Unit)
Magnetic Set the magnetic pole shift amount of I PM spindle motor. -18000 to 18000
P118 MSFT pole shift When set to 0 . shift won't be performed (Electrical angle
amount When performing pulse application magnetic pole estimation, setting is necessary. 1°/100)
When in DC excitalion mode
D/A output Set the excitation rate in the weak excitation range in the unit of motor short time
P125 DA1NO channel 1 ratio %. -32768 to 32767
data # When set to ‘0 . it will be 20%.
Normally, set to “0 . _
W/hen in DC excitation mode
r-5 D/A output Set the excitation rate in the weak excitation range in the u ni t o f motor short time
P126 DA2NO channel 2 ratio %. -32768 to 32767
data # When set to “0 . it will be 50%.
Normally, set to P .
D/A output
When in DC excitation mode
Set the weak excitation time in the ms unit.
P127 DA1MPY channel 1 -32768 to 32767
output scale
_
When set to ‘0 , it will be 10000ms.
_
Normally, set to 0
In the case of IPM spindle motor
Used in initial magnetic pole detection of IPM spindle motor.
Set the time and coil to apply pulse, and estimated magnetic polarity in pulse
application magnetic pole estimation.
As this setting is specific for motor, normally set the value in the spindle parameter
list.
Flux control 1 . Time to apply pulse: Set in the [ps] unit. (0<Application time<350)
P142 F6* -32768 to 32767
ratio 6 2. Coil to apply pulse: W/hen selecting low-speed coil, add 1000 to Ihe application
time.
3. Estimated magnetic polarity: W/hen setting the opposite polarity, set negative
sign to the values of 1. and 2.
E g.) Perform 333ps of pulse application magnetic pole estimation with low-speed
coil. Estimated polarity is the opposite polarity.
SP142 = -(333+1000) = -1333
it Name When set to 0 When set to 1

0
1
2
3
ded Normal DC excitation mode start
5
Spindle
6
P225 SFNC5 7
function 5
8
9
A
B
C
D
vsn Overshoot compensation type 3 Non-sensitive band setting (Unit is 2°/1000)
E
i F
bit Name When set to 0 When set to 1

0
1
2
3
4
on Normal
pole estimation valid _
IPM spindle pulse application magnetic
Spindle 6
SP226 SFNC6
function 6 7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
T
293
PROJECT NAME:
PLG Adjustment of Matrix Control
The new PL G TS5690 of Matrix Control does NOT need to do PL G automatic compensation
function(SP245) like current PLG TS5276 in order to adjust A and B-phase sine wave signal
input into spindle
Also there is NOT a PLG PCB, it is NOT necessary to check voltage of each-phase sine
wave signal on synchroscope.
M640
CH-SP
liiSi Bus Line

Analog
CN5 jj- Pri-Amp
|
Si Thermal
m PLG I* ’
(TS5276) Spindle
Power Line
Mx
v
DH-SP
Optical Cable
Serial
CN2t I Thermistor
New PLG
(TS5690) Spindle
Power Line
294
r-
Replacement of Unit Fan

When an alarm and/or a warning is displayed about the coolant fan on the NC monitor screen an d the LED portion of the
unit, replace th e unit fan.
Drive Unit Alarm

r o. Alarm Description
A cooling fan built in the drive unit stopped, a nd th e loads
5 an stop
on the unit exceeded the specified value.
1
Power Supply Alarm
I No. /LED Alarm Description
Power supply: A cooling fan built in the power supply unit stopped, and
72/ Fa n stop overheat occurred in the power module.
[Drive Unit Warning

No. Alarm Description
A6 Fan stop warning A cooling fan built in the drive unit stopped.
[Power Supply Warning
No. / LED | Alarm Description
EE/ 0 Power supply:

Fa n stop warning
[A cooling fan built in the power supply unit stopped.
295
Replacement parts
Model Size
fl09P0424H3D 13 p40mm (for MDS-D-CV)
pMF- 04C24D Sÿ-RCA p40mm (for other than MDS-D-CV)
{MMF - 06F 24ESÿRM5 p60mm
MlvlJ- 0 9D24TS -RR15 p90 m m
|MMF-T2D24PSÿM5 Dl20mm
i
m
1 1 Turn off the breaker for the input power an d
. j
(removethe drive unit after the charge lamp on |
the power supply unit turns off
|
ft
296
H
V
2. Unscrew the mounting screws at 4 places to

remove the fan guard o n th e backside of th e
drive unit.
BiiP tv,*
I
V
jji #
5 SalllS i
\3. Remove the hooks (at 4 places x 2) from the ir..> 5
jfan guard and then remove the fan guard.
in
pS
297
El
Igp
%
8pgf|l
fter removing th e fan guard *

SO
11
4. 2 screws for mounting the fan. i

I sBiSlmM
11
...
I: E
i
298
Wm Si
i* -O
5. Remove the rubber bushing for the fan

power line and disconnect the connector.
m
emove the connector and replace the fan. :m
c
{dire assembly should be performed in the
reverse order of removal.
lit*
fe ,
-• ••
m
B
J /
299
MATRIX Maintenance Modes
Ivlaintenance modes which are added newly on the MATRIX machines are the operation restriction functions with various
interlocks used at the service and the maintenance To perform safe servicing and maintenance operations, the functions including
the feedrate limitations and the axis movement interlocks other than the equipment required the adjustment are operated, an d then,
servicing and maintenance can be provided.
1. Selecting a maintenance mode
Th e following selection conditions must be satisfied:

-The machine is in a stopped status.
-Manual operation mode or MDI mode is valid.
-The setup switch is set to the ON position (1) with the door open.
(1) Press the DIAGNOS menu key in the POSITION screen.
EOS XT 1 0 ) 1 SET UP FROCRJIM TOOT. c -e o iw ARAM o rm n io s DAT .A TOOL DISPLAY

INFO. DATA I/O LAYOUT
IN
(2) Press the VERSION menu key.
VERSION ALARH ALARM PLC MAIHYEH RUNNING GRAPHIC DATA ACCUMlf -

HISTORY SIGNAL HECK CONTROL MAIWTE- ERASE TIME
IN
300
enu select key I
enu key i
8
m
|
I P
= I
rrrnrgÿiTOTy §
mtt-iHof ii
—
lp|liijF0l ri
-
JL
't
fejai
PÿS'i
(3) After the DIAGNOS screen

press the INPUT key.
is displayed, press the menu select ke y
—K* _ . Then enter password 1 131 an d
4) Press the machine menu ke y and then press the screen select key i once. The MAINTE. MENU menu item
will be displayed.
(5) Press the MAINTE. MENU menu key.
MA1HTE.
MENU
301
(6) Th e items provided for maintenance purposes are: ‘MAINTE. MODE ATC, MAINTE. MODE PC, MAOSTIE.
MODE AXIS, MAINTE. MODE SPINDLE, and MAINTE. MODEDBB. Select die appropnate item according
to particular needs. Th e selected item will have its display highlighted on the screen. Select the menu items as required
one by one.
_L |W S J O' j 200u/0€/Q? [l3:23;d2

W 50% (~'3D Onlti~u [VW Onon/ula
MAXrtTE . U&Xin'E. tlRIMTE . M3LTWTB .
UODB MODE MODS MODE MODE
MC PC AXIS SPJHELB DBB
<Display in maintenance mode>

The WAAMITNG; MAINTE. MODE AAA is displayed as an alarm message.
(AAA: Selected maintenance mode). Then the selected maintenance mode will have its display highlighted on the
screen. When the maintenance mode is cancelled, above display will be cancelled.
Cancellation of the selected maintenance mode>

Tie selected maintenance mode will be cancelled:
-When die door is closed
-When the setup switch is turned to the OFF position (O)
-When power is turned of f
-When the selected menu key is pressed again (to clear the highlighting of the menu item).
302
2. Operation hi maintenance modes
Th e door interlock is cancelled under the following functional limitations:
(1 ) Functional limitations on each maintenance mode
<Maintenance Mode ATC>

-ATC/ magazine-related maintenance menu ke y operations are possible.
-Only ATC-related M-code operations are possible in MDI mode. (Usable M-c odes: M6, M17, Ml 8,
M19.M149)
[Ml 5, M16: M-code for A TC cover (Option)]
<Maintenance Mode PC>

-Pallet change-related maintenance menu key operations are possible.
-Only pallet change-related M-code operations are possible in MDI mode. (Usable M-codes: M70,
M71.M72)
<Maintenance Mode Axis Move>

-Movement at tlie maximum speed is possible by pressing the axis feed switch and the MF1 and MF2
keys at. the same time. Releasing any keys stops the movement.
-If neither the M F1 nor MF2 key is pressed, the maximum speed will be limited to 2 m/min (if it is
rotation axis, surface speed is limited to 2 m/min)
-The m a x i m u m speed operation is also possible for axis movement in MDI mode.
303
<Maintenance Mode Spindle Rotate >
-Operation at the maximum spindle speed is possible by pressing the spindle starting switch and the
MF 1 and MF2 keys at the same time. Releasing an y stops the rotation.
-If neither the MF1 no r MF2 ke y is pressed, the maximum speed will be limited lower (The maximum
speed depends on the machine type.).
-The maximum speed is also possible for spindle rotation starting in MDI mode.
(Usable M-codes: M3, M4, M5, M19)
<Maintenance Mode DBB>

-Automatic operation starting is possible.
-Axes movements are permitted (Usable M-codes: MO, M l, M2, M30, M99)
(2) Hand pulse operation for axis movement is possible, even during maintenance mode.
(3) The chip conveyor/ screw conveyor comes to a complete stop.
304
305
306
Matrix Special Menu
• Allows customer to add their own menu

keys to call up special softwares
• Example shows setting for printscreen
functions.
• Edit
c:\MC_sdg\CustomMenu\CustomMenu.txt
3
0
7
3
0
8
Matrix Special Menu Explanation

/.ÿHUP m
X WO /Si u ..
fi-ic iir /v-m ‘m.-. * \c\-:
Comment
Only *|j [Henu-1]
uNain e = P r i nt :
H en Screenl
F1 1 BP aril-c:\jna1 m e \ p r 1 nx: screen -exe
[Menu-?]
Menu Shown Men u Maui e = P r i nt Screen
F1 1 QParh-c:\jfla1 m e \ p r 1 rat screen 2 „ exe
1
j [Menu— 3 ]
|Men uNam e = P r n t ScreenB
F1 1 epaxhÿcsVaal m t e \ p r 1 nt screen 3
Actual File path i
«
and Executeable
(.exe) file
*
A
”1
Matrix Special Menu Example

mmmmmmm
File Window Help
iVÿ M -veaisna \i
i AT
ack ’ ?ÿ earch L
Folder; j
Actual File i is j
O*jl C:-5 0I C:\MC_sdg\ CustomMenu ;»£• £ So
Folders fvlane Size Type Modified i

G Cookies [i] CustomMenu.txt 1 KB TextOocument 8/ J 7/2005 2:39 AM
>:
• ±i
[J Desktop
Favorites H I J B B I BUSH i ...i
: - aaj
•+.: I j My Documents
.7; Q Start Menu j [Menu-1]
Programs MenuName=Pri nt screen
Pi 1 ePath=c :\ma1 t s c r e e n . exe
:+ G All User?
+'. G metpub [Menu-2]
Qj m6y_yrnw uName=Print
Menu Sc r een2
File Pa t h=C : \mai nt e\P n t s c r e e n 2 . exe
+• O ni6yboot
+': L_J mainte [Menu-3]
• *J MC.Backup HenuName =Print Screen3
MC .Direct Mode Programs
Fi 1 epat h c : \mai nte\Pri nt Screen3 . exe
;£ÿ G MC_Gl Data
:f: G MC_Machine Database
;.t- D MC_Machine Programs
S iG MC_sc'g
G Alarm
G CustomMenu
D cutest
D cutmorj
D cutres (3)
G dbl
D fug
~ I Mil
I Toollnformation
| Full Ptint Screen | S. SAVE|
it: G 1/23 14 : 49: 26
< > Aclive Piinl Screen & SAVE|
TUTT 2s% T n r “
3 Print Print Print
0 >
9 Screenl Screen2 Scresn3
(2) MENU
(1)
310
311
312
Matrix:
Howto select multiple Folders in the Explorer
address jss C;\

=olders x Name • - Size ; Type Date Modified
0 0CPCU
•
ÿ1 Desktop File Folder 12/1/2005 10:10 AM
±J Q My Documents 1 0 Documents and Settings
3 Q My Computer I 0 inetpub I Shift 1 + Ctrl

3’A Floppy (A:)
i 0m6y_ymw
S S 3 MAZATROL (C:) 0m6yboot
L+ 0 CPCU I 0|| Press & Hold Shift + Ctrl to Select
El 0
E
_ Documents and Settii
] Administrator j
0MC_Bacdup
0MC_Direct Mode Programs
Multiple Folders in Explorer.
/
l .~l .iboconsole MC_GL Data
l~~l Cookies j 0 MC_Machine Database

0 Desktop I 0MC_Machine Programs
S Favorites CDI
© Q My Document 1 0melpctrl File Folder JZoT, 7T9
Ei CD Start Menu j CCncbackup File Folder 10/26/2005 6:47 AM
l+i 0
S3 [0
All Users
Programs
1 >
_
0nm64mdata
]pli tool
File Folder
File Folder
10/26/2005 7:49 AM
9/1/20135 12:00 PM
i+J 0 inetpub
:
0 Program Files File Folder 10/23/2005 6:32 AM
i+l 0 m6y_ymw Ij 0 RUNMNG File Folder 10/25/2005 7:46 AM
Iddies; C: \
:olders X Name Size Type Date Modified
Desktop QCPCU File Folder 12/1/2005 10:10 AM
+3 Q My Documents ; 0 Documents and Settings

Cl inetpub
3 Q
E
My Computer
3’A Floppy (A:)
|
0 m6y_ymw
Shift n Ctrl
E 0 MAZATROL (C)
I 0m6yboot
S30 CPCU | Cl mairite Start Postion Cursor to Stating Location.
o 0 Documents and Settir 0MCJ3ackup 4 Press & Hold Shift + Ctrl.
*3 0 Administrator IK Move Cursor to Ending Location.
1 .iboconsole ia
r~1 Cookies :0
0 Desktop ,0
;+
V? Favorites
+: 0 My Document
0 Start Menu +- n LllI 11 File Folder 10/26/2005 6:47 AM
: |
0nm64mdata End File Folder

i? 10 Programs 10/26/2005 7:49 AM
+ÿ
0 All Users 0 plctool File T older 9/1/2005 12:00 PM
+. 0 inetpub 0 Program Files File Folder- 10/23/2005 6:32 AM
+
+ÿ
0 m6y_ymvv
I iribvhrinr
_ 0 RUNMNG
0 Voice
File Folder
“ile Folder
10/25/2005 7:46 AM
10/26/2005 7:49 AM
313
314
315
316
Remote I/O
<•
-V
__
.
;
6'SV
O
\si*i .'4V-
X1
Z1
-65. 3
023
_____
__ 0
(
2
SI
;--g
):
I
.
v? J
fk
'ÿ
“
si
HI o C 0. N 0[ y* ; o]
I
;
'
:
«ÿ
X2 0. T13- 0[12- 0]
si
* Z2 0. PC 47 C 0)
:
-* **in» <%>m.
,§L
izfe .3
*0
. r> £«
. £
j /ÿj ;
y
: J . J . .1# . a$<r 2 ,fc*
. II* 0 M |h v2 :
g
•
¥« . 3-- •V • wif'sifi 5. 0 “
i— g; o
•
:
.-£•ÿ : ym »i
C i ::.: ' :
•
zM
...
_REMOTE itO
/ y, * ‘
BSP j*
•
.-Ti
> v
'*
: ' i V
•
i v ... *
TROUBLESHOOTING
v *'.. */ _ •
e»ir*v
.
~
---*
X I 4 n
V&I T ,s
jmmXtL *'
|
1
.
3
JC'
Wi
H clI V 2 3
'
fLi . T L 0
11
* a
*
m <) I i R
A
rW & I »> m
MiSiga [ÿin- H
11 il
fir
<K?
« j i; gs
> rÿ ° R Iÿjlrÿ t
.v':
» 4
'.0®' I hi
r-. A
5 :K •ÿ
I
3 I T fulfills) Oil
1
7 m
a
..
Mg .
I
3
1
8 m rx \ raiwi rr \ r? \
n rx XRT
I
_y LJ\_y v_y v.
WAV'1''
ma
(ill x
*“ÿ
?|as
Si /: ;
iiSilil v •
m
File View Setup Window Help M# X-
POSITION BUFFER NEXT COMMAND

0 X 0. G UNo. ijjj Sllfe
Y 0. Y 0. IT f M i i'' *
2 -40. 2 0 UNex8 , •-
MACHINE REMAIN UPC
S 0 F 0. li t H 0
o X 0. X 0. X -100.
o Y 0. Y 0. Y -100
m ig i U1 7 G 91 G 23 G 94 G 21 G 40
o Z . 2 0. 2 -3U0 a -GX4f
G40.1
G 80 G 98 50 G 54 G 64
G G 69 G 97 G 15 G50. 1
li x if m i*fes fei
Hi
v}V'j V;
11 11
0 100 200
TNo. 1 ->-> TNo. 0 NAGA2NPKNO . 1 SPDL 0 min 1
\y\
SPBL; m SI
(CTR-DR ) ( i ( (i ) 0 H/HIN
HI
PALLET N
UNIT :
FEED 0.
0.
MM/MIH
M/REV -AX: a m
¥ T-0FFSET Di( 0) 0. i
I
If X
i
m
H# ( 0) 0. Y-AX: >
a
W|»«
INDEX 8 :>
l -AX: 110I
w&
5 REMOTE 1/ 0 ERROR (400008000, r 1 TP S 0

M Y.WV/'V
2001/01/13 10:29
A :/
mm/min 1 ZERO RETURN
..
: , : : •
fi lilW ifpi ‘
T ir I . :
TPS
55 REMOTE I/O ERROR(Mill)

9 REMOTE I/O ERROR (Lathe)
nfhF
-11 11 11 I I 1 1
n
n
n m H-N npÿF
r
A
55 1024V MALFUNCTION Note, , ) E H 0 PI

III
#1
ause it
ill
ifIII
Note: & Q0 C|C Q1 -—
lease contact your YAMAZAKI MAZAK products service station.
No.1
No, 2
No, 3
This is a Hexadecimal # If other than 00, it has a problem in that system.
system (XG~)
system (X80~)
system (X100-)
hatlsaivstanP
f||
til
pftl
m
j
f No.4 system (X280-)
VVXV,;
Take Hex # an d turn into 8 digit Binary

Action
M mi nmm\m m ti lim? Hits 421

7 6 5 4 3 2 10
0 0 01 0 0 0 0 1
tation m
Station 1
Station 8
’ WlatlsastatloiP
3
1
9 The above example indicates that an communications error has occurred in station 1 of the No. 2 system.
x \J
3
2
0
o nfhR
r
ru
I m 0
Hr
09 REMOTE I/O ERROR ( E H M Re d

An error occurred in data communication with the remote I/O card.
Cause
Please contact your MAZAK service representative.

Action
i /To dy u J I
'
\U\U
j n
w in n H rm
9 REMOTE I/O ERROR 2(0000,0001)

/ \ N
Station 8 Station 5
Problem in system 2
Problem is with station 1
J r-n r\
/
—
Jlf rv )
cm
r?nrr\ ;-s'
1S i wuup
r\r7\ m m ,-n
mm 7i /ÿNrrÿ
a ::
r
VJ3 \1 S iy UjV_yuJ
—
I
V uu
;
• • • • • -• ÿ • : _ ; '
za
File Window Help
•
- .•
VERSION j DIAGNOSIS HOW IT OR j OPTION | SERVO MONITOR] SPINDLE MONITOR HARDWARE MONITOR
[CMC] [CPU] t [BUS]

HR113 C HR122
-***' 5 Wd 3 • V.
[RIO]
1 u 8
1 HRS 53 HRS 53 m
§t|liWlmMMSm
2 HRS 71 ; HR371 HR371 m
pp i
3 RX312
:
4 HR371 HRS 71
§
• Vv
5 REMOTE I/O ERROR U0000G7G0, 1 TP S 0 2001/01/12

ss s
10:05
|W 50% (z$ r pm .
V#. 0 OOin/min s
3
2
a a:
1 DIAGNOS VERSION DIAGNOS OPTION SERVO SPIKDLE HARDWARE LADDER'
3
2
R1 pr n o
2
MI D UU o
, y-
fV F C¥\ m -iH :
Q
2
O
n
cv
:
sat ERtlTl: I« x|
File Window Help
VERSION DIAGNOSIS MONITOR] OPTION]

13
SERVO MONITOR]I SPINDLE MONITOR HARDWARE MONITOR ]
|
[CMC]
HR113
RIO]
i
C
CPU]
HR122
_s m r i t i i
.
& OD 00 07 00
T
US ]
No.1 system.: (XG~)

1 HR353 HRS 5 3 No.2 system (X80-)
2 HRS71 HR371 HR371 No, 3 system (X1CO-)
3 1X312 No A system (X280-)
4 HRS 71 HR371
0 7
vnm 1 -;
;
765413210
4 2 9 2 1 Jiinary
L Station. 1
Station 2
‘ j ra W ’ J 3
55 REMOTE I/O ERROR t £00000700 Station 8
50% [zjjl 0 r pm I V'A'V 0 . 0 0i n
IAGNOS VERSION
T T Sliii
<E HARDWARE LAC'D ER
&00000700 - -
MONITOR MONITOR
aaa
T\ /m a n n a
U O'
—
crq iu
I Qi D
VJL/
i JWULJL
File Window Help

i. m mmmmmmmM
>
ERSION DI&0N03I3 MONITOR] OPTION] SERVO MONITOR] SPINDLE MONITOR HARDWARE MONITOR
M
m
CMC] CPU] It 'BUS]:
HR113 C HR122
.88 xii1-. • -* w« IB - - mse-a/SK
Sc 00 00 07 CO
[RIO]
system (XD~jji
HRS 5 3 HRS 53
& 4 5
- No.2 system £X.80~)
2 HRS 71 HR371 HR-371 w vr 6
3 5X312
4 HRS 71 HR371
7
7B54|32tO
B 4 2 1 2 Binary
|
i
i
• vM 4 2
niojJ 5
5 REMOTE I/O ERROR f £00000700 . i
w 501 _D Or pm jV'M 0. 00 in/mJ

=2
3
2 T v,'.
. v
3 IAGN03 VERSION E HARDWARE LADDER

MONITOR MONITOR
&00000700 * 0
3
2
i
rn <ThR ns o D r\
—
7a ffb,
4
I 3 m r UUU0ii]liJ
71 T
2 0
S7\
JW
n uu i jo y r r
V- /
: in i m :w:
x\
File Window Help ..jV :
s VERSION | DIAGNOSIS
C1JC]
Hill 3
MONITOR] OPTION]
[CPU]
HR122
STATIONSoS
SERVO MONITOR ] SPINDLE MONITOR HARDWARE MONITOR
BUS]
m
Y
C
7
i Liu LG 07
[RIO] NoJ system (X0-)
:? 4 5
Na2 system (X80~)
£j
1 HR353 HRS 5 3
2 HRS 71 HR371 HR371 system {X1Q0~J
3 RX312 -'l-i;-.- ®§ No J system (X2S(H
4 HRS 71 HRS 71
7
7 6 5 4 3 210
2 10 4 2 1 | Binary
fl
Mill* —
*—
- STtof lohl
Siafion
Si alien
1
2
3
55 REMOTE I/O ERROR
vv
U0000p700y r
— Stations 8
(3® |V#i 0.00
50* 0 r pm
I
in/mÿ I4i
i
IAUNOS VERSION ,E HARDWARE LADDER
|R MONITOR MONITOR
&00000700
523
win
__ sm
1
l
£9
O
e E ra
£ 3$ OS i i i -( 15
a ° » 8 «
> [ £3
C 3 is
0, *
L*l
K
cr
S
*t>
ill
I
£1
:
- es
a CD $VM
i I :
(= )
n
i 1 $Y2“i I <*230> o
u>
C<
1 Sv2-«J tx23ii >•
1 ,,
O
<ÿ
SV2*«-i
N.
£o_J
EE 0 3 5V2'M
9
©
X
o
3D
o o
* m
o
II
-L
C3T0
« » • * * A
PS 03 SV3
t O T
u c-i »V
- *
W 2 v
c=o 3 fC
8
oz
o:
0P) % r
J
s
«
- ? 3
V IO O
' o
&
. .
\. ...A
OH
o 't*-0
r* o _
x
* »ÿ
* rirnr -*«i
S rz
— £v_r*
Li i--> i »
J
~
>
<y m
«
w
1
L:L
£0
CP£)
l CO
OH i
: £9 f 11
1651 Pi
ueaw
Q
I
—
C3
i
lieaH
5
t
Lj
; FH
£3 >c *D
> O;
—e * |C/>
o
o
—
K X
IPD 5
CP *v> > D
1 rn >
r
rLo > i-o> £ g
IPS CJ
4J
CiiH 2
o
UCttH u am hj 3
|M)
opiC)
I
(0
3 0 D
2
6
n d
|
P20 MAGAZINE KHRMISMNI
ss
’(§> ©
_T3L
®
_Q_,
HHRttiMlN] XL, XL
.XL, fXL
Sr
o o «s )
C. o
C
-0 tO
• -} CTj O
Is- s
.-r, s g
r> Uf> SO 2 o to to
«*ÿ
so 40
5 4S
CSJ
so
*3-
f
X X X X X X X K X X X X MO
©
©®©©©©©©®®®i§}®©@® 1
4024
(¥2601 )
n ]CHI
r— s
(« i«
n
£
JJo to
£rz
to
s ec X
i/3
% lQQ[l;ii i lilii: i i i
tt
to
to
2024 patter? i
tXT 6 1 ) 7 r
«<ÿ
|J «|) t|i ”4|T 5i|j 4i=y i
• *
C1D I-,,, CHS CHS CN7 CHS CHS CN « j
pa
IIIIII
a v Ti o i«i
3M B fr
n ;
aa i > SK
W
5
4(g'|'I '-®' |
t
a /
/
SET:?
Statin # an Se«0B= ®76 s 4 3 2 1
* X3024 (XT 3 )
JUMPER: 1- 2
Mazatrol Fusion Remote 1 0 I
Communication error count j
Spec
Tins function is always activated ( Note In case of lathe parameter 088 bit 0 should be on
This function is that it. can output counter value of communication error corresponding to the R register table below.
Each count value accumulated in R registers ca n be made cleat' by R5 1 28 setting
P.5 1 28
bit 0: Clear Max value (make 0 for R5000 -Eh 0631
bi t 1 : Clear accumulated value (make 0 for R5064-R51 27)
*When this bit is set . start ot clear ,and at same time thus bit will be off automatically While
looking at these registers is helpful, it is not. 1 00 % accurate as telling where the problem is. There have been cases
where the P.-register may be higher, but problem was actually on another station where R-register count was lower.
tation Station Station S tation S tatio n Station Station Station

Signal name System 1 3 4 5 6 7 8
Max value 1 R5 00 0 R5001 5002 R5003 R5004 R5005 R5 006 R5007
Commnicaiton
sV.A.'.AW.A.V.AW .Aÿ.\W/v
2 R5008 R5 00 9 5010 R5011 R5012 R5013 R5014 R5015
3 5016 R5017 R5Q18 R5019 R5020 R5021 R5022 R5023
R5024 R5025 R5026 R5 027 R5028 R5029 R5030 R5031
Max value P.5032 R5033 R5034 R5035 R5036 R5037 R5038 R5039
RC R5040 R5041 R5042 R5043 R5044 R5045 R5C46 R5047
3 R5 048 R5 04 9 R5050 R5051 R5052 R5053 R5054 R5055
4 R5 05 6 R5057 P.5 05 8 R5059 R5 060 R5061 R5062 P.5 06 3
Accumutated P.5 06 4 P.5 06 5 R5066 R5067 R5068 R5 06 9 P.5070 P.5071
Value P.5072 P.5073 P.5074 R507 R5076 R5077 P.5078 R5079
Communication P.5 080 P.5081 R5083 P.5 087
4 R5088 R5089 R5090 R5091 R5092 R5093 5094 R5095
Max value 1 R5096 P.5 09 7 R5098 P.5099 P.5100 R5101 R5102 R5103
CR C 'V
R5104 R5105 P.5 1 06 R5107 R5108 R5109 R5110 R5 111
->
R5112 R5113 P.5114 R5115 P.5116 P.5 1 17 P.5118 R5119
3
2 4 R5120 R5121 R5122 R5123 P.5 1 24 R5125 R5126 P.5127
7
Counter clear Flag R5128

3
2
8 REMOTE D I/O SYSTEM DISTRIBUTION FUSION 640 CONTROLS
Mills The relationship o f P LC address with remote I/O systems and stations:
Only INPUTS OUTPUTS

ROTARY
SW
USAGE
tation 1 X000-X00F Y000-Y00F N/A HR337 / HR353

tation 2 X010-X01F Y010-Y01F N/A HR337 / HR353
tation 3 X020-X02F Y020-Y02F N/A / 5 HR337 / HR371
tation 4 X030-X03F Y030-Y03F N/A/ 4 HR337 / HR371
Bus System No.1
tation 5 X040-X04F Y040-Y04F 3 HR371
tation 6 X050-X05F Y050-Y05F 2 HR371
Station 7 060-X06F Y060-Y06F 1 HR371
tation 8 X070-X07F Y070-Y07F 0 HR371
tation 1 X 080-X08F Y080-Y08F 7 HR371
tation 2 X090-X09F Y090-Y09F 6 HR371
tation 3 X0 A0 -X0 AF Y 0A 0-Y 0A F 5 HR371
tation 4 X0B0-X0BF Y0B0-Y0BF 4 HR371
us System No. 2
tation 5 X 0C 0-X 0C F Y 0C 0-Y 0C F 3 HR371
tation 6 X0D0-X0DF Y0D0-Y0DF 2 HR371
tation 7 XOEQ-XOEF Y0E0-Y0EF 1 HR371
tation 8 X0F0-X0FF Y0F0-Y0FF 0 HR371
Station 1 X100-X10F Y100-Y10F HR371
peration Station 1 X110-X11F Y110-Y11F HR371
System No. 3
Board Station 2 X120-X12F Y120-Y12F HR371
Station 2 X130-X13F Y130-Y13F HR371
tation 1 X280-X28F Y280-Y28F 7 HR371
tation 2 X290-X29F Y290-Y29F 6 HR371
tation 3 X2A0-X2AF Y2A0-Y2AF 5 HR371
System No. 4
(HR337 tation 4 Y2B0-Y2BF 4 HR371
Star
DOES NOT tation 5 X2C0-X2CF Y2C0-Y2CF 3 HR371
HAVE.)
tation 6 X2D0-X2DF Y2D0-Y2DF 2 HR371
tation 7 X2E0-X2EF Y2E0-Y2EF 1 HR371
tation 8 X2F0-X2FF Y2F0-Y2FF 0 HR371
329
330
There is the ELEMENTARY DIAGRAM LIST
on page 2 that serves as th e contents in the EL£.5l:H»Afft DIAGRAM LIST
_
PP3230003016 Draw By __
ELECTRIC WIRING DIAGRAM. As an SET 3
ChftcV.od By :
vx,
MM -
TS* jSreCIRCAUCW Approved By:
example, look at TOOL EYE (OPTION) 1 S&Ctf SKS TVP8 8aT-flW250 m\ &
n ••
2 1W.CHIKE lb. « • *• I «»•
enclosed by a red frame in the table below.

«i *«* «• M • *
CNC 7YPc fcÿOT it
ll »• l
«<* ii irf «
«lf
t> (I i i
iu' * i
il » p'm Oil ll • ,•
PIKEUS Ttips;
r*
il «« < mU.,i •
Th e figures 32000340362 indicates a drawing _5 MILL $*\m£\ &: W IP

• HU II I k
M»|
11 *
LJ Hi
i« *I»*P
M i
i «i
4I3UI
'* « 11
Ll
number. 7 IWK. 1 R>W Nti

j itoc % m Ux\
*ÿ*«
l\1 Ltf
ni
M I
m
l
«iÿn
• r cm n • *
‘*
[Ctot i«*ns
Taut
1 ti wr n t&x imr i j XT
» QXE 1 151/0
Enlargement «UÿJJALA2L
ifoyaittrt O NCSCC.U$i vrD
IjESggjig
32000340294 *2*0*6 REMOTE 1/0 COMMON glKSKM&»«»
*3
+a
H CXC U?l «)
a earr i.i<vr <sr
YiSgWmiPISl 43H4 U OXC LIST (£ÿ)
32000340303 *2*5 REMOTE 1/0 COMMON ai-giooH&ni *3<n H OX€ LrS-T IT)
JLSaSfiUJSELiJÿ- _
2000340313, *2*5 REMOTE 1/0 COMMON iqggMCHOltO
u { asflmfr&a
*3
>;
H cace LIST
M CX€ LIST Do)
_
32000340323 *2*5 REMOTE I/O COMMON M
Pgÿam Mj CM
W * CM
2 aMWMWffl IRiQITMf MACH?*
B 32000340330 FAN MOTOR -D &U0.a2Mi *L'L_ nc rwuETw .mu. (0
si 32000340340 SLIDEWAY LUBRICAT

32000340351 *1 HEAD COOLING PUMP — Tiÿr
%'J 3 000340562 *2*/ TOOL EYE (OPTION)

.53. smoimM
ii axosaefti
M awtwmt PUS
tt*QTE
I/O tiHW
cnoTF ia ) OIHPQIN
M4 * SUPPLY 10 D’l/6'
mam
I ti*m
?
32000340370 TOOL EYE< OPT I ON) JUUL &3&.30B&.
M &mtM ÿKW_
SiiaL ihvtttirtHtti .w.» I«)«ni
Hft IfcYtt
32000340380 WORK LIGHT iW #X<lRtfr6 StlDctAY UJWIWWji
101 <?2A5R03i1t INC W VxTCK
9 32000340391 *5 MAIN SPINDLE CHUC • ,7-vrrMfRRy no yypf-iPTtEffV
r***-
ill t-XL kYS<; CPI ICC)

32000340401 *1 TAIL SLEEVE/BODY jjM«a«aM». irlfX LUStfT
1 >5 &RIK SPtWLt SUCK
3200034041 1 *2 TURRET SOLENOID/S ir(.)g»CG4C401
111 3SCWW-1 1
«l
•2
H it ajEENC/POW
TigÿgT s<uiÿrc».ycvs.>R
7 32000340420
.....
_____
PCB PC I NPUT TURRl S ?ftS03lC45i3« PC 1 hFUT TlHYrT }
m 52SSjSa£45£. fcÿasLsgaauL,,
3
3 1 32000340430 'Mil
C-AXIS SOLENOID J.W.
w WWML C WtCIRCUII
3
1
3
3
2
A drawing number is written on the bottom- if C ?

* rmarma7 i J ( l ii
right corner of each drawing, as shown by a -Hf

i
gLa- rj
red arrow. Open a page related to the TOOL — —

. . . ...........
• A *I. ...... ifrr crm*
lJ J » .wo
I
EYE. W < <'K
* :
A
IU LU U> I 891 (II rs <*
ns j . 3y> m., i rrc u:if -4ii
;
iSnsftr
C2
— *»~ **-©
n
wm
ns £2 :<*&*- «...,
ns
r ;<.* *ÿ•
• >> .nimwa.
;o
iif
}J
&MT'&
LW
I ITU, m wi «-»
.0
J4
WTH-W*'-
ii I
_ W
-igr-
Ik* fil 1Wft.»6
rsx na icrim
;s
TISSS-
SISC
MU
nlargement
, rÿi&- -M8 o
M
1TBT at i.e»
LJu-J—
i
TITLE ail CsA <rT t-
i *ou*
TOOL EY E (OPTION)
20
21
—--- }..
r
- B* CiW4
? ua >
D RWH H o 32 CO 03 30362
A
?
arid Fore tan Trade La w 2* .'ÿU
J iw.’w HA • +'t«n i / CIKHMi

*
A BCPEFGHIJ KL
01 onvpp JP1 P)MH
23 IC
X303 '
R30
02 21
n 1500 6<Jtf
&
_
'i
TYPE:CB120100
03 1
04 12/10 f f 200WV
4 10
04
MACHINE SIOE *4
05 MAIN SPINDLE
CONNECTION BOX
m KM KA5
>130*1 K401 TOOL EYE MOTOR
’»
; o anoint
06 23 TYPE E221 1-444
30213 0302M
s r,M £2 § A, AH®I mo U. P. G. ORIENTAL
(OW/O. 9A/50H2
12W0. &5A/G0HZ
07 5 H 5 ''4T7
PLACE
0362 1 4 030213
24
3/\
8 —E § i< PUJC
XjlOl
09 c<d ft. » YELLOtf/GRECK
i
10
MB tQ1
NC TERM I >LAL
BOARD A3
11 [
~ IN
I XCF33 X2 KA3
niQ
§ 1 78 701 TOOL EYE ARN HIGH
w
fs
TOT. M
3 1 0)6101
F
¥
Y4
13 TOR. K
«r OB 704 109
TOOL EYE FORWARD
QlOIBICt
Y5 bl 0)630)
14 §ÿ I SB ns 1GB
TOU.M
iflf TOOL EYE REVERSE
010)610)
;I 036301
15
HACK HE SIDE
16
POE API
MAIN SPINDLE NC TERMINAL
CONNECTION BOX BOARD A3
17 2L-
1O0L EYE
SENSOR X 1 54 XII R3
18 «r 1
On I.OKO 1/4W
Sff 1092 2
XI 2
54Q8W.
3CSKIP
19 :<2- —> 1N
£5,0X18 SKIP (TOOL EYE 1)
W
IN 1 SKIP CANNON
20
2L*
/ XI 3 R4
:
21
22 OT USE
2» -O «3
3 • '»
w
24 ?. 36
3
3 APR' D BY CHK' D BY
1 URTIN 0Y TITLE
3
ADD, KA5.KA4
ALT
99-3/10 II. H
PIN No. 3« 2 ’06-6/10 H.H
\MMsk~7
iVKVKI VAZM (Dr.Ml A) IÿV S
TOOLEYE (OPTION)
DRWN No 32 CD 0340302
This product is subject to all the applicable Japanese Foreign Exchange and Foreign Trade Law
*rPc I
3
3
4
1) KA3, KA4 and KA5 are relay contactors

an d numeric characters 5 and 8M and ”9 KM
and 12” under the contactors indicate a 8 M 8 9 -YT2 *
relay terminal number connected to a 036212 036213 036214

KA5 KA4
relay.
036214 036213
036212 , 036213 and 036214 show
the area related to a function of these
relay contactors.
SOT TITLE
2) To see 036212 of KA3, for example, the
last four digits (0362) of the drawing TOOL EY E (OPTION)
number enclosed by a red frame shows
D RWN II o
the page number that covers KA3 in its 32000340362
12th line. m d Fore ii gin Trade Law
<
M-3 sfr 5T % ag k L 5ft -t „
- -cv
A • A
__
A if C > 5 y iv / J* .c i Jif*
iV « £
:1 U*
W MU
--
0? [{I *iu
CP—
——
-Ml
a*
—.
*•
'£> *L_ 'tifrr~4Pm»*
Ib- Hj i raw
c1, M- E
& K«I3W*
—
LU LU U> I SR. Sll B3C4
-£r~iZri$(r~ Ss— L AL.ÿ

*» - ML IKFt U2IT-MII
\™ il t
—
*
tftQjii A)).. JMflL...
C/
liSrar
ls iHE2~ '{M&rl
—
& 'to¬ UUL/
J5
r~ :<>—*
lJ;
---
.1/
£
IÿT¥ S5£ y. it
fjH IR* in ‘ÿi.i «e>
ftgl tf
3) The area enclosed by a blue frame that is f iyVK-p iiL it
I- >H
—
IH*. Jill
tf -MR
in the 12th line on page 0362 is the f ;<llr: *ÿ
»*»— njl— X liT BCillCX
-MI8B-
portion related to KA3. JS
i u » w : live
J*
y*
**
; iwrsf
u
15 $ .Las-Jg -+-~a-
l tae- 1 «
tf -%S —I Stfcf t £l Sri t-
4|<L - i
—r
y~«*i
n>
t>
PI
-tf-i* Silfc lÿoiMr
H
2; fts O-
W La *» > 8fa
&
&
* VHH •i.h TTF
W>
iJ I
j-LS.yU
>» «
TM;'f ;ry T >i
l-t|2L;ii it 1
iimn/ ’an tit >cp< OH |
pf>r H *ÿ x1 c -m 3i
’
3
3
5
3
3
MACHi ME SIDE
6
MAIM SPINDLE
) This section shows a motor circuit of the CONNECT OH BOX
tool eye. M IO is a motor and BROWN, X40 1
BLACK, BLUE and YELLOW/GREEN » 1 BROWN
show each color of motor wires. AX401 MIO

J 2
» BLACK M
X401 is a number of the connector, and

the numeric characters 1 to 4 are pin i A3» BLUE
numbers of the connector.
X40I
© YELLOVf/GREEN
NC TERMINAL
BOARD A3
5) This section indicates a signal output and
Y3, Y4 and Y5 transfer confirmation
signals to the NC board. XCF33
Y3 17B
TOF. Id
TOF.M, TOR.M and TOU.M are names
Y4 16B
used in the ladder. 0
TOR. M
XCF33 is a name of a connector and 17B, Y5 15B

16B and 15B indicate a wiring place of the TOU. M
connector.
i
6) KA3, KA4 and KA5 are relay coils and

numeric characters 1 and 16 indicate a m to 1M
1 n TOOL EY E AR M HIGH
relay terminal number connected to a
relay. a I 036206
b
i n is
TOOL EYE FORWARD
a/036206 , b/036206 and a/036207 alMS206
&IOW2Q7
written under the names indicate the t 16
TOOL EY E REVERSE
areas related to a function of these relays.
a\mm
a indicates the place of contact a and o mm
b indicates contact b respectively.
To se e a/036206 of KA3, fo r example, TITLE

7)
the last four digits (0362) of the drawing TOOL EYE (OPTION)
number enclosed by a red frame shows
the page number that covers KA3 in its D RWN N c 32000340362
06th line. arid Faineipt Tr8ds_Law
, T? C fife W fe tfe 51? tfa L HZ. j r>
3
3
7
3
3
8
pJ
IA ti C S> £ f C J T -f u
J* II
---—
• Of w~ ~n.
VLJH. w*»
Ill
n*
Iffc ai'J»IK-
-
OJ {' .££. Ifctijl KiM*
<l 4«- J
£V
M-T* H lijC
Ut uv 1SX Ill K7VN

$ *
—
IBM
i
&W.
I IK CJill <11
->v~
R rw—
**£ÿ \» wm
«
&
'iSTBW
i
UT.
cXb ri .. »- ..... M..
>; .laiVPin.
i
i; —
i:

-SM rxx in cnim
il2SS
portion related to KA3. ;s
-H*
;; B tm gjry
.«. •
SM u
;s & -a- I.Ufr l.rt
%
r p- - -i£LZ»
i*
: i
1C
u* ('tL mt
«*- UXM
r h\:-
.r16
:s
.V H — > 1
14s-
j
TTV
'*
r/r r v v*r- I [
.Mi
U
U\ »l
hi,
T/- VH
>• *
•*
-A'lU, j.{
1
i
W7 • aa ci* EBH |
p»p«*r>
k>„i> VJ i,1 J -x1 * nr A , - rr .

• y*
NC TERMINAL
BOARD A3
I . OK Q 1/4W
9) This section indicates a signal input and
X198 transfers a confirmation signal to v, X198 SKIP (TOOL EYE 1)
the NC board.
1M
SKIP COMMON
3
3
9
3
4
0
m XL
li
P- Electrical Circuit Diagrams
i
tv-
*
....
YY International Electrical Codes
Ft e*
B*Jim us ZL Lfcu. it*
ip .m.. ife.I- A list of the I.E.C. and

i• i
i .
LJffiL.. Hil ass.
V ’,
“ti*
abbreviations used to
*
write this manual can
\ \w
v i
’ÿSJJ
3 '
—©
_ y
Vÿ-'S
1 WHO *.-f-
.r“ r-ÿ-ÿ4
be located in the front
,
liawrffA'iC-
’ Y
SITS'*
mrT , A„
n
5
—— —— X f-
'£-
-A
— section of the Electrical
i Yv
JjP*’' Circuit Diagrams.
s®
• 3
Abbreviation Comparison List
CTW *.VJSUP.«',» »•*
rew'SPi 33H i I ST
lip. tir.i ., 1 1.
IBI-SHS*
V Vÿ6ÿ*vV» ail W1 >»U*llltt-S fi- it
»**•
icrÿr il cT*
nm* wnx> »W f”**is uh :n»ki
I &
W tvÿ-awa
1 #11
*
<*til li ir,ftr tMT*x «u*.> ] f*l*> f i
?*-*-
M1**tl*
GTi< Cÿ8 Cl
o-n-.'J *i
j a**. j st-ki|
4. 'St
*>*1*#i
iJ ex - I I Lit* ilitt*
Uil lilllJU ai-u
i
Sr,1to* *«o u«» «4»< J’tl tit
Ct-#»-
Via
l is* «<«>
511 ks*u Ins-'ia
tu
R.n «ÿ HI V-*»
fej »«CT Hrn MlfCX 14##
p
:;:.V
¥
Electrical Circuit Diagrams

te
pi
s :-.
_
-t=j
i
**tc»r> i
itis
<by;|'-.;;. : TTOfirj a
IJ
Breaker Abbreviation
. . ......
• * & mV VrtM*
f.s ; i
t 1* i
1 _iUKu_-i.t-.i.ÿI
>.' a ww«
'.t ;
:
&$v
1
i
--.- • v-- • 'ÿ
ill-;i
>- J
u ;t
— — — ¥:
«
®Lw*\«
i ,)ÿ
- - ----. . . —
T ‘L-_j- JTI 'i>t L_ ; j jrmÿ j i.xfc»rwt'.
. 1pJW*c
n
r
, V’
»
...
«•
lk. 1>~*mu T3ff ITflM

i .Entire area dotted
---
, ; Mi
1 j v +TU. 1*1 ft
_ J v-<
&
T* HiiJjSuwat
.,i*Ja o a a n t ;
-au.
'
i I /mv*f
Irfni— 1
i :-p ,:T>4 j-- JWSH ji
is optional ?<* • 4 - 11 <t)W
i;*j 9
-
--
|
Is n y,..4....Q, j JT3BS-+- *» «* n y;
I
I -
’ÿ
S.- v •
• **>*'*',
sw. KUtft 11 * 31
t| ‘ 1ÿ1* BL uacSi
«* M
i Vt w
“JS—. Vr* im. ‘j
m a
1* S' HI
fc
, mm <• < 'Jrl-r
j I
J
TV
tt f 7
l1 r.\
i
“V wi
Ti*|.
a -JSA, r
wa r
Yamazaki Mazak Europe
tf. w:» will no t apply to U.S.
i r‘1
*i Metric Wire Size& Color m-c

SI c n rm-M,
3
4
1
3
4
2
IS 7
-Iv
I
m
te,
i «&*.
I
fe
53*2ÿ3*
Sfe
fe-.<
V, • The 60 Hz machines manufactured in the U.S. are
r designed for 230V + 10% (thus a I'ange of 207~253VAC).
$ÿ
fel; • The 25 3VAC upper limit is to be considered an important
V Ui ** '
factor and every effort to avoid exceeding this limit should

m be made. The best continuos voltage range for machine
mi
operation is 208~230VAC.
l Ifcs
pr • N orm al acceleration & deceleration of spindles generate
m, 3.5% ~ 7.0% regenerative line voltage.
i
w* • W hen using a transformer, the 210VAC secondary is the

it appropriate target for machine operation, selecting a supply
on the low range allows fo r positive variances without
i
: adversely affecting the machine.
t; |
mJ 1
I &# •
»
; • W hen a problem develops on a machine, more than
likely the problem will be on the hardwired side,
He • Before assuming that the problem is definitely on the

machine side, trace the problem b ack to the PLC input
| or output.
ll
• A fter identifying PLC address, view the state of the
address on the Diagnosis Monitor Screen.
I p*-
3
4
3
3
4
4
fe
’'Tii
How to locate the PLC address.
Jr- Example: The coolant pump motor is not turning on *
Step 1* With the Elementary Diagram List search for the

t m drawing numbers with the (4 series) included. Once
the 4 series is located, read through the title column
for a related item and then view the drawing.
Examples:
~
|146|35400840220,0|AUX. MOTORS
16 7|35400840550,0|POWER PANEL CONTACTORS
1
|222|35400841140,0|AC-PCBPC OUTPUT RELAY

1
| Electrical Circuit Diagrams

- -* x -r V ' ”1
I
SJ£~
1 *m<w* *am s*
H 4 Series, Page 22, Additional Page B

l
•i seen
r .. I
f
{ — y-
y
SÿT
j
]* I
mm
i
This drawing
has the coolant
......
i
”L ,<•
v:
:
I i'yH ,
j
Xvjm,
tfÿf
I j**
-
»*
1
»
*
ssraw ij
pumps 3 phase
motor.
y “
A:
f
r Now for step 2
P *h£
~ locate the coil
.....
n- r
......
T
H that will engage
c the contactor.
I
ÿ:*''*fc;S:.:E532lB3iiii5S5B?a3
p
y
.- - - — ,.
w
s.**£
ÿ
' — j m g m l j-
3
4
5
3
4
6
1
M&'m
8
*'•
S” Electrical Circuit Diagrams
fife: |
H 5.%-.
ft
—
V; USS* rnm *m i* 3.9ms1
I mm# *.
t. #» *• S
, j - w&m 4 Series, Page 22, Additional Page §

-au.
Thermal Relay i: PM#
1- f1 l*U| Wire#
ii \~T
V1.W~- .....
.... V»
,W,«|A i
ES 333jB jrtj
i **ÿ»
sura
** gtisg
iQDl
I It *
_ FU
UIS
?**
• S SO
4 -
15
*15
—
3 rn ..
<4.tL..
221 s;
-— -V-
MIS
i>* ijE l 3- * cosLmt PUMP Hero?
I ;
ontactor Pin #
i
i.
i
2$ OBUi 5 hvf—
26
/r MÿmaiwasBit
,c
IS+m ?** VgLLCW:/tiHfEM
l\
;
711 ivFTTT
I'I Tutu
t *PMH
:r:::aTtA
|
&
i* k
La-
f
/;
R* 2 3
1 3 ISSE ISÿSEsÿri.
;
&2&JLLJJ Itazasd
ki
SM ; T7v
B
| *
'.••ÿ' ' -. v- -~-'v ~
<
'
p 2
ft«8 **€» n»€t
This drawing
I I 1
ftfti
4 F11
n MYIJRRJ.IC r y * e wjrw
has the coolant
........
iift- * >4
il 6
AJBUWI
211 | pumps motor
5 wct« rtlJ Fit t*lj
m m** starter coil.
_—
B
>
- M -I W I
'§1
lit 4 \
- -• .
• 511 MI mi
COCLANT P'X’ K)TC« -S
U
.<l L S-1 Me for step 3
i 12 U 14
locate the relay
0b,
-ft r.marm
l M coil that will
IS
'drt)\’ntri~
2si
hft—M
IS
engage the relay
1 it
i*
Hi
m\ \
contact.
Li I Series, Page 55 , Additional Page 0
ft-
'
3
4
7
3
4
8
Ip
i

&
m
,Im
Wil i
m Tn7v I
i TJTIFT# i
1 1 iTn 1
i s n
rt TTTTK 4 >* FI
:
1 wrtjRxa.li 'OR
5
AJMBWT*
Pin#
0 FI 3 mi
WC H
*4ÿ6
. X5J1 tt m
IT W HDTOR
ll
r”i
feV;
i
IS
(CIM/Ml
_
: m
J IA I--* —t
Cross Reference W ii e#
To Coil Location K j H i
T I CHIP CCW
TO W
n*
Cross Reference To
F jTTT
NormallyClosed Contacts
ft 7
ITEISIffla? tor
I H
«TM”
]*
lb: i
f;| Series, Page 55, Additional Page 0
. ; *1
SB
Vi
K'. j' lÿyv*'
m
i
m: This drawing
#
it
?0
31
22
sHILH
aum
£hr@— Cf“
dOJSu
w
tt*ui
TJ:
——
V*E*
'*
moi
*
j
Vifcn
H<5-
umx%
H<5--
MW>
CHXX CPEH
}— W
CHUCX ac*£
» I*XI fi
has the coolant
pumps PLC
output address.
ft 2*
P 25 C3U J 1 1 50**1 K.SKJ
734 734 fSKM 9%*)
6
fc-0 <fii L2» ’ &JMr
27 cw W57
tan SLHre Now for step 4
a a-® «-* » YCfe
L«
n locate the PLC
cojj-.i «:WAI rx*o?
?«o )V. tail SLCEvt ft£vt*S£
m l % vtfe address on the

S?
H4 —
Diagnosis Monitor
Shown S : 5 QJJW i/lPD*
—
W C COLON T
2V-@ fÿ -4 *|
NexM Screen.
tacu/ii I
M-a I
35
.;
'
’w': ‘
V ' 'ÿ
'ÿ»*.' ”'.vi «• i'.’S,**iv I
Senes, Page 114, Additional Page 0
•
I
m
1 1 V
3
4
9
3
5
0
IP

<6?
£g
•ÿ•-• --v-
mmmmimmwm
.....
v .
rnmmmm
MB
l*
/M. mrsi *• % PCN *mxx
DUO. (Pf*
D
51
Ml X
J
ITTSril
a 4} i DU rr
|% LLJ »»ye»
CMJCK aosf
jcj—
r CIMMUI
£
>i«*
K FTW.I Cross Reference To

I
gTlniiÿx-
$1 Vi mull
Normally Open Contacts H
2T
5
*w *i
•J
*XW
L 3U*lt W-WO pm
:
/ fvÿMl i.JTTBTS
5 XCH44 L
s
CCU $1 I
741 *i COOLANT
?T
CH-K
cÿ-
V YOi «ÿ
r a w si i
FuÿT
rJ 35
HB Wire #
ft
Li Mg [y
/ X >-A ; '$£ V <
v . > , i#
HI M 4.l:A»i Vi. L sJlllMMK
I l EmTTmi
Strips, Page 114, Additional Page 0
|L *»
|l|
351
3
5
2
This is a newer example of the Electric Circuit Diagrams
? I 4 5 h. 2 3 m
LIfC
l (40040/23)
A
2 6 Li SL2 6L3
KMLG FRIO
6.0A >110
£L 1 LLLL HYDRAULIC RUHR A
' \
? Vli 7 H MOTOR 2.2KV
PC
4 61.3 Vli V3V 200V 50Hz 7.6A
<40300/12) 60Hz 6.8A
/ \
Z10
6 B
T2 HZ5
35 C DOLING FA N
7 zL +ÿ
MOTOR
* i
*
— oc 100 V 60Hz 0,15 A
/
B
ft PI
A c
10 4PC T JJ POWER PANEL
/0 UNTT
li 1M 15
X1030 KM10
12
Q1
—o
Hrn.H N N
B19y
2300 7 A 1 VEl
a 00 S42 \
FRiO
M3 AinA2
fee
HYDR AULIC PUMP
MOTOR STARTER
13
<403CG/12> 40300/03 . I
4-0 300/12
14 16
X 1030
16
15 S \
16 E
17
2L+ RE F
9 * (4D330/11)
FRIO
19 1349 c
REF
8 9? * (40370/05)
0 JH.
21 NACHM mz
ppi
c JJ BASE I/O LIMIT
G
SP I
23
;<526 '98 X5 5
“*• 500 //A 9 19y.: XII HYDRAULIC PRESSURE
£4 \ ? /
HYDPS DOWN
2L+
5
I 26 H
2b
27
£8
£9
30
31
32 J
33
34
TITLE should say
35
Hydraulic System k
A CHK-'L BY DRWN BY TITLE

A V /7 10' 27-98 10-27' 9B
HEAD LUBE PUMP
A MET DR
A CfWilD OVERLOAD HEATER SCTTCHG FHCM 9*70 60A 2/32/99 J &
YNV&m MAZAK CORPQPfflOH M.HDTTA J, BRYANT
DRVH M3
CHAM5ED rm KCTCP FROM 2SO VA C TU JQOVftC 1/23/99 JS 557K01403002
3
5 This product is subject to a ll applicable export control laws and regulations by Japanese Governnent
3
354
355
356
Its important to understand the
difference between how Electrical
Ladder and PLC Ladder function.
Electrical Ladder it based on
physical closing and opening of
contacts. PLC Ladder is based on
logical status of contacts. Instead of
close or open, PLC contacts are 1
or 0.
3
5
7
3
5
8
To better understand PLC Ladder

we need to review a few basic
electronic logic circuits.
• Digital signals have only tw o values,
• Ml and “0 ,
• “High and “Low , or
• “On and “Off , or
• “True and “False .
High
On
3
5
9 Off Low
3
6
Logic: Switches in Series (AND)
0
SI S2 Lit
*
0 0 0
0 1 0
1 0 0
1 1 1
SI S2
• The bulb will light only under certain conditions: what?
• The bulb will turn on only switches SI AND S2

are closed, for all other combinations the bulb is off.
1
Logic: Switches in Parallel (OR)
/
6 0
0
1
I S2
0
1
0
Lit
0
1
1
SI
1 1 1
/
S2
• The bulb will light under certain conditions: what?
• The bulb will turn on when switches SI OR S2 are

closed, for all other combinations the bulb is off.
3
6
1
3
6
2
Logic: Opposites (NOT)
Lit
S
0 1
1 0
• The bulb will light under certain conditions: what?
• The bulb will turn on when switch S is OFF, and turn

off when switch S is ON.
• This circuit is for illustration only
• If this was a real circuit, what would happen to the battery
when switch 5 was dosed?
Logic Gates} AND
mm
mm
s »; '
I
n> ; bacasmi
I
mm \ ' ' ' :

:r
y-'
f
i
m 'msemSBm
ii 11 ; B | Q
.
I ,•
m
I
mmmm
m immm
wo-Ii
fa si o
Am&rte NtaS
Pill m
.
:-<:
;r
I i
IIRHS&I
mm |i
- H
The output of an AND gate is 1 only when all inputs are 1.
Only when Input A /\N0 Input B are 1. the output is 1.

3
6
3
3
6
4
Logic Sates: OR
W'l ......
OR
Truth Table
[I
A B Q
0 0 0
Two -Input OR Sate 0 1 1
1 0 1
1 1 1
The output of an OR gate is 1 when any input is 1.
When Input R Input

A B is 1, the output is 1.
Logic Gates: NOT
fm NOT
Truth Table
r
Q
l
NOT Sate 1 0
Note that NOTgates have only one input.
The output of a NOT gate is the opposite of the input.

When Input s 0, Athe output is 1.
3
6
When Input A is 1, the output is 0
5
3
6
Summary of Logic Sates and Truth Tables
6
• Logic gates may have one or more inputs.
AND Gate OR Gate NOT Gate

A B Q A B Q A Q
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
0 1 0 0 1 1 1 0
1 0 0 1 0 1
1 1 1 1 1 1
1 is i
m
88H
Basic PL C
ontacts
In PLC Ladder the

NO contact is
representing the
value of 1 .
In PLC Ladder the

NC contact is
representing th
value of 0.
3
6
7
3
6
8
Basic PL C
ontacts
If this NO contact
which represents a
logic 1 is not
highlighted then its not
true and must be a 0.
If thisNO contact
which represents a
logic 1 is highlighted
then its true and must
be a 1 .
Basic PL C
ontacts
If thisNC contact
which represents a
logic 0 is not
highlighted then its ot
true and must be a 1 .
contact
If this NC
which represents a
IV logic 0 is highlighted
mm then its true and must
be a 0.
3
6
9
3
7
0
Electrical Ladder vs PL Lodder (AND)
1 S2
3
II—( )
XI X2 yi
Lets compare a electrical circuit to an PLC circuit.

Electrical Ladder vs PL Ladder MNC))
SI
J li
XI
S2
ii— (
* yi
)
2
S1 physically closes and X1 highlights to show you
that the logic 1 is True. PLC contacts won’t change
from NO to NC on the PLC monitor because they
3
are logical not physical.

7
1
3
7
2
Electrical Ladder vs PL Ladder MND)
_ SI
II
II
S2
XI X2 yi
Now S1 and S2 are physically closed and X1 and

X2 are both highlighted to show you that the logic 1
is True for both. Both outputs will now be 1 .
List of Commonly Used Abbreviations for Mazatrol PLC Devices
PRS = Proximity Switch *(xxx) = *denotes active lo w

SS = Select Switch
RS = Reed Switch
= Switch
SW
PB = Push Button
.M = Machine Side
PS = Pressure Switch
LS = Limit Switch
CD = Command
INT = Interlock
.B = Button (typically on operation panel)
.N = Signal to or from the NC
,L = Lamp (indicator lamps on operation panel)
.P =
Parameter related
CL = Clamped or Closed
UCL = Unclamped
OP = Open
EXT = Extend
RE T = Retract S = Solenoid
3
7 ST - Start T = Timer
3
FIN = Finish R = Relay

374
Assume that Alarm 250: SPINDLE START MISOPERATION has occurred. The following explains a
procedure to investigate a cause of the alarm using the ladder circuit.
(The INTEGREX series is used here as an example and the trace procedure for other models is basically the
same.) P250 Ml 209
HI {TOR R7000 H2000 R700o}

Ml 209
{WAND R7000 HDFFF R7000}
P251 M200
1 {iNC R2130}
F252 200 M200
15 4
M200
Hf {PLS Ml 2 28}
Ml 2 28 XI 11
1
HMf {SET M5003}
XI 11
RST M5003}
M200
8 WOR R7000 HI R7000}
M200 XI 56 K4
3 {MOV Y310 }
R7000= 641 *
R2130= -14887
HFFFF
JW< III
3
jHeiaory ( 10775 / 3Z718 S t e p ) Mode JMONITOR )
7 II RUN/
5
EAD HI .. >00 L
END STOP
When the MONIT OR menu ke y above is pressed, the following screen will be displayed
3
Next , Press the -< >- Menu Key
7
6
P 2 50 Ml 20 9
HI [TOR R7000 H2000 R7000}

Ml 209
WAM) R7000 HDFFF R7000}
P251 M200
11 [INC R2130}
P 2 52 M200 M200
15 i
M200
Hf [PLS Ml 2 28}
Ml 2 28 XI 11
1
HI-iHf SET M5003}
XI 11
[RST M5003}
M200
8 TOR R7000 HI R7000}
M200 XI 56 K4
3 [MOV Y310 }
7000= 641 *
R2130= 23891
HFFFF
Memory < 1077S / 32718 St-ep) Mode

'
f
H I- HP— H H jy y
Ti \ H >- >[ Y- TRIGGER RE0IST. HEX 8
Enter F5 0 using the numeric keypad, so the F50 ladder circuit will be displayed on the screen.
T4S M3433 M311 0 F50

1ST92 4
F 50 is “ON”. F50 was turned 113430 M3454
On by : -1 \
1. T45 M3417 F9 S
2. M3430 - \
—
3. M3417 F9 7
IH
There is no reason to look for the (3) Ml 50 3 M2Q2 M3111
three signals. Instead , yo u should HI- H

Ml 50 4
focus on why M3433 is a “0 ” it K E Y S IG N AL S
should be a “1”. “Reset will get rid Ml 9 M 3 1 10 (S-MODE) Spindle Mode
__
of the alarm but, it will reappear as H I- M3433 (ENBST) Spindle Start Enable
soon as yo u try to start the spindle M IS
again. M3433 must be brought to |j T4 5 (SJOG.T) Spindle Jo g Timer
Ml?
a “1 ” before yo u ca n run the spindle. M3430 (SPST) Spindle Start
RESET PB
Ml6 M3417 (SPRNM) Spindle Run Memory
“
I \— Nl/
F 50 X140
M3454 (ENBRUN) Spindle Run Enable
3
7
7
—
--
riemory (
II
1077 S
t—
/ 32718
HH
Step ) Mode
4F j
jttOHITOR |
F50
-[ ]- TRIGGER REGIST.
HEX
II
3
Enter M3433 using the numeric keypad, so the M3433 ladder circuit will be displayed on the screen.
7
8
M3 50 1 M4053 Y4E0 M5135 M5133 M3432 M3705 M3433

6768
lil lil III < >
M5128 M2601 M5326
Hf-Hl
M6948
HI
(Memory <
j| If
I MISS
10 7 7 S /
I
__
11
I IS
32718 S t e p )
I 1
Mode
i
.....
(HOKITGI*. >-
M3433
H :
L
I
Enter M3501 using the numeric keypad, so the M3 501 ladder circuit will be displayed on the screen.
X444 X445 M3 50 1
5725
M5375 M3498 M3498

-< >
T80 D40
X444 is PC input signal from

>
TOOL EY E forward end
confirmation sensor an X445 is
PC input signal from TOOL EY E
reverse en d confirmation sensor .
M3501 ha s a function to rotate the
spindle that is enabled only when
the X445 is on . The alarm occurred
because X 44 5 w as no t on .
If th e T OO L E YE is retracted, the
T OO L E YE reverse confirmation
sensor must be malfunctioning.
ISO = 20 D40 20
rso = o
M3 501
-
Memory 32718 S t e p ; Mode {ttOHITOR EÿC
— ——
1077S /
——
3
7
9
jfl. i j| i i,
j-f i I JSSE5 C ] TRIGGER REGIST. mmm
HEX
3
8
0
DIAGNOSIS (MAKER) - LADDER MONITOR Display
No . tem Unit Data description

xit This key is used to exit the ladder display,
2 Previous Th is key is used to return to the previous menu on the display,
3 StepNo. This key is used to search by Iad5erstep numbers?
Dev. No. This ke y is used to search nocvrestricted by device number.
5 -I - This key is used to search normally' open contacts,
6 -/- This key is used to search normally closed contacts.
-< >- This key is used to search for coils,
9
A
Dec
t This ke y is used to search for instructions.
This key is used to change the displayed data to decirraL
_ _ _ __
He x This key is used to change the displayed data to hexadecimal
__
0
11 Trigger This ke y is used to freeze the screen when a monitored device
changes state.
12 Regist. This key is used to display a device status of either ON or OFF at
the bottom of the screen.
3 Run/Stop This ke y is used to RUN or STOP the PLC.
4 NC<-IC This ke y is used to transfer date from IC-Card to NC.
5 NC->IC This key is used to transfer data from NC to IC-Card.
16 NC<-HD This key Is used to transfer data from Hard Drive to NC,
7
8
19
NO>HD
ROMCOPY
PLCLANG
RAM. _ _ ___
___ __
This key is used to transfer data from NC to Hard Drive
This ke y is used to transfer dab between FLASH ROW and
This ke y is used to transfer data between FLASH ROW and

LANGUAGE FILE
Instruction Function
WAND ’AND’ Instruction (16 Bits)
DAND • AND* Instruction (32 Bits)
WOR ’OR’ Instruction (16 Bits)
DOR ‘DOR* instruction (32 Bits)
OV ’MOVE* instruction (16 Bits)
DMOV MOVE* Instruction (32 Bits)
FMOV • FORCE MOVE1 Instruction
BMOV • BIT MOVE Instruction
SE T ADDRESS SET Instruction
RS T ADDRESS RESET Instruction
(Resets a noted address that has been set)
>,< COMPARE Instruction (168Ey
D>,CK COMPARE instruction (32 Bits)
EQUAL TO Instruction (16 Bits)
D= EQUAL TO instruction (32 Bits)
]
BCD BINARY TO BCD Conversion
BIN ‘BCD TO BINARY* Conversion
E BINARY ADDITION* Instruction
‘BINARY SUBTRACTION Instruction
L DIVISION’ instruction
'• #
BINARY MULTIPLICATION’ Instruction
PL S ’PULSE ON Instruction (Each Scan)
PLF PULSE OPPHnstrudion (Each Scan)
i CALL SUB-PROGRAM CALL’ Instruction
J CONDITIONAL JUMP Instruction
RET ’RETURN* To Main Sequence Proyam
IN C INCREMENT ADD 1 instruction
DE C DECREMENT Subtract 1 instruction
XCH ‘EXCHANGE Data Instrudion
IT BIT ON* Instruction
Bll BIT OFF’ Instruction
WXOR OR * Exclusive Instruction (16 Bis)
SFL SHIFT LEFT By Binary of K value
FR RIGHT By Binary of K value
- HEX Value
CONSTANT
381
382
P250
0
H1209
G; TiaOR R7000 H2000 R700ol
M1209
CBÿ
[MAUD
PZ51 *
H200
R7000 HDFFF R700o}
t {iNC R2130}
ZS2 H200 H200
S
t A
M2 00
[f'LS H122GJ-
1228 Xlll
E [SET
;
21Hhr4f H500ÿ-
lll 4
f ST
HS003J
H200
f MOR R7000 HI R7000}

200 X156 6 K4
R7000= 64 1
¥
R2 13 0= 22 639
-[HOV Fypy Y3io
n
W OR R7000 = DECIMAL 641,HEX 0281 or BINARY 0000 0010 1000 0001

When WOR with HEX 2000 BINARY 0010 0000 0000 0000
The result wil be HEX 2281 BINARY 0010 0010 1000 0001
The result the WOR INSTRUCTION is now stored in R7000.
WAND R7000 = DECIMAL 641, HE X 0281 or BINARY 0000 0010 1000 0001
When WAND with HEX DFFF BINARY 1101 1111 1111 1111
The result will be HEX 0281 BINARY 0000 0010 1 00 0 0 00 1
The result of the WAND INSTRUCTION is now stored in R7000.
SET The contacts of M5003 will now be true.
RST The contacts of M50O3 will now be
5 HE X VALUE The HEX VALUE to be used in th e instruction.
6 CONSTANT If the K is to the outside of the instruction, it states a limited amount of
BITs to
If the K is to the inside of the instruction, it states a decimal value to use.
Constant BIT values
K1 = 4 BITS K2 = 8 BITS K3 = 12 BITS K4 = 16 BITS
K = 20 BITS K6 = 24 BITS K7 = 28 BITS K\ = 32 BITS
383
200 1
49 8
t 2170 K10 D170 }
P2 8 454 2
57 9
U 7 D2 3 K2 D24 }
23 D25 }
H470
62 1
{= KO D29 — IF D25 D29 }
86 9 >• H5 D89 HO D89 -[CALL P89 }

4 5
R2170 = 2000 D170 = 20000 D23 = 22 24 = 0 D2S = O
BINARY MULTIPLICATION
R2170 = DECIMAL (2000) MULTIPLICED by CONSTANT 10
The result will be (20000) an d stored in D 1 70 .
1
/ BINARY DIVISION
D23 = DECIMAL (22) DIVIDED by CONSTANT (2)
The result will be (if) and stored in D24.
~~
3 EQUAL TO
If D29 EQUALS CONSTANT 0, then instruction is true.
4 > GREATER THAN
If HE X is GREATER THAN th e data in D89, then the instruction is
5
true.
5 < LESS THAN
If HEX 0 is LESS THAN the data in D89, then the instruction is true.
384
73 4
230
— Ih
H23S
M
H230
dk {HOV R20 D617 }
ll }
CALL P16 }
2
H230
20 K900 618 }
[CALL P12 }
CALL P1 9 }
3
H200
04 0
t + D23 K1 D7S }
= o >617 = 0 D618 = O £>23 = 22 D7S = 23
OV MOVE
Move th e data from R20 to D617.
BINARY SUBTRACTION
Subtract th e CONSTANT (900) from the data in R2 0 (0).
The result will be (0) and stored in D618.
+ -MNARYkDDlTlON
ADD th e CONSTANT (1) to the data in D23 (22).
The result will be (23) and stored in D75.
385
H12Z8 X l l l
\hr~M- {sBT HEOOÿ-

Xlll
t {RST MS003}
MZOO
62
t {HOV R1937 D80 }
1
FR D80 8 }
H491 H512 2
85 3
u { 1-[{BIT R2109 K6
J XC H R1999 R1994]-
480 4
HH RZ109 K6 } {HOV HI 89 }
3
R1937= O D80 = 0 Z109= 0 R1999= 3 R1994= 0
SFR SHIFT RIGHT

The 16 BIT BINARY value in D80 will shift 8 places to the right, filling
the vacant places with 0’s.
Example: If D80 = 24755 or Binary 0110 0000 1011 0011 _
0000 0000 0110 0000 1011
BII BIT INVERSE (OFF)
The instruction is true when R2109 BIT 6 is 0.
Will be
IT BIT ON
Deleted
The instruction is true when R2109 BI T 6 is 1.
XCH EXCHANGE
The value in R1999 (3) an d R1994 (0) will exchange.
The result being R1999 (0) an d R1994 (3).
386
51 3
203
t
MZ7S
Clk[DHC D4 {
2014 M540 2
76 9
\br*r R199?}
—I H
77 4
{= K1 3
R1997J HOV KO R1997J-
XI 50 X109 3
40 4
Ih-H PLF M744 }
M5003 nsoo3
J-HH
42 4
{BIT R7005 K6 ]ÿ [PLS H378 }
4 =3 R1997= 1 R7 0 0 5 = 64 0
DEC DECREMENT (SUBTRACT 1)

i
Subtract (1) from the data in D4 (3).
The result will be D4 = (2).
NC INCREMENT (ADD 1)
Add (1) to the data in R1997 (1).
The result will be R 1997 = (2).
3 PLF PULSE OFF
Address M744 will be O FF for one scan of the PLC.
PLS P U LS E O N
Address M378 will be ON for one scan of th e PLC
387
MZOO XI 56 K4
3
JHOV HFFFF Y310 }
43 3
23C
II
G\BCD R44 D93 }
/ 44 K5 D94 }
H594
4 D95 } < >

H1199
2
88 7
[FMOV KO R1S8 K4 }
H229
if FHOV KO S4 K20 }
H378
4 81
w BHOU R2782 D1006 K14 }
R44 = 0 D9 3 = 0 94 = 0 9S = 0 R1S8 = 0
BCD BINARY TO BCD

The BINARY DATA in R4 4 will be changed to BINARY CODED
DECIMAL an d moved to D93.
Example: If R44 = 1 3 5 or BINARY 0000 0000 1000 0111
The BC D stored in D93 would = 0000 0001 0011 0101
FMOV FORCED MOVE
BATCH TRANSFER OF MULTIPLE 16 BI T D A TA B LO C KS .
A (0) will be moved into R158 ~ R161.
BMOV BIT M O V E
16 BIT DATA BLOCK TRANSFER
The first 14 BITS beginning with BIT 0 from R2782 will be moved to
D1006.
388
1
220{BIT R414 1S | [CALL PI }
H200
t
PI XI 5B
93 9
-\\ iPLS M852 }
2
95 7 RE T }
H200
34 0
t P10 }
PX O H200
52 3
f {DHOV HI D100 }
65 3
]ÿ
R414 = 22672 D100 = 1
I 1 CALL SU B -PROGRAM CALL,

Call SUB-PROGRAM PI
ET REtURU TO MAIO-PROGRTM
RETURN back to th e LdcRr sequence where sub-program was called
389
390
Matrix Ladder Troubleshooting
Introduction
Troubleshooting with the Matrix Ladder software takes a bit more effort
than using the previous control’s ladder tools. However the advantage of
having comments displayed while viewing ladder symbols will make up fo r
the added keystrokes.
First, you must load the ladder into the on-board area. Follow the
instructions, Matrix Ladder Monitor - Appendix A
Simple troubleshooting.
Once the ladder monitor is displayed along with comments, the next step
is to do a search for the contact o r c oil that is causing the problem. In most
cases it is to search for the alarm generated on the screen. See the ladder’s
or list most complete listing of alarms.
An example is alarm 217.
Alarms 200 to 399 which are generated by the machine itself, simply
subtract 200 an d do a search. In this example, this would be FI 7.
Now, the Matrix deviates from the M640/Mpro.
Alarms 1200 to 1399 are searched by subtracting 1000.
Example:Alarm 1208 is searched by F208.
Alarms 200 to 399 on Head 2 of a multiplex will ad d 200.
Example: Alarm 250 on Head 2 will be searched by F450.
Alarms 1200 to 1399 on Head 2 of a multiplex will R
Su 6 7 ftcT
Example: Alarm/301 will be alann searched by F701 .
Alarms 200 to 399 on Robot of multiplex will need addffifrfl. LJO0
Example: Alarm 202 on the GL will be searched by F602.
Assuming that you no w have the ladder displayed with comments, press
the left menu ke y till you see the menu ke y Monitor
Pressing Monitor, you will see contacts highlighted in blue when on .

If there isn’t anything highlighted, ensure that the top display doesn’t sa y
monitor stop. If it does, select the Start/Stop to toggle it on.
Monitor
Another display at the top to pay attention to is the ladder file that it being
viewed. When searching fo r a contact or coil, the current ladder will be
searched. At the end of the ladder, it will state:
391
LC Onboard m
The find target could not be: found. Find another program.
B NO
Enter yes, an d will to another ladder file within the M01 area. Remember
there are multiple ladder files.
Which Ladder file Pic Run
Being viewed Or Stopped
T
Til
X Monitor Mode
«* * »*« XMC
1* Or -a***?* i
l£*t
T •
Monitor Stop
1385
{ ur n
*1/08 t S3 mi
??*;
if
LnJ
:E I
rs ;
I?
CI-iSÿCE
MDNlTm
IF
i€Dto:
Searching for a contact or coil.
1 ) If yourf screen looks similar to the one above, press the left menu key
till you se e FIND
REPLACE
2) After selecting this menu key will allow you to select

FIND
CONTACT
OR COIL
392
3) Enter in FI 7 for alarm 217. and it will stop at the first contact or coil
of FI 7 it finds.
4) Pressing the TARGET menu key will toggle between contact and coil.
N971B
8775 Th H3h- -tf- k F17
OM.T
irf
X7 M9720
h-
NTE 0
Itl H TARGET PROGRAM
3 )MAIN374 3
H8010 N6011
F17ÿ TARGET
h:;M RE M s' I |CONTACT

RIP
8787 HV JT432ÿ <9718ÿ FIND

W. F1 8 D
| M01
PROGRAM
EVICE ARGET
$10 FIND : TARGET
PROGRAM CHANGE
Example above shows the search for F17 an d the target selected fo r coil.
When yo u are finished searching, then keep pressing the left menu key until
__
display shows th e copyright screen. Select END and will exit.
You will probably see the following menu display. Ignore its warning an d
say YES to exit.
•i
EH
There is date not preserved efter it edits
Aili '» . Mi »V”' d in the onboard edit area. The content o
,
- h e e di t is lost when ending as it Is. NO
COPYRIGHT© 2004 —I L RIGHTS RESERVED

1 | MO
YES NO
393
A p p e n d i x - A M a t r i x L ad der M o n ito r
2) P r e s s VERSION.
3) P r e s s LADDER
MONITOR
4 ) Select NC
FILE
5) P r e s s OPEN.
A) Display w i l l sa y R e a d i n g from P i c
B) D i s p l a y w i l l sa y P ic O n b o a r d C o m p l e t e
7) P r e s s OK.
8) P r e s s <LEFT MENU< key t w i c e to see in b l a c k now.
9) S e l e c t MONITOR an d d i s p l a y w i ll a c tu al v a l u e s .
1 0 ) I f still no t showing s t a t u s , select START/
STOP
MONITOR
1 1 ) If No comments t h e n may be t h a t th e comments aren't
selected to be s h o w n .
) Press CLEFT MENUC ke y till see th e VIEW, select it .
TOOLS
B) S e l e c t COMMENT
DISPLAY
C)Make sure t h e r e is c h e c k m a r k b e s i d e | | COMMENT .
SET when f i n i s h e d .
D) P r e s s
Still No comment?
T h i s is p r o b a b l y b e c a u s e th e comment file (*. w e d ) w a s n ' t
Loaded in with l a d d e r in s t e p s 5 an d 6 .
A) Keep p r e s s i n g CLEFT M E N U C ke y till you se e th e
screen .
SETTING
) SETTING
E) C l i c k on th e STORAGE PATH Box s o it is h i g h l i g h t e d

o r j u s t p r e s s arrow down key to h i g h l i g h t it .
F ) T he pathway s h o u l d be C : \m6y_ymw\MPLC
H) P r e s s th e L e f t menu ke y an select NC
FILE
I) Repeat s t e p s 5 t h r o u g h 1 1 to se e th e la d de r w i t h
comments .
394
Matrix Ladder Save Procedure.
Ensure both ladder and comments are saved.
1 ) P r e s s DIAGNOS.
2) P r e s s VERSION. S e l e c t >RIGHT MENU> ke y an d e n t e r 1 1 3 1 an d
press Input.
3) P r e s s LADDER
MONITOR
4 ) Select NC
FILE
5 ) P r e s s OPEN .
A)Display will say “Reading from Pic”
B) D i s p l a y w i l l say P ic O n b o a r d C o m p l e t e
7 P r e s s OK .
)
8) P r e s s CLEFT MENUC key t w i c e to se e LADDER in b l a c k now.
9) S e l e c t MONITOR an d d i s p l a y w ill a c u a values .
1 0) If still not showing status, select START/
STOP
MONITOR
1 1 ) If comments t h e n may b e t h a t th e comments aren't
No
s e l e c t e d to be s h o w n .
) Press CLEFT MENUC key till se e th e VIEW, select it .
TOOLS
B) S e l e c t COMMENT
DISPLAY
C)Make s u r e t h e r e is c h e c k m a r k b e s i d e | | COMMENT .
D) P r e s s SE T when f i n i s h e d .
Still No comment?
T h i s is p r o b a b l y beca u s e th e comment file (*. w e d ) w a s n ' t
Loaded in with l a d d e r in s t e p s 5 an d 6.
A) Keep p r e s s i n g CLEFT MENUC key till yo u se e he
screen .
SETTING
) SETTING
E) C l i c k on th e STORAGE PATH Box s o it is h i g h l i g h t e d

o r j u s t p r e s s arrow down ke y to h i g h l i g h t it .
F) The pathway s h o u l d b e C : \m6y_ymw\MPLC
H) P r e s s th e L e f t menu ke y an select NC
FILE
Repeat steps 5 t h r o u g h 10 to see th e ladder with comments.
395
l a d d e r an d comments a re shown,
1 2 ) If go to next s t e p to
save l a d d e r an d comment file.
13) Press CLEFT MENUC key till see th e C o p y r i g h t s c r e e n , th e

LADDER must be shown a s s o l i d b l a c k .
14) Press NC
FILE
15) P r e s s OPEN
16) P r e s s OPEN a g a i n .
17) S e l e c t OK .
18) P r e s s CLEFT MENUC ke y till se e C o p y r i g h t screen a g a i n .
19) S e l e c t I EXTERNAL
FILE
20) Press SAVE

PROJECT
21 ) P r e s s EXTERNAL
SAVE
22) If a USB j u m p d r i v e is inserted, then make sure t h a t

th e is s e t correctly to th e d r i v e .
23) S e l e c t PROJECT
NAME
24) E n t e r in an a p p r o p r i a t e filename, normally ladder

version .
25 ) P r e s s SAVE.
26) Select OK.

The l a d d e r is now s a v e d to th e USB J u m p d r i v e .
N o t e : T he LP C file is n o t s a v e d w i t h th e ladder. It must b e

c o p i e d from t h e c:\m6y ymw\mplc o r tplc folder.
27 )S a v e th e * . lp c an d * . a l m an d * . b m p files from th e
c:\m6y_ymw\mplc o r tplc f o l d e r s u s i n g Windows E x p l o r e r .
N ote : N ote : When th e project ladder iss a v e d , it will b e a

folder that i n c l u d e s sub-folders c o n t a i n i n g th e l a d d e r a n d
comments . The lathe, e - m a c h i n e , a n d mill's file s t r u c t u r e
a r e different.
F o l l o w i n g e x a m p l e shows for Integrex M a r k IV .
396
S~€3 373MX11B >«* ame >
__ I Size | Type
_
j B- Q Resource HM SV'fe
LJ U Resource
&)Gppw.gpj 1 KB
File Folder
GX Developer Project
• l __ J
JC*U~
B-y Pou
Others 373MX11B
_ Project.inf
3 KB
1 KB
GX Developer Project
Setup Information
Select an item to view its description. ProjectDB.mdb 78 KB Microsoft Access Da. . .
l_J Body
Gppw * , P ro ject . in f , and ProjectDB.mdb a re structure

files for pic. Do n o t change/remove a n y o f these from the
project's l a d d e r f i l e n a m e .
U n d e r R e s o u r c e folder is a d d i t i o n a l folders, O t h e r s , P o u ,
a n d th e file param.wpa. Do n o t c h a n g e / a l ter/remove a n y .
I I ‘JOII 1C
[_] Others
,*7.7*
L-JPOU
esource 11 param.wpa
Name Size j Type

LT:N---
j wwanwifllt if] 373MX1 lB.wcd 317 KB WCD File
fe-
Others
T he O t h e r s folder c o n t a i n s th e comments for th e l a d d e r

which is u s e d for l a d d e r display.
Under th e Po u folder is a folder called Body w h i c h contains

th e actual l a d d e r file .
Name / bize Type

Li LIWIWIJ *] 373MX1A8 . wp g 207 KB WPG File
Body
As stated earlier, E -m ac h in e a nd Mills file/folder

s t r u c t u r e may b e different for th e pic ladder.
397
398
M a t ri x P ic L a d d e r U p d a t e P r o c e d u r e R4 .
Added saving of ladder to hard drive c:\ladder(step 1 and 13 revised(R4))
1) Backup th e existing l a d d e r if not d o n e a l r e a d y an d copy

in th e new l a d d e r from p o r t a b l e d e v i c e , p r o b a b l y USB
d r i v e to C : \Ladder (R 4 ) . T h i s ensures t h a t th e l a d d e r
w i l l b e b a c k e d up p r o p e r l y in f u t u r e u s i n g th e backup
softwares .
N o t e : P o w e r o f f an d on b e t w e e n b a c k u p o f l a d d e r so that
th e L a d d e r O n b o a r d Sram d o e s n ' t h a v e existing l a d d e r in
it .
F i r s t p a r t w i l l be to load i n t o th e L a d d e r - F (M01 area) ,
2n d p a r t is to l o a d i n t o Ladder-B (M02 area) . The M 01 area
c o n t r o l s a c t u a l m a c h i n e an d M02 c o n t r o l s s i m u l a t i o n . T h e s e
l a d d e r s a r e identical so o n l y n e e d b a c k u p M01 a r e a .
3) P r e s s VERSION. S e l e c t >RIGHT MENU> key an d e n t e r 1 1 3 1
an d p r e s s Input.
4 ) Press LADDER
MONITOR
5) Select NC
FILE
6) Select PLC
Run/ S t o p
7) Select YES to s t o p th e pic. Status b e f o r e y es is RUN.

Q u e s t i o n bo x w i l l d i s a p p e a r . N o t e t h a t d o e s n ' t sa y
PLC STOP l i k e M640.
8) Press DELETE .
) Press EL. AL L Then DELETE again an d select YES

/CANCEL
10) P r e s s OK. In red, you'll see WRITE LADDER TO ROM.
11) P r e s s left menu ke y t w i c e S e l e c t EXTERNAL

FILE
399
12) Select OPEN
PROJECT
13) H i g h l i g h t th e file f o l d e r c o n t a i n i n g new pic. T h i s

s h o u l d be d ir e c te d to new file t h a t was c o p i e d to c:\ladder
f o l d e r is step 1 . (R4)
14) P r e s s th e SELECT b u t t o n .
1 ) S e l e c t OPEN
16) P r e s s OK .
17) P r e s s CLEFT M E N U C till se e c o p y r i g h t s c r e e n .
18 ) S e l e c t NC
FILE
1 9) P r e s s SAVE.
20) P r e s s SAVE again(2nd time).

If it a s k s if you wish to o v e r w r i t e , sa y ALL YES.
21 ) Press OK.
22 ) P r e s s CLEFT M E N U C k e y .
23 ) Press RO M
WRITE
This w i l l c l e a r out th e l a d d e r from SRAM a r e a .
24 ) S e l e c t YES.
25 ) S e l e c t YES a g a i n (2nd t i m e ) when it a s k s you if you

really want to e x e c u t e .
If th e p ic is somehow running, th e f o l l o w i n g w i l l be
as ke d .
A) S e l e c t YES again (3rd t i m e ) It w i l l a s k yo u a g a i n , PL C is
in R un state, Is a ROM write p e r f o r m e d , after s t o p PLC?
400
T r a n s l a t i o n : P ic is now running, th e p ic w i l l
a u t o m a t i c a l l y s t o p and do a RO M w r i t e . Is this o k a y ?
B) S e l e c t YES (4th t i m e ) when message w i l l s ay PLC is a

STOP STATE. I s PLC c h a n g e d i n t o a RU N state?
26) P r e s s OK.
27) Select PLC

Run/ S t o p
28) S e l e c t YES i f th e s t a t u s window s a y s : STATUS: STOP.

f s a y s STATUS: Start, t h e n p r o c e e d to s t e p 29 to u p d a t e
th e s e c o n d l a d d e r L a d d e r - B (M02)
29) P r e s s CLEFT M E N U C key till see menu ENVIRON

SETTING
30 ) S e l e c t CONNECT
NC
SETTING
31 ) P r e s s th e Down A r r o w ke y o r c l i c k on d r o p down menu so

that is d i s p l a y s M02 in b o x .
2) Press SE T an d M02 w i l l be d i s p l a y e d in O r a n g e M02
color at th e l o w e r r i g h t hand s i d e of display.
33 ) At this p o i n t r e p e a t s t e p s 5 t h r o u g h 28 to l o a d in th e
p ic to th e L a d d e r - B s i d e (M02)
34 )B e f o r e e x i t i n g go back to ENVIRON. SETTING, CONNECT NC

SETTING, and p r e s s Down A r r o w ke y to r e s e l e c t M01 .
3 5) If th e lp c file is to be u p d a t e d , d e l e t e o r rename th e
c u r r e n t lp c file in th e c:\M6y_ymw\M_plc or T_plc f o l d e r .
Th e copy th e new file i n t o t h a t directory.
36 ) Power o ff and on an d u p d a t e is c o m p l e t e . V e r i f y by
l o o k i n g a t th e v e r s i o n screen.
401
402
1 Outline
This document describes the maintenance of the thermal displacement compensation software
(MazakTdc).
The traditional thermal displacement compensation function has performed the compensation
considering that the thermal deformation of the machine was proportional to the temperature. Using
this method, the thermal displacement could be compensated with high accuracy in the steady state.
However, just after the spindle speed was changed, it could not be compensated properly because
the time constants for the temperature change are significantly different between the thermal
displacement and the measured temperature.
The thermal displacement compensation software (MazakTdc) estimates and compensates the
thermal deformation of the machine based on the spindle speed and the temperature. It monitors the
spindle speed and compensates the thermal displacement according to the speed. Therefore, it can
compensate it properly even in the transient state.
2 Installation of the MazakTdc software
2.1 Function setting on Matrix
The software has been pre-installed in the hardware on Matrix.

To validate the software function, set the parameter as follows:
Step 1 Set the parameter 042 bit4 to 1. That will allow “MazakTdc.exe” to be started when the
power is turned on .
2.2 Individual installation
The following describes the procedure for the individual installation of the MazakTdc” software.
Step 1 Create a new folder named C:¥Mazaktdc.”
Step 2 Copy the “MazakTdc.exe file from a media such as a USB memory or a floppy disk to the
created folder “C:¥Mazaktdc.
If you already have a parameters file, copy it to the same folder as the EXE file.
lWESiTB ' “ Mazaktdc f-lnlxl
?yJWQ Sim®
77Tiioiir
- M 7-f X/tV9 At
/; ; : MazakTdc.exe 60KB
£3 3.5 CA •FD (A.) fij] Parameler.txt 4KB 747ÿ#
8 <C )
_
_) Act obat Reader
_J Cpcu
J Custom Display
JSctbus
J Ladder
Ladder3
L_J Ladder 4
:_J LADDERWTNB
;+• iI m6y_vmvv
It Cj mtyboot
: 1 Mainte
JIDSB
_J MC.Backup
_J MC'.Dir.ct
_J MC . Machine
iL ZJ
(ZSmim :;a=i
403
3 Version upgrade of the MazakTdc software
3.1 Version upgrade on MATRIX
The version upgrade of “MazakTdc.exe” will be automatically performed when upgrading the version
of the NC software.
The operations described in ”3.2 Full version upgrade of the MazakTdc software” might be
required due to a modification to “MazakTdc.exe.” In that case, that will be informed in the NC
software release notice.
3.2 Full version upgrade of the MazakTdc software
When upgrading the version of the “MazakTdc” software after its data structure is changed, the
parameters used in the previous version might possibly be applied after the version upgrade is
completed, resulting in a malfunction. Therefore, perform the following procedure to prevent the
previous parameters from being applied after the version upgrade:
Step 1 Before starting the NC version upgrade, open the “MazakTdc” window and save the
current parameters in the folder “C:¥Mazaktdc.”
• As for how to open the “MazakTdc” window, refer to “5 Opening the window.”
• As fo r ho w to save a parameters file, refer to “8 Controlling the parameters.”
• If no change was made to the parameters on a customer’s machine, it is not needed to
save the parameters because the file of the default parameters at delivery already
exists in the folder “C:¥Mazaktdc.”
Step 2 Clicking on the Sr button will open the H

......
Coefficient2 Setting. *J
dialog of ''Coefficient2 Setting.., shown on X Y Z
the right. Cl | o'oOOOOE+00 d | nnr-nn cl j 9.88000E-01
92 I 0.000Q0E+Q0 c2 | 0.00000E+00 c2 | 790oioOE-03
There are 12 parameters to be set, e1 to e4,
for X, Y and Z in the lower part of the dialog
cii; j o.oooooE+00 d1 | 8.823S3E-01 d1 j O.OOOOOE+00
Set all the values of these parameters to d2 j 0 OOOOOE+OO 2 3.2941 0E-02 c)2 ] O.OOOOOE+OO
“0.”
0.00 ei 0.00 el J 0.00
2 0.00 e2 0.00 e2 0.00
e’3 0.00 e3 0.00
Then, click the “OK” button after changing 4 0.00 e4 0.00 e4 0.00
the parameters to close the dialog.
L
_ « CANCEL
Step 3 Exit the running “MazakTdc” software.

Refer to “4.2 Exiting the software.”
Step 4 Perform the NC version upgrade
Step 5 Restart the NC unit.

Confirm that the “MazakTdc” software was started. The icon will appear in the task tray.
Step 6 Stop the thermal displacement compensation.

Click the M button to stop the compensation.
404
Step 7 Import the parameters file.
Open the window, referring to “5 Opening the window.”
Import the ne w parameters file, referring “8 Controlling the parameters.”
Step 8 Check the parameters.

Confirm that the parameters set to 0 in Step 2 returned to 1.
Step 9 Restart
Exit the “MazakTdc” software and restart the N C u nit.
3.3 Individual version upgrade of the MazakTdc software
The following describes the procedure for the individual version upgrade of the “MazakTdc software,
which is not involved in the version upgrade of the NC software.
Step 1 Open the MazakTdc” window and save the current parameters as a file in the folder
“C:¥Mazaktdc.”
• As for ho w to open the “MazakTdc” window, refer to “5 Opening the window.”
• As f or h ow to save the parameters file, refer to “8 Controlling
• If no change was made to the parameters for a customer’s machine, it is not needed to
save a parameters file because the file of the default parameters at delivery already
exists in the folder “C:¥Mazaktdc.”
tep 2 Clicking on the & button will open the Coefficient Setting;.
X
i::
v
I mz *
dialog of “Coefficient2 Setting..,” shown
C1 j OOOOOOE+OO :
C1 | O.OOOOOE+OO C1'ÿ] 9.88000E 01
the right.
e2 j 0.00000E+00 c2 | O.OirULE-IO c2 j 7.90C€ObTT
There are 12 parameters to be set, e1 to

e4, for X, Y and Z in the lower part of the d1 j O.OOOOOE+OO dl j 8.82353E 01 d1 j 0.00000E+00
dialog 02 j O.OOOOOE+OO 02 | 3 2941 OE-02 d2 | O.OOOOOE+OO
Set all the values of these parameters to
“0.” 0.00 1 0.00 ei o.oo
e2 0 00
e3 j 0.00
64 0.00 64 0.00 4 0.00
Then, click the “OK” button after changing

the parameters to close the dialog. lr~:g< J CANCEL
Step 3 Exit the running M azakTdc” software

Refer to “4.2 Exiting the software.”
Step 4 Open the folder ”C:¥Mazaktdc” through the Explorer and change the name of the
“MazakTdc.exe file by adding the version number that is currently installed in order to
prevent the file from being overwritten. (For example, the name of the old version file was
changed to “MazakTdc62.exe” in the figure on the next page.)
405
Step 5 Copy the “MazakTdc.exe” lj Iÿtl-7 - CÿMazakTdo HSBj
file from a media such as U7XfcP
a USB memory or a floppy ------------
...._ ..
disk to the folder.

3 MazakTdc 5 El ritd jtMg *> | y | g | »,|
M l 1X03*1*8 ]
i d) Hsf A
]- 10] J2ctbus K MazakTdc.exe 360KB 7V.

i Q Kev MazakTdc62.exe 360KB 77*
£0-0] Ladder 74;
1
Parameter txt | 3K B
53' 0D lan_card_driver_pcislot_c||i Para meter05051 7# 1 .txt 3KB 74;:
3 d ) m6y_ymw
lil-dl m6yboot
E3 ‘ Lfl mainte
;
03 MazakTdc
\B 03 MC_Backup
)• i.,1 MC_Direct Mode Prograr||l
i d) MC_Machine Programs |||
h d ) MC_Machine Programs '0
I il
\i mcofiVift s'1- /t
x [725KB .3tGB)
Step 6 Double click on “MazakTdc.exe.’’

Confirm that the “MazakTdc” software was started. The icon will appear in the task tray.
Step 7 Check the version of the “MazakTdc” software.

As for the check procedure, refer to “4 Basic function operations.”
Step 8 Import a parameters file.

Open the window, referring to “4 Basic function operations.”
Read a new parameters file in, referring to “8 Controlling the parameters.”
Step 9 Check the parameters.

Check that the parameter value changed to 0 in Step 2 returned to 1 .
Check the value of each parameter, referring to “7 Functions in the window.”
Step 10 Restart
Exit the “MazakTdc” software and restart the NC unit.
406
4
4.1
Basic function operations
Step _
Manual start of the software
To manually start the software, double click on “MazakTdc.exe.”

— The icon will appear in the task tray.
:1 ?
The thermal displacement compensation will begin just after the software is started.
4.2 Exiting th e software
Step 1 Move the mouse pointer over the icon in the task tray.
jMazakTdc‘|
m ,a49
Step 2 Right click on the icon.

The “Exit” menu will appear.
-*ÿ
About MasakTcb...
f U
Exit 1 j ?;58
Step 3 Left click on the “Exit” menu.

-» The software will be exited.
When the software is exited, the thermal displacement compensation will stop.
4.3 How to check the software version
[l£ 19:49
Step 2 Right click on the icon.

—
>• The “About MazakTdc...” menu will appear.
About MazakTdc... |P'~ II

Exit S 20:00
Step 3 Left click on the “About MazakTdc...” menu.

—• The dialog with the version information will appear.
1
bout Ma2akTDC a
azakTdc Version Beta 6.6 OK
3
Copyright (C) 2005 Yamazaki Mazak Corp.
407
5 Opening the window
Opening th e window will allow you to set, change, save and import the parameters.
To open the window, it is required to enter the password.
5.1 Entering the password
I fMazakTdc’l
19:49
Step 2 Double click on the icon.

-* The “Password” dialog will appear.
Password
rÿr~i CANCEL
Step 3 Enter the password ”1131” and then press the “OK” button
assword [3
II
r
h ] CANCEL
The “Mazak Thermal Displacement Compensation” window will appear.
Simulation Mode- Mazak Thermal Deformation Compensation

:
HE
ile Edit Compensation: Setting.. View Help issiti
jjH : JJfe m ffi foj ab Cd ;§ f j I
Ready ;
j
’
[HUM j :ÿ
408
6 Contents shown in the window
The window provides the software processing information, the measured temperatures, the spindle
speed, the spindle load and the offset amounts.
The following shows the state of the window just after the compensation begins.
Mode- Mazak Thermal Deformation Compensation -in|xi

File Edit Compensation Setting. View Help
B ab ced # fj
Loading DataCom OK .
.NCTable is attached correctly
3
;Data Initialize OK . Processing information
;Fin>t Temperature : 20.80
;Start thermal deformation compensation
;ye a r/d ate/time T1 T2 T3 4 T5 mSp mLd cmp.X cmp.Y cmp.Z
05/06/27 19:46:09; 20.85 20.75 21.98 20.52 0.00 4 6.000 -6.000 16.000
Iv V V. V. J
—
. V
...4.
r-r NU M - jf||
Compensation time
ear/Month/Day
Measured
temperature
Spindle Info. Offset amount -
Speed & load | X, Y & Z
Hours:Minutes:Seconds ch1, 2, 3, 4 & 5
After the compensation begins, only the compensation information is displayed in the windows as the
time passes.
The measured temperatures will be shown in the order of ch1, ch2, ch3, ch4 and ch5 immediately
after the “time” column.

File Edit Compensation Setting.. View Help
- ~|xj
iH| & m[m m ab %«

05/06/27 19:48:03: 20.95 j 20.75] TToil '20.47 Food 000 4.500 -6.500 12.500
t.
05/06/27 19:43:13; 20.95 20.70 22.07 | j 20 52 1 I 0.00 3000 7 4.500 -6.500 12.500
05/06/27 19:48:23 ; 20.95 20.75 22.03 20.47 | I 0.00 3000 4.500 -6.500 12.500
. .. .
05/06/27 19:43:33 ; 20.95 20.75 22.12 20.47 | | 0.00 3000 4.500 -6.500 12.500
05/06/27 19:43:43 ; 20.98 20.75 22.03 20.47 I I 0.00 3000 4.500 -6.500 12.500
05/06/27 19:43:53; 20.95 20.75 22.03 20.47 ] | 0.00 3000 7 4.500 -6.500 12.500
05/06/27 19:4903; 20 95 | 20.75 | 21.98 I 20.47 I I 0.00 3000 7 4.500 -6.500 12.500
7'
eady [ NUM §§
ch1 ch2 ch3 ch4 ch5
409
7 Functions in the window
_
7.1 Functions
Menu Bar Title Icon The description of the function
File Save Overwrite save the text in the window to the specified file in
the Text format.
Save As.. Save the text in the window as a new file in the Text format.
Import Parameter Import the parameters file (extension: *.txt). However, it
cannot be imported while performing the thermal
displacement compensation. If yo u try to import the file
during the compensation, the alarm “Please Stop
Compensating appear.
xport Parameter xport and save the parameters to a file (extension: *.txt)
Exit Exit the software.
Edit Undo Undo the previous editing operation.
Cut Cut the selected text in the window.
&
Copy Copy the selected text in the window.
fli
Paste Paste the copied or cu t text to the window.
Select All Select all the texts in the window.
Compensation Start Start the thermal displacement compensation.
ffi
Stop Stop the thermal displacement compensation.
Setting.. Inter Face Open the Inter Face parameters setting dialog.
Coefficient ab Open the Coefficient parameters setting dialog.
Coefficient2 Open the Coefficient2 parameters setting dialog.

View Toolbar Show or hide the tool bar.
Status Bar Show or hide the status bar.
Hide Window Hide the “Mazak Thermal Displacement Compensation”
window. (To show the window again, double click the icon in
the task tray.)
elp About Mazak Tdc.. Show the version dialog.
f
7.2 Setting the interface parameters.
Clicking the button on the tool bar will open the “Inter Face Setting” dialog. The following table
provides the description of each parameter.
Inter Face Setting.. a

j— NC Type -
|C M640T,MT,TE,MT-5X,T Nexus Interval (sec)
; C M64DM, M-5X, M Nexus
ollow up (hour) 0
j C M640M Pro
j r M640MT Pro Time Constant
i f? MATRIX
emp filter 10
register IJF Load filter 20

Compensation Temperature
ound Unit )001 mm
RX 2501 RT1 |2234
i
Y (2500 RT2 |2230
RZ 2226 RT3 ] 2232
r Restore Log File
Rsts j 0
RT4 fo
RT5 [0
iLlgilJl CANCEL
nit jo.uOOQI mm |
410
Parameter Set Range I/O Object* Description
_
NO Type Select Select the type of the NC unit for the machine.
N/A If NC type is selected (which is the default
state), the compensation will not begin.
Interval (sec) 10 0 to 3599 O The interval that the thermal displacement
compensation is performed. If the set value is
0, the compensation will be automatically
performed at the interval of 10 seconds, which
is default.
Follow up (hour) 3 Oto 24 O Follow-up time. If the set value is 0, the
_
follow-up will not be performed._
Time Constant 0 Oto 30 Width of the dead zone
Temp filter 0 Oto 30 Number of the moving average filters to be
input for _
the temperature data
Load filter 0 0 to 30 Number of the moving average filters to be
input for the load data _
Round Unit 0.0005mm Rounding unit. Basically apply the same unit as
that of the NC interpolation.
RX 0 0 to 20000 O R Register No . which the X-axis thermal
displacement offset amount is written to. If the
set value is 0, the offset amount will not be
written.
RY 0 0 to 20000 O R Register No. which the Y-axis thermal
written.
RZ 0 0 to 20000 O Register No. which the Z-axis thermal
written.
Rsts the state of the in.
RT 1 0 0 to 20000 O R Register No. from which the NC value of the
temperature sensor 1 is read in. If the set value
is 0, the NC value of the temperature sensor
will not be read in. (The value will be 0.)_
RT2 0 0 to 20000 O R Register No. from which the NC value of the
temperature sensor 2 is read in If the set value
will not be read in. (The value will be 0.)_
RT3 0 0 to 20000 O R Register No. from which the NC value the
will not be read in. (The value will be _
RT 4 0 0 to 20000 O R Register No. from which the NC value of the
will not be read in. (The value will be 0.) _
RT5 0 0 to 20000 O Number of R register f ro m w hi ch the NC value
of the temperature sensor 5 is read in. If the
set value is 0, the NC value of the temperature
sensor will not be read in. (The value will be 0.)
Unit 0.0001 mm Unit of offset amount
Restore Log File Check X Checking this check box will automatically save
N/A the thermal displacement compensation history
to the “C:¥MazakTdcLog.txt” file. This function
is valid at debugging. However, if debugging
with this parameter checked, the file size will
gradually increase, running out free space on
the hard drive. Therefore, this parameter is not
every time starting the software
as default.
NOTE: The mark “O” indicates a parameter that is subject to and the mark “x indicates a parameter t ha t i s
not subject to the Import Parameter or the Export Parameter function.
411
7.3 Setting the parameters (coefficients a & b).
Clicking the button on the tool ba r will open the following “Coefficientl setting..” dialog. The
description of each parameter is provided in the table below.
_
oefficientl Sett ing.. ill
9 b —
X Y z X Y z
1 -1 .23 a1 -5 98 1 | -7.33 : M(19.9S552E-01 b1j b1 j 96222E 01
a2 j 2 24 o2 179 a2 9 76 b2 | -1 09026E-05 b2| UOOOOOE+OO 1

b2 -8 .54373E-06
a3 j -3.92 a3| 6 91 a3[~278 b3 mSSFEg' ' b3 | 0 OOOOOE+00 b3 jTo6663E-10

j 04 1 3.05 o4|-1 .56 a4 I 1.73 i t*r 9 2UnB(ir-14 b4 | 0 ODOOOE+OO b4 j -4 07307E-1 3
5| 0 00 as j o no as j 0.00 j b5 }* 1 1 21 60 E 0 7 b5 I 0 00000E+00 I
b5 -1 68425E-06
j
6|-291 j
a6 -23 .16 a6 j -27.70 b6 -7
I 79079E-04 b6| 0 OODOOE+OO j
b6 -1 892S2E-03
'
. j
b7 | -2 58678E-04 b7| 0 00C0CIE+00 b7 j 5.91 733E-03
j bsl 0 OODOOE+OO b8| O.OOOOoifoO b8 j 0 OOCOOE+OO

| b9
1 0.000C0E+00 b9 j O.OOOOOE+OO b9 j 0 00C00E+G0
Wm V I b10 j -2 S000UE+01 b10j 0.00000E+00 b10 j -5.00000E+01
-
BBSs y
IkS 3 CANCEL j
Parameter Default Set Range I/O Description

Object*
1 0 -3.0e38 to +3.0e38 Coefficient of the temperature term for the structure
thermal displacement compensation _
2 0 -3.0e38 to +3.0e38 O Coefficient of the temperature term for the structure
thermal displacement compensation
4 -3.0e38 to +3.0e38 O Coefficient of the temperature term for the structure
thermal displacement compensation _
6 0 -3.0e38 to +3.0e38 O Constant of the structure thermal displacement
compensation
1 0 -3.0e38 to +3.0e38 O Coefficient of the displacement term for the spindle
response surface
2 0 -3.0e38 to +3.0e38 O Coefficient of the speed term fo r the spindle response
surface
3 0 -3.0e38 to +3.0e38 Coefficient of the speed squared term fo r the spindle
response surface
4 0 -3.0e38 to +3.0e3r O Coefficient of t he s pe ed cubic term for the spindle
response surface
5 0 -3.0e38 to +3.06ÿ O Coefficient of the (speed x displacement) term fo r the
spindle response surface
6 0 -3.0e38 to +3.0e38 Speed ON/OFF for the spindle response surface
7 0 -3.0e38 to +3.0e38 Speed UP/DOWN for the spindle response surface
8 0 -3.0e38 to +3.0e35' O Squared nominal load coefficient for the spindle
response surface
9 0 -3.0e38 to +3.0e38 Not used
10 0 -3.0e38 to +3.0e38 O Determine the limit (the range of the offset
displacement). The offset amount by the spindle
response surface is limited to the range of b10 to 0 if
b10 < 0; and 0 to b10 if b10 > 0. (If b10 = 0, no limit.)
NOTE: The mark “O” indicates a parameter that is subject to and the mark “ x ’’ indicates a parameter that is
not subject to the Import Parameter or the Export Parameter function.
412
7.4 Setting the parameters (coefficients c, d & e).
Clicking the button on the tool bar will open the following “Coefficientl setting..” dialog. The
description of each parameter is provided in the table below.
1 *J
X Y 2
1 | 0.00000E+00 f 0 00000E+00 d r 9 88000E-01
C2 n OOOOOE+OO c2 j O.OOOOOE+00 c2 7.90000E-03

m
d1 | 0.00000E+00 eft ] 852353F-01 di O.OOOOOE+OO
d2 faoooooF+00 d2 [ .2941 0E-02 d2

f 0 OOOOOE+OO
e1 1.00 e1
1 1.00 1 00
2 00 82 1 0.00 e2 I 1 00
e3 e3 ( 00 e3 100
j—
4 oc e4T1 00 e4 0 00
iniMzm CANCEL
l
Parameter Default Set Range I/O Object* Description

1 0 -3.0e38~+3.0e38 O Displacement compensation coefficient 1 in
natural cooling at the spindle stop. _
2 0 -3.0e38~+3.0e38 Displacement compensation coefficient 2 in
natural cooling at the spindle stop. _
0 -3.0e38~+3.0e38 Distortion compensation coefficient 1 in natural
_
cooling the spindle stop. _
2 0 -3.0e38~+3.0e38 Distortion compensation coefficient 2 in natural
cooling at the spindle stop.
1 0 -3.0e38~+3.0e38 O Structure thermal displacement compensation is
valid
2 0 -3.0e38~+3.0e38 O Spindle thermal displacement compensation with
the spindle surface is valid _
3 0 -3.0e38~+3.0e38 Displacement compensation in natural cooling at
the spindle stop is valid _
4 0 -3.0e38~+3.0e38 Distortion compensation in natural cooling at the
spindle stop is valid
413
8 Controlling the parameters
8.1 Saving the parameters to a
Save the current setting to a parameters file (*.txt).
Step 1 Click “File” and then “Export Parameter.”

The following dialog will appear. Coirc-n. jturv g
Save
Save
Import Parameter
Export Parameter
&it
Step 2 Set the file name and click the “Save” button.
Save In: | .jj t,ta».w«io

Parartveter.txt
ilename: IBBHH- Save ]

Save astute fiTI FilesOMxO Cancel ]
8.2 Importing the parameters from th e file
Import the parameters file (*.txt). It is required to save the parameters file in the “Mazaktdc” folder.
(However, the parameters cannot be imported during the thermal displacement compensation.)
Step 1 Click “File” and then “Import Parameter.”
The following dialog will appear. Edit .Compensation
Save . CtrKS
Save As.
:
Export Parameter
Exit;
Step 2 Select the parameters file to be used from the “Mazaktdc” folder and then click the “Open”
button.
ave;|n: j Mazaktdc H aJdjl=Tj

ll) Farameter.txt
ilename: .. Save ]
Save as type: jT* :< t Files (ÿ txO Cancel
414
Step 3 Exit the “Mazaktdc” software once and restart it.
( As f or how to exit or start the software, refer to “3 Basic function operations.”)
By performing the above steps, the parameter will be saved in the registry.
8.3 Name of the parameters file
Define and identify the name of the parameters file as follows:
Machine standard parameter
tdcOOOAAAAA.txt
tdc Identifies that it is the thermal displacement parameters file.

OOO Machine code
A A A A A : Identifies the added number, the machine specification or the parameter version.
Determine the string and the digit number for every machine
EX ) tdc 372A0000.txt (in case of INT100)

tdc OOODHBAA.txt
O: Machine code
Version identification
A: Special-ordered
A: Revision to the special-ordered one
9 Work involved in the hard-disk replacement
When replacing the hard disk, perform the following procedure to the MazakTdc” software.
Item necessary to be prepared: Media such as a US B memory
Step 1 Save (export) the parameters.

Save the parameters in the M azaktdc” folder, referring to “8. Controlling the parameters.
Note: If no change was made to the parameters on a customer’s machine, it is not needed
to save the parameters because the file of the default parameters at delivery already
exists in the folder C:¥Mazaktdc.”
Step 2 Save the “*.txt files under the “C:¥Mazaktdc” folder to the media.
Step 3 Replace the hard disk.
Step 4 Turn on the power and copy the *.txt” file in the media to the “C:¥Mazaktdc” folder.
Step 5 Import the parameters, referring to “4 Basic function operations,” “5 Opening the window
and “8 Controlling the parameters.”
Step 6 Turn off and then turn on the power to check that the MazakTdc” software is started up.
415
10 Recovering the wire breaking on a thermistor
Th e alarm “THERMAL DISPLACEMENT OFFSET ERROR” will arise when the wire breaking occurs
on a thermistor.
Th e CH temperature value will change for a thermistor with the wire breaking and the offset amount
will considerably change in the “Mazaktdc” window, as shown in the figure below.
File
Edit Compensation Setting.. View Help
- a)x|
v 3V ffi ab %<l : ®c Z
goo 12.50l>
5/06/27
05/06/27
19:48:03; 20.95
19:48:13; 20.95
20.75
20.70
21.98
22.07 20.521
0.00
0.00
3000
3000
7
7 4.500
6.500
6.500 12.500
ill 1
05/06/27 19:48:23; 20.95 20.75 22.03 0.47 0.00 3000 7 4.500 6.500 12.500 Normal state
05/06/27 19:48:33; 20.95 20.75 22.12 20.47 0.00 3000 7 4.500 6.500 12.500
05/06/27
05/08/27
19:43:43; 20.98
19:43:53; 20.95
20.75
20.75
22.03
22.03
20.47
20.47 /
0.00
0.00
3000
3000 7
4.500
4.500
6.500
6.500
12.500
12.500 J
05/06/27
1
19.49:03; 20 95 2075 21.93 £0.4/ 0.00 3000 7 jo o 6.500 12.500,
Jll:
eady rÿ m r™ 4
Considerably
Simulation Mode- Mazak Thermal Deformatio|i Cot warn change in|x|
File Edit Compensation Setting. View Help
H ' *> BV ffi tefr ab Cfl ) ffjfe

r
5/08/27
05/06/27
19:58:03; 20.95
19:53:13; 20.95
20.75
20.70
21.98
22.07
£44.1a
-44.16\
0.00
0.00
3000
3000
7
7
#7?) .500
7 6 .5 00
-49.500
- 53 .5 00
-36.500*
-41.000
.3 State at the
05/08/27 19:58:23; 20.95 20.75 22.03 -44.16 1 0.00 3000 7 82.500 - 57 .5 00 - 45 .5 00 wire breaking
05/06/27 19:58:33; 20.95 20.75 22.12 -44.16 j 0.00 3000 7 88.500 - 61 .5 00 - 50 .0 00
05/06/27 19:58:43; 20.98 20.75 22.03 -44.16 I 0.00 3000 7 9 8 .5 00
- 65 .5 00 -54.500
| 05/06/27 19:58:53; 20.95 20.75 22.03 -44.16 1
0.00 3000 7 100.000 - 69 .5 00 - 59 .0 00
-J
05/06/27 19:59:03; 20.95 20.75 21.98 \-44.1i 0.00 3000 7 'WO .000 -73.500 -63.500
d
eady il [RUM f
i
-Simulation Mode- Mazak Thermal Deformatioij Compent ,IOjxj
ile
a
Edit Compensate
m ui ffi
5/06/27 20:03:03; 20.95
05/06/27 20 :03:13; 20 .95
05/O6/27 20:03:23; 20.95
05/06/27 20:03:33; 20.95
-
Setting..
20.75
20.70
20.75
20.75
.b w
View
21.98
22.07
22.03
22.12
@
-44 16
-44 16
? I
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
Recovered
~j Will no t recover
i soon after action
3000 7 -1Q|
Il
.500
• 8#0
i
-80.500
• 85 000
• 8 9. 50 0
«yÿv000
3
V
State that the

wire breaking
was recovered
05/06/27 20:03:43; 20.98 20.75 22.03 20.47\ 0.00 3000 7 'SfoO.OOO-81.500 -89.5(315%
05/06/27 20:03:53; 20 95 20.75 22.03 20.47 0.00 3000 7 -100.000 -77 500 -85.000
05/06/27 20:03:03; 20.95 20.75 21.98 20.47/ 0.00 3000 7 -100.000 -73.500 -S0[5G0ÿ
d
Ready ;NUM l A
After finding the wire breaking on a thermistor, recover it according to the procedure below.
Step 1 Open the MazakTdc” window and check the temperature values and the offset amounts
of the thermistor channels (C H 1 to 5) for wire breaking.
Step 2 Press the “Emergency” button on the machine.
Step Recover the wire breaking of a thermistor.
Step 4 Confirm that the temperature value of a channel with the wire breaking was recovered on
the “MazakTdc” window.
(It will take a longer time for the offset amount to return to the normal state due to the
filders.)
Step 5 Restart the “MazakTdc” software. (As fo r how to exit and start the “MazakTdc” software
refer to “4 Basic function operations.”
Step 6 Confirm that the temperature value and the offset amount were recovered.
416
11 Handling procedure after turning the production machine ON
It is required to import the parameters after turning the production machine ON . The following
provides the procedure.
Step Copy the specified parameters file “*.txt” to the “C:¥Mazaktdc” folder.
[ W.tj'grl azaktdc - n|x|
PS.-OTP :. SrSW : MW *
S rx)frr
M 71 3>t>S X* j| I iÿNi MasakTde.exe 60KB TfWÿWj
S)
35<>f FD
B-® <Ci
i Bd
(A;)
AcrobatReader
jgj Parameter trt
J 4KB 747K£#
Cl C >~
(_J Custom Display
: J2ctbus
O Ladder
gj Ladders
C j Ladder4
£ j LADDERWTNB
; ©DmSv.ymw
SI m6yboot
g) Mamte
dEHHSS
& d MC.Backee
-
Cj MC.Direct Mode P n[
I
1 MC_Machme
Pfogrÿl JLL J di
2 10©*?%'*.:
Step 2 Start “MazakTdc.exe” manually. Refer to “4 Basic function operations.”
Step 3 Open the window. Refer to “5 Opening the window.”
Step 4 Import the parameters. Refer to “8 Controlling the parameters.”
Step 5 Click the button to close the window.
Step 6 Exit “MazakTdc.exe.” Refer to “4.2 Exiting the software.”
Step 7 Set the parameter for the software functions on Matrix so that the “MazakTdc” software
can be started from Matrix. Refer to “2.1 Function setting on Matrix.”
417
418

Dokumen - Tips Mazak Mazatrol Matrix Control Classroom Maintenance Manual C740mt0201e

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Dokumen - Tips Mazak Mazatrol Matrix Control Classroom Maintenance Manual C740mt0201e

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

MAZATROL

PL C No . of steps: 128k No. of steps :64k

servo 3000/ 4000 r.p.m

3, Acrylic key top j - .1 i 1 -VI I - •

for easy click II 7. Same design for all

Interface Connected to Standard

jPC Card Standard ATA compliant memory card only

Rear side o f part surrounded

with the yellow frame

Decrease printed circuit boards of NO unit

2) Both of Mazatrol and EIA/ISO programs can perform a simulation.

4) A simulation can be run in the background.

or k simulation Machine simulation

Actual Machine 3D Models

[Intelligent Thermal Slueld]

1st and 2nd process simultaneous cutting

Work No.1 I Work No.10

1) A history of 10,000 alarms ca n be saved. (48 alarms in case ofM640)

1) The running management data for 12 months can be displayed.

Use status of spindles (speed and load) Alarm information

3H» «>< t>S» feJfS «S;*»

Mtf-J X Sfrft <ÿ<) ».»» ÿ : AW* {.-V

K' :i Sti • *«• ME *'I- «* • H fcS I* «• » 36:

3. DIAGNOSIS MONITOR Display

4. FLC SIGNAL Display

The addresses of a device corresponding to each TITLE ar e displayed.

5. HARDWARE MONITOR Display

The ladder version for the virtual machining is displayed.

7. SERVO MONITOR & SPINDLE MONITOR Displays

8. Start of Application Software from Mazatrol Menu

A file can be saved in either of the TNG and “BMP formats.

Active Print Screen & SAVE

10 , Operation Log & Operation Player Softwares (M740Eye.exe & M740Player.exe)

Back Side of Matrix

r Right side is like Fusion

Hidden Compact Flash -Drive D-Used to backup

pampi I - Top of Matrix

IBBHHH JH -dm V :-. •

1-C73-M128 or M1-P12-M256: Main PC PCB HN260 card

'G 'j i i&.wiiiiiiiii«Mm iriii:i Ti 1 1': 1#

PC RAM DIMM: 256 MB

HN01 1 : PC to NC extender bus

ffS IfE '.II • >'; >:

HN482: NC main memory PCB, SRAM and FLROM

This contains Main- A, Control Serial Number,

» *“w iS 'i j £§ aSfey ' - ‘

• Similar to HR25 1 on the M640

HN271/NH272: LCD interface PCB

• Similar to HR353 card

its 8-1 -. A&H

fcy > ' • • ÿ - ÿ .

CXA0385: backlight power supply for 15” LCD

NC cooling fan: Notice the third wire fo r overheat detection

i* xtfvA.r&f 'i * 'SJ

PD27 Power Supply

• Similar to PD25 Power Supply for Fusion and Mpro.

fl||p vasar gv2 .

R,.Jÿ y tT*V~ F . » < • . «.• v c

Connector layout drawing

FAN 1 AN2 CardBus ON / OFF C ON NE CT IO N D ESC R PT IO N

I CRT External CRT I/F (not used)

CD Internal LCD I/F

LAN Ethernet I/F

K' :i Sti • «• ME 'I- «* • H fcS I* «• » 36: